H 











# 






%& 






5 9 







^ <3* 







\# 



* r£ 




* S ^ 



5> = ^ 







^4. ^\4 . >«. 







C " 



. %. 



\/' %•/ :* 



^ 






<£ ^ 
<£ ^ 




c\ V 














%, ^ v . 





















^ 3* 










• <% 







\#* 



s r ^ % ' 







S -t * * s s aV> 













s ^ <*> * * * s ^ 



F° \* ^ ****** ,\* *■ 



o 










& - 







r ' ^ A^ 










J? ^ 




•/■% 






^ "^ 
























•/^ 



C * 



S^t ^o^ *, 



v * 



v . 



^ z 










^0^ 

^ ^ 



> o ^ * o ,- ^> \y „ -v * o „ '^ 



# 





":^^ 



V 













^0^ 






^ ^ 



O ,^ 




^0^ 



V* ^ 



^ ^ : , 





















^ 






V 










v* ,# 



** V 






ROMAIC 



MODERN GREEK GRAMMAR. 



BY 



E. A. SOPHOCLES. 



JLdiC 




BOSTON: 
HICKLING, SWAN, AND BREWER. 

1857. 



Y^\tf> 



a 



*(**> 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1857, by 

HICKLING, SWAN, AND BREWER, 

in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. 



CAMBRIDGE : 
ELECTROTYPED BY METCALF AND COMPANY. 



£>?* 



INTRODUCTION 



u Greek is read almost everywhere," says Cicero. 1 And the 
Greek inscriptions of the Alexandrian and Roman periods, 
found in regions widely remote from each other, in Spain, in 
Mesopotamia, and from ^Ethiopia to Sarmatia, attest the cor- 
rectness of this statement. When, in the course of time, its 
turn came to stand on the defensive, the language of Greece 
was enabled by its singular tenacity to resist all external at- 
tacks. The modern pronouns, personal endings, case-endings, 
and numerals, clearly show that the combined forces of barba- 
rism could make no impression upon its centre. The Latin con- 
quered the West ; but it retreated somewhat precipitately from 
Greek ground. The Bulgarians were compelled to adopt the 
language of their neighbors, the Slavi ; but the Slavic had to 
yield to the Greek wherever it came in immediate contact with 
it. As to the Turkish population of Greece, they are indebted 
to their creed rather than to their native pride for the preserva- 
tion of their Tatar dialect. 

The Romaic or Modern Greek, the language of the modern 
Greeks, and the leading language of the Levant, is the offspring 
of Mediaeval Greek. In its orthography and etymology it is 
essentially the same as Ancient Greek. But it diifers from the 
parent stock in many particulars. Thus, 

I. All its vow el-sounds are isochronous, no distinction being 
made between long and short. 

1 Cicer. pro Arch. 23. Nam siquis minorem gloriae fructum putat 
ex Graecis versibus percipi quam ex Latinis, vekementer errat : pro- 
pterea, quod Gracca leguntur in omnibus fere regionibus, Latina suis 
finibus, exiguis sane, continentur. 



IV INTRODUCTION. 

II. Its rhythm depends not on quantity, as in Ancient Greek, 
but on accent. 

III. In general, the meanings of its words do not belong to 
the ancient language, although for the most part legitimately 
developed from it. 

IV. In its syntax it is essentially different from classical 
Greek. 

V. It has discarded the dual number. 

VI. Masculines and feminines of the classical third declension 
are inflected after the analogy of the first. 

Y1I. The ancient diminutives have taken the place of their 
primitives. 

VIII. It has no nouns of the common gender. 

IX. The relations which, in Ancient Greek, are denoted by 
the genitive and dative, are, in Modern Greek, generally ex- 
pressed by the accusative with prepositions. 

X. Its pronouns, with the exception of the personal, demon- 
strative, and interrogative, are periphrastic. 

XL Its future, perfect, and pluperfect are periphrastic, as in 
English. 

XII. The third person of the imperative is periphrastic, as in 
English. 

XIII. It has no middle voice, the passive supplying its place. 

XIV. It has no optative mood ; its place being supplied by 
the subjunctive and indicative. 

XV. It has no infinitive; its place being supplied by the 
subjunctive with ud, or by the indicative with on. Except the 
infinitive after the auxiliary verbs 6e\<o and e^w. Except also 
the infinitive with the article. 

XVI. Its participle active is indeclinable, as in English. 

XVII. Its perfect participle passive has no augment what- 
ever. 

XVIII. With the exception of eljxai, to be, it has no verbs 
in jxt. 

XIX. All its prepositions take the accusative. 

XX. It has no adverbs in -a>s. 

But important as are these deviations from the classical stand- 
ard, the modern dialect is so intimately connected with the an- 
cient, that a critical knowledge of the former without a corre- 
sponding knowledge of the latter is wholly out of the question. 
In fact, a Greek's mastery of his mother tongue is just in 
proportion to his acquaintance with Ancient Greek. 

Dialects, in the usual sense of the term, do not exist in Ko- 



INTRODUCTION. V 

maic. Provincial vulgarisms, however, are very common. 
Further, every district has its acceM, that is, its peculiar 
modulation of voice. As to the jargon of Tsakonid, in Pelo- 
ponnesus, it is so unlike the national language that it has no 
title to be called a genuine Greek dialect. For although a bar- 
barous Romaic, some of its characteristics seem to connect it 
with the Slavic. And if it can be shown ethnologically that the 
Tsakoniots belong to the Slavic type, they must be regarded as 
the lineal descendants of the Slavi who settled in Peloponnesus 
in the eighth century, and finally lost their original language 
without being able to substitute the Greek in its place. 

Previously to the late Greek revolution the best Romaic was 
spoken at Constantinople, and particularly at Phanari, not be- 
cause the Constantinopolitans were of purer descent, but simply 
because, as a body, they were less ignorant than the inhab- 
itants of the provinces. At present the cultivated Modem 
Greek is not confined to any particular place. It is the lan- 
guage of the educated generally, and of scholars in particular ; 
of course the language of books and newspapers. And as 
Athens is now the centre of Modern Greek literature, it is 
natural that the number of those who speak it and write it 
well should be greater there than in any other city. 

Antiquity of the ^Romaic. 

As languages, during their natural development, pass from 
one stage to another by imperceptible degrees, it is impossible 
to fix the precise period when Greek began to assume its mod- 
ern form. 

The dialogue, preserved by Theophanes, in which the Greens, 
the Blues, and Justinian's spokesman appear as interlocutors, 
affords direct proof that, as late as the sixth century, the lan- 
guage of the common people was Ancient Greek. 2 The style 



2 Theophanes, p. 279 [A. M. 6024. A. D. 524]. y Ave\66vTa 
to. peprj ev rco iTnriKcct dveKpa^av ol tu>v Tlpacrivcov. " Kkto. [acta]. Aid 
KaXonoo'iov [v. 1. KaAa7roSioj/] tov KovfiiKovXdpiov [cubicularium] 
Kai uivaQapiov. Ol Updcnvoi • ""Ett; 7roAAa, 'lovoriviave avyovare • tov 
fiiKas [Justiniane auguste, tu vincas]. 'AdiKovpai, pove 
aya#e, ov j3acrra^a) • oidev 6 Beds- Qofiovpai ovopdaai, pr} ir\eov evTv^rjcrr} 
ko\ jue'XXa) Kiv8vvev€iv." Mai/Sarwp [mandator]. "Tiff io~Tiv ovk 
olba." u '0 7rkeov€KT(0V pe, TpicravyovcrTe , els to. T^ayydpia eupi'crKerai." 
'Mavo'aTcop. " Oudels vpds dStKel." Ol Updaivoi. u Ei$ Kal pdvos 
ddiKel pc 0eoro/ce, p,rj dvaKeCpaXicrr] /" MavSarwp. "Tis eWw e'/cei- 



VI INTRODUCTION. 

of a Procopius was of course superior to that of an ordinary 
person. But there is a wide difference between style and 
dialect. 

John Lydus, indeed, intimates that the words dnaKapia, plate, 
avyrj, morning, pavrlov, cloak, belonged to the language of the 
many, or the multitude, that is, the common people. 3 And we 
add here, that they are still heard in Greece. But from these 
three specimens no inference can be drawn that the uneducated 
Greeks of the sixth century spoke Romaic. For in all highly 
cultivated languages there are words and forms of words which - 
good speakers and writers avoid. Thus, d^dpiov (modern -^dpi), 
for lx&vs> fish, and the verbal forms cpdyecrai, iriecrai, ohvvacrai, 
Kavxao-ai, occur in the New Testament. 4 And in a barbarous 
Greek inscription, found in Nubia, vypov stands for vbcap, water ; 5 
which shows the antiquity of the mediaeval and modern vepov. 

In Malchus (A. D. 500 ?) we find a genitive singular in - rj, 
from -r]s, analogous to the Doric -a and -co, from as, -oj. 

Thus, p. 231, Aeovros rov MaKeXXr). 

Theophylactus Simocata informs us that the masses gave to 
apftav the meaning of vy\rrj\bv prjpa, high stage. The modern 
word for pidpit is 6 dpficovas. He observes also, that, in the 
modern language, the Teppauoi were called $pdyyoi ; which 
means simply in the Greek of the period in which he lived. 
Procopius in the same connection uses vvv, now. 6 

vos ovk o'lSapev" Ol Tlpdcnvoi. "2u kcu povos oidas, rpicravyovaTe, 
rls TrkeoveKTei pe arjpepov" Mavftdrcop. " Et tis iav earlu ovk 018a- 
pev" Ol Tlpdcnvoi. " KaXoTrodtos 6 cmaBdpios aSiKei pe, decrnora 
7rdvTa>v" k. r. A. 

The words "A/cra. Aia. Ko\o7t68lov top Kovj3iKov\dpiov kcu cnra- 
Bdpiov seem to form the title of the record or document copied by 
Theophanes ; and if so, they do not belong to the narrative. 

3 Joannes Lydus [born about A. D. 490], pp. 11. Papalois de 
to Kavovv eVl peu tg>i> Upcov aarovpav [saturamj, cnl be t&v evco)(icou 
enovXapiav [from epularis], r/u dnaXapiav ol 7roXKo\ e£ dyvoias 
7Tpoo~ayopevovcriv • enovXas [epulasl yap tcis cvcdxuis Pcopaiois eBus 
KciXelu. 82. 'Avio~xcov 6 tjXlos rov opBpiov diaaKopiri^ei Kcupbv, bu ol 
7to\Xo\ avyt]v ovupd^ovcriv. 178. 'O di pavdvrjs ^Aa/u^oy eldos eVrt, to 
Trapci ra> ir\r)Bei pavriov Xeyopevov. 

4 Nov Test. Joann. 21, 9. 13. 

5 B. n. 5072, 20. Ovk errcoKav vrjpov ecrcd els ttjv oiklciv avrcov. The 
classical vapos, flowiny, fluid, is derived from vda>, to flow, after the 
analogy of Xaprrpos, \j/vxp6s, from Xdpnco, ^uyw. Its Ionic form would 
be vrjpos, whence vrjpdv, and Nrjpevs, (he Water-God. 

c Theophylactus Simocata [A. 1). 610-629], pp. 333. 'Ai/els- 



INTRODUCTION. vii 

With Theophanes (A. D. 758 - 816) we enter the confines 
of Modern Greek. Besides a host of new words, and ancient 
words with new meanings, most of which are now actually in 
use, he has the following grammatical innovations : — 

I. The endings -dbes, -docov, -ddas, in nouns in -ds: pp. 699, 
1 ol dp,r]pd8es, emirs. 698, 21 tovs dprjpddas. 689, 13 tcov d/3/3acW, 

fathers, as a title. (§ 10, n. 2.) II. Genitive in -i from -is: p. 

572 tov Advanpi, tov Advao-Tpi. (§ 10, 1 , 2.) III. Metaplastic da- 
tive plural: p. 624, 9 reus p.vpid8ais, v. 1. p,vpido~i. (§ 10, 2, 2.) ■ 

IV. The endings -is-, -iv, for -io s, -iov: pp. 691, 19 6 Kvpis. 696, 
19 tov Kvpiv. 351, 11 to p.apyapiTapiv. 545, 19 tydpiv. 489, 4 awa- 
6Lv. 260, 2 o-Tixaptv. (§ 11, 1, 2.) These endings are, strictly speak- 
ing, ancient, for they occur in inscriptions referred to the first three 
centuries of our era. Thus, B. nn. 284, 40 Arj^Tpis- 704 to 'EXeu- 
Gepiv. 942 tov c E\Xa8iz>. 1781 tov 'Acppobetaiv. 4866 [A. D. 115] 

'Avtcovis, to iv6pp.iv. 5013 'lovkis. 5031 Kvpis. V. The ending 

-e'a, denoting the effect produced by an instrument: p. 490, 6 kovtci- 

pea, anadea. (§ 16, 1.) VI. The ending -or for -<ov : p. 430, 13 

daxWVi f° r dax^H-ovL. (§ 12, n.) VII. "Huicrv, half, indeclin- 
able: p. 624, 9. 'Ev dXXais oktco rjpiav p.vpid8ais. (§ 60, 11.) 

VIII. Perfect participle passive without the augment: pp. 241, 13 
aibr]pcop.evos. 459, 20 KaaTeXXcc>p.evos. 495, 13 irvpiroXrip.e'vos. 553, 9 

pivoKoirr]p.evos. 682, 12 aayp.aTCdp.evos. (§ 44, 3.) IX. The verbal 

ending -ao~i for -av : p. 725, 8 eTreipacn v. 1. dvrrjpacn, write enrfpaai ; 
from enaipvco, to take, of which the imperfect eirepvev (write eiraipvev) 
occurs in p. 348, 6. (§ 33, n. 4 : 45.) Compare Villoison's Anecdot. 

Vol. II. p. 122 eTiQeaui, for eTideov. X. Periphrastic future: pp. 

197, 15. J/ E^et elvai. 416, 13. "E^ei 6 ^ayai/o? v-noaTpe^rai. (Compare 

§33,6.) XL The auxiliary defies, contracted a s : pp. 281,8. 

"A<fies KoXa£6p,eda, write KoXa(6ip.eda. 593, 7. T As XaXr)o-a>p.ev. 606, 8. 
*As elo-iXdcoo-L. (§§ 84, 4 : 35.) 

XII. Apposition for adnomination: pp. 699. Avo ^iXtaSes^Apa^f?. 

691, 19. AcoSem X iXia'Sas: AaoV. (§§ 31, 1: 49, 3.) XHI. The 

accusative for the dative: p. 604, 19. ArjXol avTov otl, v. 1. a&Tcp. 

(§ 63.) XIV. The accusative with ye/zco : p. 231, 7. Qrjo-avpov 

evpov yep.ovTa TavTa. XV. The present for the future : pp. 280, 

11. "Ovtcos, elp.rj j^cru^acrere, aTTOKecpaXl^co vp.ds. 346. Et viKrjcrco tov 

'Op.T]piTr)v, XpiaTiavos yivop.ai. (§ 71, 2.) XVI. "iva after 6eX<o : 

p. 728, 18. Ov OeXco Iva Komdo-rjs ecus tcov u>8e. (§ 78, 1.) XVII. 

"Iva in apposition with ovtcos : p. 555, 9. 'Ecttoi^^a; rj elprjvr) ovtoos • 
Iva 6 fiaaiXevs Travar), k. t. X. (Compare § 78, 8.) XVIII. "Oraz/, 

em tcov (Br}p.aTcov tcov v\jsr]Xcov (ap,ficova TavTa tci nX-qdr] aTTOKaXeT) to tov 
Tvpdvvov 7rp6o~Taypa tco Xaco peraSt'Scocn. 245. <E>payyoi oe dpa ovtoi 
tji vecorepa yXcoTTj] KaTovop.d&vTai. (Compare p. 47. Ovs kou Tovpxovs 
OTro/caXeti/ rot? 7roXXo7s yvcopip-coTepov.) PltOCOPIUS, Vol. I. p. 319. Tep- 
pavovs re, oi vvv Qpdyyoi mXovvrai. 



Vlll INTRODUCTION. 

for ore: pp.499. 18. "Orav ecpvyev 6 Xoo-porjs. 503,3. "Otclv tt)v 
lepovo-aXrjp rrapeXaftev. 759, 10. "Orav .... e^avearrj. (§ 81, 1.) 

XIX. The aorist subjunctive in wishing : Geord/ce, prj avaKecba- 

^ia-rj. See above, n. 2. (§85,2.) XX. "Qcrre, for Iva: p. 417, 

5. "Eirep\j/ev coare .... KaAvo-y. XXI. "E<os, until, with the 

accusative: p. 362, 1. "Epeivav .... eeos to dyiov Ilao-^a. (§65, 

9.) XXII. "Afxa, with the genitive: p. 548, 14. r/ Apa nevre 

dpofiovcov. XXIII. * An 6, from, with the accusative : pp. 460, 3 

'A7TO ^ AXe^avbpeiav. 659, 17. 'A7ro beKaTnv tov (peftpovapiov pr/vos. 

(§ 64, 1. 2.) XXIV. 'Atto, apiece: p. 700, 19. 'Atto yap ^lAta- 

8os fiovvevpav Xaftovaai, one thousand lashes apiece. (Compare § 60, 

4.) XXV. Eiy, for ev, in: pp. 105, 13. 'ES/Sacr/cej/ ev Koav- 

(TTavTivovnokei, els to evKTrjpiov tt)s ayias Avao~Tao~ias- 122, 17. Fas 
7rp0a.0~Tet.0v Se KaTa. tov ' AvdrrXovv dieTpiftev. 536, 9. 'Hv de 2a/3a>- 

pios els 'AdpLavovTToXiv. (§ 65, 1.) XXVI. IIp6 tov, before, 

with the subjunctive: p. 489, 11. Upo tov ivcoOao-iv avTo7s oi rptcr- 

x'lXlol. (§ 87, 4.) XXVII. 2u v, with the genitive: pp. 454, 9. 

2vVT<x>v(3ao-ikii<a>v\avpeaT(ov. 657,12. 2uy tcoj/ ret^eW. 

The age of Malalas cannot be determined with certainty. 
As, however, most of the grammatical innovations contained in 
the work that bears his name belong to the language of the 
eighth and ninth centuries, it may be assumed that he was 
contemporary with Theophanes. It would seem, further, that 
Greek was not his mother tongue. 

I. The ending -es for -a^: pp. 170 ol AlveidSes. 331, 7 ol Tlepaes 

v. 1. Uepcrai. (§ 10, n. 1.)" II. Genitive plural proparoxytone : 

pp. 26 7, 6 : 285, 4 Kavbrjkvv from r) KavBrfKa. (§ 10, n. 3.) III. 

Metaplastic dative plural : p. 223, 19 rals nXd/cais, from r) rrXaKa, clas- 
sical 7rAa£ nXaicos. (§ 10, 2,2.) IV. The endings -is, -iv, for 

-los, -tov. pp. 293, 13 Kvpis, tov Kvpov. 395, 12 to rrapcovvprjv in- 
correctly for Trapeovvpiv, and that for jrapavvpiov. (§ 11, 1, 2.) 

V. "H/xio-v, half, indeclinable: p. 158, 1. 2/f^7rrpa he dvo rjpiav. 

158,4. Ta be evvearjpio-v. (§ 60, 11.) VI. Elpl, p. 401, 6 

rjpeOa, for ecrpev. (§ 32, 2.) VII. Participle active in -ovra, 

fov-ov, and -evTa, for -ev: pp. 211, 18 neaovTa. 60, 22 dlnovvra. 
212,2 ovTa. 217, 3 peXXovra. 235, 12 rrapexovTa. 38,11 Kareve- 
X&evTa. (Compare Kovy Kecrra, XVIII.) 

VIII. The accusative for the dative : p. 273, 6. Ta nep\ tov rro\e- 
fiov eprjvvaev avTov Tifiepiavos- (§ 63.) IX. The present indica- 
tive for the imperative: p. 271, 16. 'Avatpel ovv eKacnos ovs e\ei 

Uepo-as els'lbLov avTov oiKov. (§71,5.) X. The article before 

interrogative words: pp. 206, 17. Kcu yvovs nepl tu>v 'lovbaloov Ttjs 
'lepovaaXrjp. to tl Treirpaxav. 231, 17. Kal eVqpom/o-e ttjv Uv&iav to 

biarl ovk eh68n avTols dnoKpicns- (§80, 8.) XL Kav (teal civ) 

after a conditional relative word : p. 33, 2. Tory tg>v ttoo^citcov epeas 

olai Kav r/aav, TavTas enoLOW ipaTia. (§ 81, 3.) XII. A/xa, with 

the genitive : pp. 219, 22. "Apa tco avTcp 'AyptWa orpaTrjya kq\ orpa- 



INTRODUCTION. IX 

tmotikcov dvvdpeav ovtov. 51, 15. Qovevcras dpa roils [write rrjs] av- 

rrjs noXXovs- 95, 10. "Apa rrjs A'iOpas. XIII. "Ewy, as far as, 

up to, with the accusative : p. 309, 7. "Ea>s to ydw tov tWou. (§ 65, 

5.) XIV. 'A7ro , by, for viro, after passive forms : pp. 26, 6. 'Ek- 

Xrjdrjo'av curb rav Tlepaav Ildpdoi. 26, 13. 'EkXtjOt] curb to>v AlyvnTi- 
tov Hpicrpey lottos 'Epprjs. 69, 6. AiOLicovpevr) de dnb tSv vlatv ILikov. 

(§ 64, 6.) XV. Els for iv, in: pp. 94, 3. 'Averpdcpr} els to. /3a- 

cr/Xeta tov 'Arpecos. 29, 21. "Epeivav avToX i/cel els ttjv ~2,vpiav. (§ 65, 

1.) XVI. Merd, with, followed by the accusative: p. 90, 11. 

Tcov de Kopiv6l<ov perd tovs Aaicedaipoviovs e/3acrtXei;cre tot€ 'AXrjTrjS' 
(§ 67, 1.) 

Leo Grammaticus has the ending - e s for -at. Thus, p. 78, 
14 2Kv0es v. 1. l,Kv6ai, from 2kv0t]s. (§ 10, n. 1.) 

The anonymous biographer of Leo Armenius (Scriptor In- 
certus de Leone Bardae Filio) uses the following grammatical 
innovations : — 

I. The ending -ovv for -overt: p. 359, 13. Kvpievovv for Kvptev- 

ovcri. * (§ 33, n. 1.) II. The accusative for the dative: p. 352, 

11. ArjXol tov naTpidpxrjv otl 6 Xabs o-KavdaXi£eTai did Tas el<6vas> 

(§ 63.) III. The auxiliary as for defies: p. 354, 21. 'As kutu- 

fido-copev i<eWev ttjv elicova. (§ 84, 4.) IV. 'E k with the ac- 
cusative : p. 359. 'E/c tovs evyevovs, write evyevovs, for evyevels* 
(§ 18, 3.) 

Leo the Philosopher (A. D. 886-911), in his "Tactica," 
employs a considerable number of new words in addition to the 
following grammatical innovations : — 

I. The ending -os for -rjs : 19, 13 x e ^P ^^ 0VS ^ ^ rom X"P ' 73 '^ ? ?^ 0? > 

for x ei P ^V^ 7 'l s - (§18, 3.) II. '18 ik 6s, own, as in Romaic. 11, 

22. Kat Tivas Idixovs o~ov dvBpcoirovs ttio'tovs. 14, 93. Ata ra>i> Idi- 

kodv avToov dpypvT&v. (§26.) HI. The ending -eo~ai: 9. 40 

iniyeo-e (write eVetyecrat), from ineiyopai. (§ 38, n. 1.) 

IV. r 'lv a with the indicative : 12,51. "iva prj KaTonvaTovvrai. 12, 

55. "iva avo-reXXovaiv. V. "iva forming the subject of earl : 9, 

1. Aeov crot ro'ivvv .... Iva napayyeXXns, sc. iartv. 12, 53. Upenov 
eo-TLv Iva .... e'xn. (§ 78, 6.) VI. "iva in commands or de- 
crees : 9, 28. 'Eai/ de 81a paKpas odov peXXr/s nopeveadai, .... 'iva 
edi(r]S Ta o~TpaTevpaTa ixepmare'Lv iv Ta£ei. 12, 55. 'A7r6 Tore de Iva 
avo-reXXovacv avrd <a\ iv toIs drjicapiois avTuiv dnoTiOaicriv. 17, 24. 

Els de ras Toiavras odonropias Iva exjjS odrjyovs. (§ 84, 3.) VII. 

The subjunctive in commands or decrees: 8,3. Et pev tis ddncrjdf} 
Tvapd twos, tg> dpyovTi tov TaypaTOs TrpoaeXBrj. 8, 7. Et tis eXeyx@fi 
. . . . TJj ea\aTn Tipa>p'ia v7roj3Xr]d^. 9, 38. 'A7roo~TeXXr)S de icai Tivas 

Ka[3aXXapiovs. VIII. Ov for prj, in the protasis: 9, 40. 'EcW 

ov peXXrjs- 9, 75. 'Eay de ov x (0 P 0VVTai ' 12> 41. Et pev . . . . ov dv~ 
vavTai (pQd^eiv. (§ 88, 9.) 



X INTRODUCTION. 

Constantine Porphyrogenitus distinctly tells us that lie wrote 
in the common and spoken language; 1 which implies that, in 
his time, the language of scholars was neither spoken nor com- 
mon. In fact, in his "Life of Basil," probably his earliest 
work, he himself employs the artificial style of that period. 
His other productions abound in Romaic words. In most of 
his grammatical innovations he has been anticipated by his pre- 
decessors. We notice the following : — 

I. The ending -a Is for -at. De Basil, p. 318 o-evBals. See 

note 7. (§ 10, n. 1.) II. The ending --qs, for -is, -los. De 

Adm. p. 236, 22 'Appevrjs. (§ 11, 1, 2.) III. Neuters in -ipov 

G. -ifiov or-i'jtiaroj. De Cer. pp. 779, 2. 12 dXXa&paTos, dXXatji- 

ixdrcov. 157, 14 dXXa^tpaTa. (§ 11, 1, 3.) IV. The ending -ea 

tor -La. De Cer. p. 752, 12 rrodea. (Compare § 16, 1.) V. The 

ending -rj for -es. De Cer. p. 325, 11. Movoyevrj Xoye tov Ilarpos. 

(§ 12, 2.) VI. The ending -lkos proparoxytone. De Adm. p. 

72, 2 7rdpdiKos. (§ 20.) VII. The ending -e'ivos for -ivos. De 

Cer. p. 670, 15 treT&'lvos. (§ 20, -evios.) VIII. 2 as, for vfxcov. 

De Cer. pp. 36, 11 : 38, 22. TLoXvxpoviov iro^a-ei [write 71-0117077] 6 

6ebs rr\v dy'iav (3ao-iXeiav acts els 7roXXa errj. (§ 23, 1.) IX. Tcoi/, 

for avTu>v. De Cer. p. 295, 10. HoXXa tcov ra err]. 295, 15. TloXXd 

koI iccika tcov to. err). (§ 23, 4.) X. "'Eva for ev, one. De Cer. p. 

121,1. Ka#' eva eKaaTov (3r)pa. (§ 31, 1, 1.) XL Eitre (write 

elaai), from elfii. De Cer. p. 250, 10. Eure Trarpiiaos. De Adm. 

139, liJfTov, for fjv. (§§ 32, 2: 38, n. 1.) XII. Periphrastic 

future. De Cer. p. 489, 9. Ovs e'xei bpicreiv, for Spiaai. (§ 36.) 

XIII. Subjunctive with the ending of the indicative. De Cer. p. 



7 Porphyrogenitus [A. D. 905-9591, De Cer. pp. 5,2. 'Qs 

av de aacprj Kal evdidyvcoara elev ra yeypappeva, Ka\ KaOcopiXnpevrj Ka\ 
inrXovarepa (ppdcrei Kexprjpeda, Kal Xe^eai raxs avrals Kal ovopaai rois 
e(j> eKacrrco irpdypari ndXat TrpocrappoadelcrL Kal Xeyopevois. 619, 3. 
lariov otl dub rf) irpcoTrj ypepa [sicj rijs yevvrjaeccs tov 7rop(pvpoyevvr)Tov 
naibbs u(peiX6pevov earl ylveo~8ai, b f) kolvy] o~vvr\6eia Xoxb^epa KaXel. 
De. Adm. pj). 68, 8 Aid kolvtjs ko.1 KadcopiX-qpev^s dnayyeXias dibd^ai 
ere eo-Trevaa. 152, 21 2e'p/3Aoi [servuli] de rfj tcov Pcopaicov diaXeKTco 
dovXot, TrpnaayopevovraL • odev Kal aepftovXa tj kolvt) <xvvr)6eia ra bovXi- 
kws [sic] (p-qatv VTTodrjpaTa, ko.1 r(ep{3ovXiavovs rovs ra evTeXrj Kal 7ievi- 
Xpa vTTodrjpaTa (popovvras. De Basil, pp. 232, 1. 'Errecpepero be Kal 
to ponaXov to /3ao"iAiKoz/ eVi tt)s C^ vr l s civtov, o (SapdovKiov oide <aXe7u rj 
avvrjdeia. 299, 17. Upocri]V §' avTols dvaXoycos Kal 7rXrj8os pvorrapco- 
vcov Kal TrevTrjKOVTopoiV, as craKTovpas ko.1 yaXeas 6vopd(etv elcoOaari ndp- 
noXXoi. 318, 12. ^tvbovia epya TrapTroiKiXa, a drj vvv napa(pdapevTos 
tv^ov tov ovoparos tjj tcov 7roXXcov apadia XeyeTai crevhals, eKarbv, Xivo- 
paXoTapia, eKaTov (^KaXbv yap enl tovtols KoivoXeKTelv). 



INTRODUCTION. XI 

211, 14. "Ore nX-npooaovaiv ra peprj to. ukto. rrjs dvayopevaeeos Kai zhrovai 
v. 1. €t7TQ)o-t- (§ 34, n. 1.) 

XIV. Apposition for adnomination. De Adm. p. 232, 19. S^oAa- 
pima £vyr]v piav. 233, 1. Tqi/ £vyr]v to. axoXapUia. 243, 8. Aoya- 

piov KevTTjvdpiov ev. (§49, 3.) XV. 2oO for aoi. De Cer. p. 

376, 3. KaXrj aov rjpepa, Good morning to you. Compare p. 599, 10. 

KaXrj rjpepa vplv, cipxovres. (§ 63, 4.) XVI. The accusative for 

the dative. De Cer. pp. 12, 12. 'Enididooatv . ... to Xij3eXXdpiou 
tov deanornv. 520, 5. Aeyec tov dbpivaovvdXiov drreXOovTa eiadtjai tov 

Xoyoderrjv. (§63.) XVII. The accusative after iKTipdaOai. De 

Adm. p. 232,21. 'EKTip.ndev Kai clvto XiTpas oVica. (§68, 1.) 

XVIII. "\va after ocpeiAco. De Adm. p. 269, 22. 'OcpeiXovai .... lua 

8eo~pev(0VTai. (§78, 1.) XIX. Nd for lv a. De Cer. p. 693, 4. 

'OcbeiXei didovai XiTpas Z', StjXovoti va e^et [write exTI~\ poyav vopiapara 

IB . (§ 78, 1.) XX. To before interrogative sentences. De Adm. 

p. 220. 13. A€7TTopepws nepuxov to t'l 6(peiXovai Tvapixeiv. (§ 80, 8.) 

XXI. 'E a v omitted before 6eXvs. De Adm. p. 1 1 7, 18. "AneX- 

6e pera tov ttXovtov aov, 6eXys els rrjv xa>pav aov, fleXy? dXXaxov. 

(§ 82, 6.) XXII. "Apa with the subjunctive. De 'Cer. p. 391, 

19. "Ap.a elaeXBfl, As soon as he enters. (§ 81, 3.) XXIII. r/ Et»r, 

as far as, with the accusative. De Adm. p. 99, 1. 'AvrjXQev etos ttjv 

Ka>vaTavTivov7ro\i,v. (§ 65, 5.) XXIV. 'An tKelae, thence. 

De Adm. p. 148, 9. (§ 88, 2.) XXV. Mera, icith, followed by 

the accusative. De Adm. 144, 11. ^.vpireOepias pera tovs Tovpicovs 
Kai dydiras e'xovTes. (§67, 2.) 

One of the successors of Theophanes (tenth century) makes 
use of the expression, the common and impure language* which 
evidently means the language of the illiterate. In the collec- 
tion entitled " Theophanes Continuatus " we find the following 
grammatical innovations : — 

I. Genitive in -v , from -vs, analogous to -77 from -ns: p. 427, 4 
"AXv TfOTapov. Compare B. A. p. 1195 Kapvs, Aapdvs, KXavavs, Kap- 
SOs-, Aiovvs, G. Kapv, D. Kapv, and so on. (§ 12, 2.) II. Voca- 
tive in -i, for -ie : pp. 72, 19 Kvpi ol<ov6pe. 356, 1 nvpi Geo'Soope. (^ 11, 

1, 2.) III. The ending -ay: pp. 198, 17 Kpaaas, vintner, as a 

proper name. 656, 22 (Symeon Magister) KecpaXds, big-headed, given 

to the Emperor Basil. (§ 16, 1.) IV. The adjective ending -os 

for -ovs : p. 724, 3 (Symeon Magister) 'Apyvpos, as a proper name. 

(§ 18, 4.) V. Periphrastic future subjunctive : p. 639, 18. Ei rjv 

6p66s XpiaTiavos, ovk eitfe p,ayapiaai, would not have renounced his re- 
ligion. (Compare § 33, 8.) 



8 Theopiianes Continuatus, pp. 96, 14. *A rj Koivrj yX&TTa /cat prj 
Ka6apa KaXtl xepi>i/3o£eo-ra. 181, 8. Kai Xifiddiov TrapdiceiTai Tvpiv 
dypuiKiKrj (pcoufj naXovpevov. 



Xll INTRODUCTION. 

Cedrenus (A. D. 1057) attempted to write in Ancient Greek, 
but with indifferent success. His work contains but few gram- 
matical innovations. 

I. Genitive in -?), from -rjs. Vol. II. p. 171, 5 rod ^lavvrj. (§ 10, 

1, 2.) II. Augmentative ending -as. Vol. I. p. 472, 24 Tpaxq- 

Xas, Bullneck, Constantine's nickname. Vol. II. p. 607, 3 MixarjXas, 

big Michael. (§ 16, 3, 3.) III. The numeral adverb enrm, seven 

times. Vol. I. p. 305, 20. 'Enrol O' <S>3', Seven times eighty are Jive 

hundred and sixty. (§ 31, 3.) IV. -Apposition for adnomination. 

Vol. II. p. 19, 13. 2vpovs 'laKcofiiTos 7r\r)do$ ttoXv. (§ 49, 3.) 

Scylitzes recognizes the existence of the common dialect, from 
which he cites the following proverb : s Ea> oe cktioo, (povpve • i<o 
tva ae xaXdoa> ; 9 in the Romaic of the present day, 'Eyo> o-e cktioo, 
(povpve, eya> va. (or da) o-e ^aXao-co, I built thee, O oven, I will de- 
molish thee. 

Anna Comnena also alludes to the common dialect.™ She 
has preserved the following popular tetrastitch (§ 91, 3) : 

To cra/3/3arov ttjs Tvpivrjs 
Xapfjs, ' AXe'^ie • evorjoes to • 
Kai ttjv bevrepav to rrpco't 
Etiva, " KaXcos, yepdniv pov." 

In two of his poems, Ptochoprodromus uses a language which 
is fundamentally the same as the Romaic of the present day. 
So that he may with propriety be regarded as the earliest Mod- 
ern Greek author of whom we have any knowledge. The pro- 
logues and epilogues of these effusions are in what may be 
called barbarous Ancient Greek. 11 We give here some of his 
grammatical peculiarities. 

I. N annexed to words ending in a vowel : (fiopetv, aiTevio-drjv, yei- 
Tovav, Tivdv, vnodrjpav, fipao'vv, eKade£ovv, ioev. II. The ending 



9 Scylitzes [eleventh century], pp. 643, 12. T6 Brjpatbes tovto 
ko\ KaBrjpat-evpevov e7rtXeya>u • " 'Ec5 ere eKTioa, (povpve • ea> iva oe %a- 
Adcrco." 644, 1. 'Srl.cpos o~TpaTia>TtKov dirooTeiXas (Bapayyovs ovtovs i) 
Koivr) ovopd^ei 8tdXe<TOs). 

10 Anna Comnena, pp. 395. BXa^ou? tovtovs tj kolvt) KaXelv olbe 
8id\eKTOS. 98, 8. 'AiopciTiov avrco dvenXe^avro., e£ iSiarrtSos pev crvy- 

Kelpevov y\a>TTrj9 "To o~d(3(3aTOv ttjs Tvpivrjs x a P e ^ s [write %a- 

pjjs~\, 'AXe£ie , evorjoes to, ko\ ttjv bevTepav to TvpaX etna KaXcos yepaKiv 
pov." 

11 Tiieodorus PTOcnornoDROMiis (A D. 1143-1180). His 
o-Tixot TtoXiTiKoL are contained in the first volume of Coray's Atakta. 
Paris, 1828. 



INTRODUCTION. xiil 

-ey or -a is for -a i : res Tecrcrapes yoovicus- (§ 10, n. 1.) m. The 

accent of proparoxytone nouns and adjectives retains its place : 6 <a- 
iroias yeiTovicrcras, devTeprjv, crKovpirpoiTaKapvhoTracrTov. (§§ 10 : 18, 

1.) IV. Augmentative endings -a, -ovpa: KoppaTa, Kopp.aTovpa. 

(§ 16, 3, 2.) V. The adjective ending -ea for -eta: tcls paicpeas 

p.vTas- VI. The article ol for al : ol dpxdvTicrcres, ol crdp<es. (Com- 
pare § 22, n. 2.) VII. 'Aroj, self: thus, 'Ardy rev yiverai larpos- 

(§ 23, 3.) VIII. 'Eavrov, self: thus, rpecpe tov kavrov crov. 

(§24.) IX. Uov or 'Otto v, for os,wko. (§30,5.) X. The 

verbal ending -6va> or -&vg>, from the classical -6<o : 7reTcr6va), ot/ko)- 

vco. (§ 43, 2.) XI. "Ev, eve, evi, elve, for e'crri, or elcri. 

(§ 32, n. 2.) XII. Periphrastic future by means of 0eXc» and the 

infinitive : thus, 2, 514 6e\ets crvpeiv, the first example of the kind. 
(§ 33, 4.) XIII. Future subjunctive by means of vd and the im- 
perfect or aorist indicative : vd 'Cow, vd p.e 'didav, vd 'paOa. (§ 34, 3.) 

XIV. Imperfect passive proparoxytone : fjpxop.r)v and rjpxovpovv, 

vd 'pyd^ovpovv, yevovpovv. XV. The ending -vr a cri for -yro: 

thus, 2, 272 enovkovvTacn for eircoXovvro. XVI. The accusative 

for the dative : passim. 

XVII. The accusative for the genitive after numeral adverbs : anag 

rbv xpovov, once a year. XVIII. Na, and Ata v a, as in the Greek 

of the present day. XIX. Evdvs to, followed by the aorist in- 
finitive, is equivalent to the Modern Evdvs ttov, as soon as: thus, 1, 

119. Et^? to fipdcreiv to deppbv, Xe'yet rrpbs to TvaiDlv rou. XX. 

All the prepositions take the accusative : 2, 634 crvv tt)v {rjTrjcriv. As 
to the Hebraistic use of crvv, in examples like the following, it origi- 
nated in the ignorance of the translator, who mistook eili, the sign of 
the accusative, for a preposition. Septuagint. Eccl. 3, 17. "2vv tov 
biKaiov K.a\ crvv tov acre/3?} Kpivel 6 deos. 7, 30. 'Eirotwcrev 6 6ebs crvv 
tov dvOpcmov ev6rj. Aquila's translation (in Origen's Hexapla), 
Gen. 1, 1. 'Ei> KecpaXaicp eiroincrev 6 6ebs crvv tov ovpavbv Ka\ crvv ttjv 

yrjv. XXI. Ovdev for o v, not. The form Aev occurs only as a 

various reading: thus, 1, 71 iroTe 8ev eKTevicrdrjv, v. 1. iroTe tov ovk 
eKTevladrjv, probably the true reading. 

The " Book of the Conquest of Romania and of the Morea " 
by the Franks (French, Italians), now ascertained to be a 
translation from the French, belongs to the fourteenth century, 
and represents the Romaic of that period. 12 From the abuse it 
heaps upon the Greeks, because they on more than one occa- 
sion deceived the truth-loving Franks, but chiefly because the 
Latins were unable to induce that stiff-necked, perfidious, lying 
people to recognize the apostolic claims of the Holy Father, it is 



12 Bi/3Aioi> Trjs Kovy<ecrTa.s ttjs Ycopavias kcutov Mcopaicos (sic). Pub- 
lished by Buchon in the second volume of his " Recherches Histo- 
riques." Paris, 1845. 

b 



XIV INTRODUCTION. 

not difficult to perceive that the translator, as well as the origi- 
nal author, was a member of the Western Church. 

The following are some of its grammatical innovations. (K. 
Stands for KovyKeara : II. for UpoXoyos.) 

I. Paroxytone genitives plural of the first declension. K. 160 ^co- 

pcov. 1324 eKKkr)cri(DV. II. The ending -r a des from -r 17 s. II. 

1049 rovs KaraTrarrjrddes III. Accusative plural the same as nom- 
inative plural. II. 63 rovs apxovrais, write apxovres. IV. Femi- 

nines in -t for -is. IX 40 rrjs Avais. 769 res alpecres. K. 687 rcov 

Kpiaav for Kp'icrecov. V. Feininines in -o for -oj. K. 127 rr)s 

Kopivdos. 247 t?js HeXonovvrjaos. 7254 pe e£obes peydXes. VI. 

Genitive in-arou, from -a. K. 3385 dvareXpdrov. VII. Mas- 
culines in -«'s; 6 Nr£e(/>pes, rod Nr£e<£pe, rov Nr£e(ppeV, Geoffroi, pas- 
sim. VIII. The article 77 for at. K. 1059 r) avpcpcovials. 4631 

{] iKKk-qaUs. IX. 'Atos or 'An ar 6s, self, in several places 

X. The relative 6 ir o I o s with or without the article. II. 1332 tovs 

07TQLOVS, V. 1. TOt)J OTTOLDVS. K. 4831 TO OTTOLOV. 1440 TO. OTTOta KCHTTprj. 

5223 pe ouolov e^ei (povo-crdrov. XI. E I a 6 a i or E I err a i, infini- 
tive of elpai. XII. Periphrastic future. II. 168 BeXei clo-6at. K. 

4831 6eXev etcrrai. II. 367 OeXovv apparooaoven. 825 6a rovs in- 
ctt€vo-t]. 248 BeXovv opiaei. 260 bid va pas BeXrjs i'Set. 600 BeXovv 
Koariaet. K. 1846 deXco iravcrei. XIII. Continued future indica- 
tive. K. 645 6eXow dovXevet. XIV. Pluperfect active, n. 81 

eixe dpoaei. K. 3608 eiy/s /3aXet. 3611 et'^e's rovs viKrjpevovs. 360 
ei^acri ^aXatracrt. By means of eipai : II. 390 rjcrav eirdpovra, for 
eixav errdpei. 1274 rjrov drrodavoiv. K. 1093 rjrov 7roir)o~ovra, for ei- 
Xav 7rou']aei. 2500 rjrov dnoareiXovTa. XV. Future subjunc- 
tive. II. 170 rjBeXev elcrdai. 368 rj6eXev evepeivei. K. 1205 bei^ei ro 

ijdeXe. XVI. Periphrastic future subjunctive, equivalent to the 

aorist subjunctive. II. 8 ocrris aTrrjXBe 's rr)v "2,vpidv va exu npoaKwr)- 
crei. 64 va e'xovv pe'ivei. 73 va. ret e'xco acorapx^jcrei {cnrapxr/crei). 531 

va o~e e'xco etVei. XVII. Infinitives in -ei. K. 660 tovXevei. 6 78 

iKirX-qpel. 2169 apxivev XaXet. XVIII. Participle active inde- 
clinable. II. 18 Idovras. 28 Bprjvcovras. 89 Kovpaevovras, Kep§i£ov- 
ras. 390 eirdpovra. 1048 dia(36vra. K. 847 iXni^ovra. 1093 noir)- 
aovra. According to Msizaris, the aorist participle in -ovra first 
made its appearance in Laconia. He gives the following specimens 
(Boissonade's Anecd. Vol. III. p. 164): irinaovra, acpl^ovra, doaovra. 

XIX. Imperfect indicative passive. K. 4220 eBvpdaovv. 4221 

€Kavxr]o-eaovv. 3432 eKaBerov for eKaBero. 3486 eaKOirifyvTOV for 
eo-Konifcro. 1441 epxovrav for epxovro. II. 1259 eylvovrav ibr ey'ivov- 
ro. Third person plural in -rjaav. II. 538 epxdvrrjaav. K. 2148 
i]ya7rovvrrjo-av. 2860 evptcrKovrrjcrav. 4693 eKa6e£dvrr)0~av. Mazaris 
refers this ending to the dialect of Laconia, and gives rjpxdvrrjaav, kci- 

6€(ovvrr](rav, as "examples. (Boisson. Anecd. Vol. III. p. 164.) 

XX. Periphrastic future indicative passive. K. 4526 BeXovaiv fiaXdr). 

XXI. Periphrastic pluperfect passive. K. 7747 ijaav aTroara- 

Bevra. XXII. Aorist imperative passive in -cro v. K. 7596 ttXtj- 



INTRODUCTION. XV 

po<popeaov. XXIII. The accusative or genitive for the dative : 

passim. 

XXIV. TLapov (nap ov), for Trctpd, than. K. 4282. c 07ro£i ei^e 
Bdppos els civtovs irXeou irapov 's 1 ineivovs- (§ 64, 13.) Compare Ari- 
STOTEL. de Plant. 1, 4, 16. Km stelae KpeiTTovoiS av^dvovai Trapb d\- 
Xa^ou. 2, 2, 20. K.vptu>Tepov crvp.j3s(BnKe r<5 vBcltl to eivai otoiy/io) 

7rapo rfj yjj. XXV. *Av ev otl. II. 566. *Ai/ ev ore dpeaovv tov, 

If so be they will (or may) please him; If so be they please him. 

XXVI. The article r d followed by the infinitive is equivalent to the 
modern Evdvs -kov, as soon as. II. 333. Xapdv p.eyd\r]v e'Xa,3e to 
dicovcrei to pavTcWov. 859. To tSel Tes cricaXes ebpap.av. K. 4455. To 
i'Set tov 6 pur) Macppes iirpoo-^KOiOnKe tov. Sometimes to is followed 
by the aorist subjunctive, n. 554. To Ihovv to TrXrjdos tcdv QpayKwv 

.... ehpap-aaiv. -XXVII. "Ea>s ov vd, or'fls ov vd, with the 

subjunctive, n. 1065. "Ecus ov va tovs npocpepcoenv. K. 906. c i2? ov 

va p.d8rj TLUOTe. ■ XXVIII. "Ecos els, until. K. 6661. "Eons els t-)v 

Ccorjv tov. XXIX. Me^pt els, as far as. II. 647. Me^pi V 'Av~ 

8piavov7ToXiv. Ov&iv for ov, not, passim. 

Emmanuel Georgilas ( y Ep.p.avovrj\ TeapyiWas), a native of 
Rhodes, belongs to the latter part of the fifteenth century. He 
wrote several insipid poems in Romaic verse. About the same 
time, the story of Apollonius of Tyre ('AttoWcovlov tov ev Tvpcp) 
was translated into Romaic from the Latin romance Apollo- 
nius Tyrius, the supposed prototype of Shakespeare's Pericles 
Prince of Tyre. 

The Romaic portion of the Turcograecia n represents the 
language of the sixteenth century. The participle eo-ovras, from 
elpai, occurs in it perhaps for the first time (pp. 79. 111). In 
the same century Demetrios Zenos (Ar]p,^Tpios 6 Zrjvos) translated 
the Batrachomyomachia into the common language (koivt) ykwo-- 
a-a), as he calls the Romaic. This translation Martin Crusius 
(A. D. 1526-1607) translated into Latin. 

It appears, then, that, as soon as ignorance rendered the 
spoken language unfit for elaborate composition, those who 
made any pretensions to scholarship began to conform their 
style to the earlier models ; and the result was a dialect resem- 
bling the ancient Attic chiefly in its external form. Such is 
the language of Cedrenus, Scylitzes, Anna Comnena, Bryen- 
nius, Ptochoprodromus (except his Romaic verses), Tzetzes, 
Eustathius, Nicetas, Xicephorus Gregoras, Acropolites, Pachy- 
meres, Cantacuzenus, Ducas, Codinus, Phrantzes, Chalcocondy- 

13 In the Hisioria Politica et Patriarchica Constantinopoleos. Bonn, 
1849. 



XVI INTRODUCTION. 

les, find other later Byzantine writers. This artificial and often 
barbarous Greek continued to be used by the educated from the 
tenth century until quite recently. And because, after the fall 
of Constantinople, learning among the Greeks had been almost 
exclusively confined to the clergy, it received the appellation of 
the ecclesiastical style (to eKKkrjo-iao-TiKov v<fios). 

In the last half of the last century the lettered Greeks, espe- 
cially such as had studied in Western Europe, began to propose 
the cultivation of the spoken language. But the question soon 
arose : " If the popular dialect is to be the basis of the written, 
which of its many case-endings and personal endings shall be 
generally adopted ? " On the one hand, those who knew little 
or nothing of Ancient Greek were for retaining the vulgarisms 
and irregularities peculiar to the Romaic, asserting at the same 
time, with all the confidence of ignorance, that the language of 
the common people was neither more nor less than a slight 
modification of the ancient iEolic and Doric, and should be 
called iEolo-Doric. And it was called ^Eolo-Doric. The Xo- 
ytcorarot, 14 on the other hand, with their usual want of judgment, 
demanded the instant, or at least the speedy, restoration of the 
language of Thucydides and Demosthenes, as they understood 
these authors. But men of real learning adopted a middle 
course, which has finally prevailed. The principles now virtu- 
ally recognized by sound scholars may be thus stated : — 

I. The ancient inflections are, as far as practicable, to be pre- 
ferred to the corresponding modern and mediasval inflections. 

II. All unnecessary barbarous or foreign words and idioms 
are to be banished. 



14 The Greek loghiotatos is of ancient date. During the most flour- 
ishing period of his existence, which means when he was paid well 
for his services, he enjoyed the appellation of Sophistes. In later times 
'he degenerated into Lexiplianes and Onomalotheras. He figures in 
the " Jests " of Hierocles under the name of Scholastlcus. His titles 
increased inversely as his attainments. So that in the eleventh and 
twelfth centuries he became Most Blessed, Superhonorable, Prince of 
Philosophers, Wise, Most Wise. A few years ago he prided himself 
upon his intimate knowledge of the mysteries contained in the fourth 
book of the grammar of Theodoras Gazes. His contempt for his 
mother tongue was so great, that he always wrote in what his admirers 
were pleased to call Ancient Greek. In connection with his favorite 
theme, he is now dreaming of the restoration of the Byzantine em- 
pire. 



INTRODUCTION. XVII 

III. All new words are to be formed by derivation and com- 
position, after the analogy of the ancient language. 

IV. The ancient orthography of words of Greek origin is to 
be preserved. But the radical portion of words of obscure or 
foreign origin is to be spelled in the simplest manner, as it is 
sounded. 

Romaic Pronunciation. 

In his orthographical rules, Choeroboscus seems to recognize 
some of the leading features of the Romaic pronunciation. Thus, 
when he gravely informs us that, in dkiTrjpios, AI is written with 
an I, and TH with an H, we are to infer that he did not distin- 
guish between H and I. The age of this grammarian is uncer- 
tain. But the fact that he does not take into account the quan- 
tity of the vowels renders it highly probable that he lived some 
time after the beginning of the sixth century. (See below.) 

Theognostus wrote in the reign of Leo the Philosopher, to 
whom he addresses his work on Orthography. His rules favor 
the notion that the pronunciation of the ninth century was es- 
sentially the same as that of the present day. Thus, the rule, 
that the syllable E in a radical word before a double consonant 
cannot be written with an AI, implies that he pronounced AI like 
E. (The rules of Choeroboscus and Theognostus are found in 
Cramer's Anecdota, Vol. 2. 1.) 

The anecdote of the illiterate patriarch who read MarBalov in 
four syllables, Mardd'iov, 15 throws no new light on the sound of 
AI ; for it has been shown in another place that AI was a mo- 
nophthong as early as the third century. (See History of the 
Greek Alphabet and Pronunciation, p. 68.) 

Antiquity of Accentual Rhythm. 

The Tpo-n-dpiov of the Greek ritual is a short hymn. The 
word is the diminutive of rponos, and is equivalent to the Latin 
modulus, the diminutive of modus. A rpo-napiov containing a 
comprehensive view, or the substance, of a church feast, is called 
kovtclkiov, breviarium, the diminutive of kovtos, brevis. In 
some respects the kovtclkiov admits of being compared with the 
Collect of the Episcopal Church. An w 8 rj, ode, consists of a 
number of rpo7rdpta, the first of which is called el p p. 6s, joint. 
All the Tponapia of an adr) have the rhythm of its dppos. In 
this connection the Tpcmapiov corresponds to the ancient arpocprj 

lb Glycas, p. 527 [reign of Copronymus]. 



XV111 INTRODUCTION. 

and dvrc(TTpo(j)Tj. A k a v oi p, canon, is a system of »8at, nine of 
which make a complete Kavav, three a r piadiov, and four a 
rerpaoibtov. Most of the Tpondpia are metrical, their rhythm 
being generally accentual. 

This kind of composition first made its appearance in the fifth 
century, when Anthimus and Timocles were known as authors 
of rpo7rdpia. 1G But as none of their moduli have come down to 
us under their name, we cannot judge of their structure. It ap- 
pears, however, that the distinction between long and short con- 
tinued to be observed, at least as late as the sixth century ; for 
John Lydus recognizes it. 17 

Saint Romanus, who lived in the latter part of the fifth cen- 
tury, is, according to his anonymous biographer, the author of 
the KovrcLKia ; and nothing can be urged against the essential 
correctness of this statement. His kovto.klov for Christinas is 
the following : 

'H 7rap8evos crrjptpov 
Tov vnepovaiov ri<ret, 
Kai f) yi) to cnrfjXaiov 
T<5 cnrpoo-'iTcd 7rpoady€i • 
' AyyeXoi perd Troipevoiv So^oAoyoOo-i, 
Mdyoi 8e perd darepos odonropovai. 
At' f)pds yap eyevvrjdr) 
IlatSioi/ veov 
'O TTpo aloovcov Beds. 

In the reign of Justinus Thrax the following rpo-n-dpiov was 
sung in the churches. ls 

Tov beiirvov crov tov pvaTLKov 

"Srjpepov, Yle deov, 

Kolvcovov pe 7rapdXa{3e • 

Ov prj yap rots e)(dpols o~ov 

To pvorfjpLov €i7ro), 

Ov (piXrjpd aoi Scocrco 

KaOdirep 6 'loucW, 

'AAV a>s 6 XycTTrjs opoXoyco aoi, 

Mvr)aOr)Ti pov, Ki'pie, 

"Orav eXdrjs 

'Ei/ tt) (3ao-iXeiq crov. 
The following distich is, by the Byzantine chronographers, 
referred to the age of the emperor Phocas the Tyrant : 19 

16 TriKorriANES, p. 177 [A. M. 5957. A. D. 457]. 

17 Joannes Lydus, p. 141, 14. 

18 Cedrenus, Vol. I. p. 684,23 [A. D. 558 -571]. ( 

19 TlIEOPllANES, p. 457, 19. c O be <fra)Kas eTTOLtjaev Itvttikov, /ecu oi 



INTRODUCTION. XIX 

HaXtv els tov kovkov ernes-, 
IldXiv tov vovv dneXeices. 

The d icd 6 lo-Tos v fivos is the office of the Virgin, partly- 
read and partly sung, all standing, on the Saturday of the fifth 
week in Lent. The Greeks believe that it was composed in 
commemoration of the repulse of the Avars and other barba- 
rians from the walls of Constantinople in the reign of Heraclius 
(A. D. 617). And as Georgius Pisides was the readiest versi- 
fier of that period, it has been conjectured that he was the author 
of the principal part of it. The distinctive portions of this office 
are its twenty-four oikoi, houses, stations. Their rhythm is 
accentual. Here are the first twelve verses of the first olkos : 

"AyyeXos 7rp(OToaTaTT]s 
Ovpavodev eirep.(p6r} 
JLlnelv rfj 6eoTOK(o to X a ^P € ' 
Kcu o~vv rfj dcrcofiaTa (poovfj 
"2a>p.aTOvp,ev6v ae 6e<x>pa>v, Kvpie, 

'E^/oraro koX tcrraro Kpavydfav rrpbs avTrjv TOiavra • 
Xaipe, 81 rjs f) x a P a eKXdpyJAei, 
XaTpe, di rjs t) dpd e/cXet'-v^et • 
XaTpe, tov jrecrovTOS 'ASap. 77 dvdicXrjcriSi 
XaTpe, t5)v daupvcov ttjs ~Evas f) XvTpcocris. 
XaTpe, vy^os hvcravdfiaTov dvdpam'ivois Xoyicrpols-, 
XaTpe, (3d6os dvcr8ed>pr)TOV kcll 'AyyeXcov 6(pdaXu.o1s. 

The following is its tcovrdiaov. (It is mentioned by Porphyro- 
genitus, De Cer. p. 609, 6.) 

T77 VTrepp-dxco arpar-qyco to. VLKt]T7)pia 
'Qs XvTpcoOelaa rcov deivcov evxapio-Trjpia 
'Avaypd(p(D o~oi fj ttoXis o~ov, OeoroKe. 20 



TipdcrivoL vftpiaav clvtov XeyovTes, " UaXiv [read IlaAt] els tov kcivkov 
ernes-, ndXiv tov vovv dneXenes fv. 1. aTroAea-es]." GLYCAS (p. 511, 1) 
has dnooXeaas for dneXeKes- CEDREXUS, Vol. I. p. 709, 6. HaXiv tov 
oivov ernes-, rrdXiv tov vovv aTrcoXecras. 

20 The Byzantines assert that Constantinople was dedicated by its 
founder to the Virgin. Accordingly, we find her frightening away 
the Khan of the Avars and the Caliph of the Arabs, from the pre- 
cincts of her favorite city. It appears, however, that, in the year 
1453, she could not keep off the Sultan of the Turks, partly on account 
of the wickedness of the Christians, but chiefly because he was too 
much for the theological puppet-shows of Byzantium. (Horologium, 
May 11. Cedrexus, Vol. I. p. 495, 22. Theophaxes, pp. 487, 

7: Gil, 14. ClIRONICON PaSCHALE, p. 725, 9. PoilPIIYROGEXI- 

tus, De Adm. p. 102, 12.) 



XX INTRODUCTION. 

AXX cos €)(ov<ja to Kpuros dnpoapd^Tov 
Ek ffavToiodv pe Kivbvvcov eXevdepcoaov, 
Iva icpd^Gi croc, Xaipe, vvpcfiq dvvpcpevTe. 

In the iambic canons of Saint John of Damascus, the accent- 
ual rhythm is as discernible as the quantitative. At present, 
however, they are sung according to the former rhythm alone. 
Take as a specimen the first and third rponapia of the seventh 
ode of his Christmas canon. 

Tw ivavravciKTos e^ecpavXicrav nodco 21 
"ATrkrjTa BvpaivovTos TjyKiaTpccpevot 
IlalSes rvpavvov dvadeov yXcoaaaXyiav • 
Ois e'UaOe cpXbt; cicnreTos, tco decnroTT) 
Aeyovcrw, " Eis alccvas evXoyrjTos ei." 

'Apco-ye Xpicrre, tov ftporols hvavrlov 
TLpofiXrjpa ttjv adpKcoaiv dpprjTcos '4ya>v 
"Hicrxyvas, oXfiov Ttjs Becocrecos cfiepcov 
Mopcpovp.evos vvv, tjcttivos oV eXnida 
*Ava>6ev els Kevdpcovas rjXOopeu £6<pov. 

According to a notice in the rpicodiov (the book containing the 
rponapia appropriate to Lent), its authors are Cosmas, Theodo- 
rus and Joseph the Studita?, Andreas bishop of Crete, and sev- 
eral others. 

The i£a7Too-Te iXdpia are ascribed to Constantine Porphy- 
rogenitus. 22 They are each composed of six o-tIxol ttoXltlkoi, 
popular verses (§ 91, 5). Here follows a specimen. 

Tots padrjTais o~vveX6copev ev opet TaXcXaias 
ITicrrei Xpiarov Bedcraadai, Xtyovra i^ovalav 
Aa/Setv tcov civco Kai /carco, pddcopev 7rcos 8ib s do~K€i 
Banrl^eiv els to ovopa tov IlciTpos e'Ovrj ndvTa 
Kai tov Ylov Kai dyiov UvevpaTos, ko.1 avvuvat 
Tols pvtTTais cos vneaxeTO etcs ttjs crwreXei'ay. 

Michael Psellus, who flourished in the eleventh century, 
wrote several poems in this kind of verse. (His o-n'^oi ttoXltl- 
koi are found in Boissonade's Anecdota Graeca.) This Michael 



21 The emperor Leo Armenius was fond of this modulus because it 
favored his iconoclastic views. (Genesius, p. 19, 5. Theophanes 
Continuatus, p. 38, 23. Cedrenus, Vol. II. p. 60, 22. Zonaras, 
Vol. IT. p. 134 (Paris ed.). 

22 EiVt fie to. pev ecodivu AeouTos tov crocpcoTaTov ftatriXecos, to. Se e£a- 
7rocTTei\dpia tov vlov avTov KcovcrTavrivov /3a<7iXecoy. Notice prefixed 
to the e£a7T0CTT€i\d()ia and icodwd. 



INTRODUCTION. XXI 

Psellus has been counfounded with another author of tlie same 
name who lived in the ninth century. 

Symeon Metaphrastes, supposed to be the same as Symeon 
Magister, composed a prayer in accentual trochaic dimeters 
(§ 92, 2), improperly called Anacreontics. It begins thus : — 

'Atto pvnapcov ^eiXecoz/, 
'A7to fioeXvpds xapblas, 
'Atto d<addprov yXcooorjs, 

'E/C ^/V-X?]? epQV7TCOp,6VT]S, 

Ae£ai berjcnv, Xpcore p.ov. 

In classical Greek, the accentual rhythm sometimes coincides 
with the quantitative. Thus : — 

Iambic. 
Aristophanes, Xub. 1420. Vesp. 238. Lys. 310. 

AXX ovbap,ov vop-l^erai rbv tzarepa tovto Trda^eiv. 
Tr/s dprorrcoXibos Xaduvr eKXe\l/ap,ev rbv 6Xp,ov. 
Kap p.r) koXovvtcov rovs p.o)(Xovs ^aXaxxtv at yvvatxes 
Trochaic. 
Id. Ach. 6S8. Eq. 317. Pac. 303. 311. 611. G38. 

"Avopa Tldcovbv cnrapciTTcov kol rapdrrcov kcu kvkcov. 
Tols dypOLKOicriv 7ravovpycos coo-re (paiveoBaL Tra^y. 
Td^ecov diraWayerteg Ka\ kcikcov (poiviniKcov . 
'AXX' dKovcravres toiovtov xa.lpop.ev Krjpuyp.aros. 
'Etjecpvorjoev rooovrov noXepov cocrre tm kokvco. 
Trjvbe p.ev 8i<pols ecoOovv ti)v Oebv KT]pvyp.acnv. 

Sometimes the accentual rhythm is exactly the reverse of 
the quantitative. Thus : — 

Accentual Iambic. 
iEscriYLUS, Pers. 157-159. 

Q, fiadv^covcov avaocra He paid gov virepTaTrj 

~Mr]TT}p rj Eeptov yepaid, x ai P € i Aapelov yvvai. 

Qeov p.ev evvdreipa TIepocov, Beov de ko\ p.r]TT]p ecpvs, 

Hv tl p.rj ba.ip.cov TraXaios- 23 .... 
Aristophanes, Ach. 676. 712. 718. Xub. 576. 585. 

Ot yepnvres ol 7Ta.Xai.ol p.ep.cp6peoda rfj TroXei. 

Tot? veoi&i 8 evpvTrpco<Tos <al XdXos ^a> KXeiviov. 

Tbv yepovra tco yepovTi rov veov be tco veco. 

Ho'iKrjp.evai yap vplv p.ep.cpdpeo-Q' evavriov. 

Tr)v OpvaXkio* els eavrbv evOecos £vve\Kvaas. 

23 EuSTATIIIUS, p. 11, 35. Ot br/uoTiKol crri'^oi, ol to naXaibv p.ev 
rpoxaUcos irob'L^op.evoi, Ka6a kox AlcrxvXos iv TlepoaLs SnXot, cipri de iro- 
XitlkoX 6vop.a£6p.evoi. This merely shows that the loyhidiaii of the 
twelfth century were by no means in advance of their age. 



XXU INTRODUCTION. 

Accentual Trochaic. 
Id. Nub. 1045. Vesp. 241. 244. Lys. 313. 365. 

Kciitol Tiva yvcoprjv e^oov -^eyeis ra Oeppd Xovrpd ; 
"EipfiXou Se <pacri xprjpdrcov €X eiv diravres avrov. 
'E7r' avrov a>s KoXovpevovs cov rj^LK-qcrev • dXXd. 
Tts £vXXdftoir dv rov tjvXov rcov ev 2auw crrparrjycov ; 
"Atttov povov SrparvXXibos r<5 daKrvXco irpoo~eX6u>v. 

Rhyme. 

Rhyme is recognized by the classical poets, although they 
never seem to go after it. They only use it when it comes to 
them. 

Sophocles, Aj. 765. 766. 

3/ Eyva>K.a yap §// <fia>r6s quart] pevrj, 
Kal rrjs TraXacas xdpiros eicfiefiXqpevr}. 

In the longer olkol of the aKaBio-ros vpvos, rhyme is of frequent 
occurrence. In its Kovrdniov, the second line rhymes with the 
first, and the fifth with the fourth. (See above.) 

In long poems rhyme began to be regularly employed about 
the latter part of the fifteenth century. The earliest produc- 
tion in rhyme is the Description of the Plague of Rhodes, by 
Emmanuel Georgilas, already mentioned. 

Origin of the Name Romaic. 

When Constantine the Great transferred the seat of empire 
to Byzantium he called it Nea Pco/^, 24 New Rome, in contradis- 
tinction to npeafivrepa Pcon^, 25 Elder Rome, or simply Vetfirj, Rome. 
The popular name, however, was, and still continues to be, Kcov- 
(TTavTLvov7ro\is, Constantinople, that is Kcovaravrivov noXis, 26 the city 
of Constantine. The appellation Neiv Rome is now obsolete, 
except in connection with the titles of its bishop. Thus, rprj- 

yopios tXto) 6tov dpxienio-Konos KcovarravrivovnoXecos Near Pa>pqs Kal 
oUovpeviKos Trarpidpxqs, Gregory by the mercy of God Archbishop 
of Constantinople which is New Rome, and universal Patriarch. 
After that memorable event, the name of PcopaToi," 27 Romans, 
was applied to the Greeks, as well as to the genuine Romans. 

24 Concil. Constant. I. can. r'. Joannes Lydus, p. 193, 21. 
Tiieophanes, p. 42 [A. M. 5821. A. D. 321]. Chronicon Pas- 
ciiale, p. 529 [A. D. 330]. 

26 Menander, p. 328, 2. 

26 Eunafius, p. 93, 20. 

27 Cedrenus, Vol. I p. 454, 16 [A. D. 268 - 270]. Compare Zo- 
naras, Vol. II. p. 605, 5. 



INTRODUCTION. XX111 

The subjects of the Byzantine emperor were sometimes distin- 
guished from the eWe/not Pco/ialoi, 28 Western Romans, by the ad- 
jective eaoi? 8 Eastern. The emperor's domain was known as 
Pcofiavia,^ Romania, the country of the Romans, a derivative of 
Poifiavos, 30 Romdnus, Roman. 

The Greeks being thus changed into Romans, it was natural 
that the name of their language should undergo a corresponding 
transformation. The adjective PcopaliKos (trisyllabic), less cor- 
rectly Pay/xalKos, is derived from Poopaios, after the analogy of the 

classical 'A^an/cos 1 from 'Abator. Hence tj PcopaiiKr) yXcoacra, or 
simply to. Po/xauxa, 31 Romaic, the language of the Romans. 

The educated Greeks in general, and the loghiotati in particu- 
lar, have an instinctive aversion to the word Papaios, with its deriv- 
atives, not because it makes them Romans, but because it is asso- 
ciated with bondage, ignorance, and degradation. Consequently 
the spoken language has been designated by the following adjec- 
tives : r) cittXtj, r) aTrXoeWrjviKr), j) xvdala, r) awpepivr), r) Tcopivr), tj koivt), 
tj vea, f) vecorepa, tj TpaiKiKr), r) veoeXkrjviKr). The last of these ap- 
pellations is evidently the most appropriate. As to the expres- 
sion 17 'eWtjvlkt) ykwaaa, or simply to. 'EWrjvim, it is regularly 
applied to the ancient language of Greece. 

The name which the ancient Greeks gave themselves was 
that of "EWrjves, Hellenes. During the Ptolemaic and subse- 
quent periods, the Jews of Alexandria and other places out of 
Palestine used this term also in the sense of pagans, idolaters, 
gentiles, heathens, 32 apparently because they regarded the 
Greeks as the most prominent Gentile nation with which they 
were acquainted. This signification passed into the works of 
the Fathers and other Christian authors. 33 Theophanes and 
his successors apply the epithet 'EXAaSiKoi, 34 natives of Hellas, 
to the inhabitants of Greece ; "EXkrjves being used in its Jewish 
acceptation. The late Greek revolution has restored the an- 

28 Priscus, p. 151, 12. 16. 

29 Theophanes, p. 532, 12. 

30 Porphyrogenitus, De Adm. p. 125, 19. Pvpavoi, the colo- 
nists sent from Rome to Dalmatia by Diocletian. 

31 KovyiceoTa, 2805. PcapaUa top aireKpidr). DuCAS, p. 138, 8. 
T17V kolvtjv y\<oTrav Pcopaicov. 

32 Seftuagixt. Es. 9, 12 "EWrjvas, Philistines. Mace. 2, 11, 24: 
2, 4, 13. 15. Nov. Test. Marc. 7, 26. Compare Matt. 15, 22. 

33 PROCOnus, Bell. Pcrs. p. 131, 10. 

34 Tiieofhaxes, p. 623, 12. Theophanes Continuatus,p.399,12. 
Leo Grammaticus, p. 294, 2. 



XXIV INTRODUCTION. 

cient name. But out of Greece Independent, the common peo- 
ple prefer their Pcopaloi and PcopaUica, and are not very desirous 
of being descended from Pericles, or even from Alexander the 
Great. Meanwhile the Jewish and patristic meaning of "EWrj- 
ves continues to be devoutly recognized by all those who are 
deeply versed in martyrology and other branches of ecclesiasti- 
cal biography equally edifying. 

The "EWrjves of history were originally called rpaiKol? 5 the 
prototype of the Latin Graeci, Greeks. The Byzantines, 
as also the Modern Greeks, sometimes use this term, but almost 
always as the representative of the Western G r a e c u s. Thus, 
Ei/xcu FpctLKos, I am a Greek, regularly implies, as the (or you) 
Franks call us. 36 

The Latin Element of the Romaic. 

After Greece was reduced to a Roman province, a number 
of Latin words and idioms crept into its language. But it was 
not till after Constantinople became the capital of the Roman 
world that the Latin succeeded in forcing upon the Greek, chiefly 
through the influence of the court, a few formative endings. In 
process of time, the Latin disappeared from Byzantium, and the 
descendants of the Romans who had settled in the East 37 finally 
adopted the Greek. 38 So that, in the tenth century, the only 
remnants of the language of Rome were certain sentences 
chanted on stated occasions. 39 

The following are the formative endings borrowed from the 
Latin : 

-dpios, -arius. Eunapius, p. 74, 12 vorapios, notarius Pro- 
copius, Vol. II. p. 289 KafiaXkapios, as a proper name, from Ca- 
b all us. Joannes Lydus, p. 205, 10 KayxeXXa'pioy, cancella- 
rius. 

-apia, in numeral substantives, from -arius, in such words as bina- 
rius, denarius. 

35 Aristotel. Meteor. 1, 14, 15. Parian Marbles (B. n. 2374, 
10. 11). Eusebius, Chron. I. p. 25. Piiotius, Lex. Paiicovs. IIp> 
SYCHIUS, TpaiKicrri, 'EXXqiwri. TpaiKos, "EXXt/i/. Paucor, "EXKtjp. 
StepiIANUS BYZANTIUS, TpaiKos, 6 r, E\Xrjv. Eustatiiius, p. 81)0, 
14. 

36 Priscus, p. 190, 20. Procopius, Bell. Goth. pp. 93. 136. 
Tijeopiianes, p. 705. 

37 Tiieopiianes, p. 34, 9. 

38 Porphyrogenitus, Do Them. p. 13, 2. Trjv irdrpLov kol Vwpa'i- 
Krjv yXeoTTtiv a.7roj3a\6uTes. 

39 Idem, De Cer. chapters 74, 75. 



INTRODUCTION XXV 

-citos, -at us. Joannes Lydus, p. 169, 22 XayKioXdros, from lan- 

ceola. 
-drov, -atum. Theophaxes, pp. 375, 2 fiavdarov, man datum. 

361, 12 (poaadrov, from f o s s a t u s. 
-ov\a, -ula: nopTovXa, p or tula. 
-ovpa, -ura. Procopius, Vol. I. p. 290, 6 Kkeio-ovpa, a narroio 

pass. 
-dt(op, -dropas, ator: (Siykdropas, watchman, (pvkaKaro pas, jailer. 
-irov\os, pullus (puer). Theophaxes Continuatus, p. 379, 3 

Taj3pir)\67rov\os. Cedrexus, Vol. II. p. 434, 23. Knfinros ovres 

7raides nai did tovto Kop.rjr67rovXoi 6vopa£6p.€voi. 

The Venetians left behind them a large number of Italian 
words, and the following endings : 

-dvos, -ano (Latin -anus), paroxytone. Bevercridvos, Ilepa-cdvos, 

Na7ToXiraj/os. 
-dp a, -are, used only in verbs of Italian origin : ^oXravradpa, to beat, 

a nautical term, from volt a. 
-tpco, -ire: (paXipai, to fail. 
-e£os, -ese: 'EyyXe£os, In glese, Englishman, ®pavrcre£os, Francese, 

Frenchman. 

The Kovy Keo-ra contains a small number of French words, 
most of which are now obsolete. Words of undoubted Spanish 
origin are of very rare occurrence in Romaic. 

The Gothic Element of the Romaic. 

The Goths, Vandals, and Gepidae were different tribes of the 
same race. 40 Dexippus and Eunapius apply to them the ge* 
neric term Scythians i^Kvdai), which means little else than North- 
ern Barbarians. The Goths made their first appearance in 
Greece in the third century. 41 In the latter part of the fourth, 
they overran Thrace, Macedonia, and Thessaly. 42 And under 
Alaric they devastated Megaris and Peloponnesus. 43 About 
the middle of the fifth they appear in Illyria. 44 The Vandals 
under Genseric plundered the greater part of Greece in the fifth 
century. 45 The Gepidce are mentioned in connection with the 



40 Procopius, Vol. I. p. 312. 

41 Zosimus, p. 28 [A. D. 253]. 

42 Eunapius, p. 51 [A. D. 376]. Id. p. 77 [A. D. 378]. Id. p. 
79 [A. D. 380]. 

43 Zosimus, pp. 252, 253 [A. D. 396]. 

44 Priscus, p. 160 [A. D. 467]. 

45 Procopius, Vol. I. p. 335, 5 [A. D. 429-477]. 

c 



XXVI INTRODUCTION. 

Avars, who made an attempt upon Constantinople in the early- 
part of the seventh century. 46 

The Franks were a branch of the Germanic family. 47 After 
they conquered the country now called France, 48 the Byzan- 
tines confounded them with the Celts and Celtiberians. 49 And 
in Modern Greek, QpayKos means Western JEuropean in general, 
and Italian or Roman Catholic in particular. The 'Ayyi'Xoi of 
Procopius are the ancient Angles. In the tenth century the 
Bapayyoi 50 appeared at Constantinople as mercenaries. Their 
true name was 'iyyXtW, 51 of which the root is IyyX-, the same 
as that of Engl-ish. And as they were Britons, it is natural to 
infer that they w r ere English. If so, Bapayyoi may be regarded 
as the Greek form of the Anglo-Saxon warig, bulwark, that is, 
the Guard. 

Only a small number of Romaic words can with any degree 
of certainty be referred to the Gothic group. 

The Slavic Element of the Romaic. 

In the reign of Justinian the Slavi crossed the Danube and 
overan Illyria. 52 In the latter part of the sixth century they 
devastated Thrace and Greece. 53 A century later they appear 
as soldiers in the army of Justinian the Second. 54 In the eighth 
century we find them permanently settled in Greece. 55 The 
Russians, at the instigation of the Byzantine emperor, devas- 

4G THEornANES, p. 485 [A. M. 6117, A. D. 617]. 
47 Procopius, Vol. I. p. 319. 

43 Theophanes, p. 618, 19. Porphyrogenitus, De Adm. p. 
115, 2. 

43 TlIEOPHYLACTUS SlMOCATA, p. 245. PORPHYROGENITUS, De 

Them. p. 28, 12. 

50 Cedrenus, Vol. II. p. 613. Scylitzes, p. 644. Axxa Com- 

NKXA, p. 120. 

61 Eustatiiius, p. 372, 22. To 'iyKXifca, the country of the English. 
Nicetas, p. 54 7. Bpfrravcoi/, ovs vvv <pacr\v 'lyykivovs- Compare Id. 
p. 323, 20. CoDiNUS, De Off'. 7, p. 57, 9. Ol Bapayyoi KaraTTjV Ttarpiov 
Kai ovtol ykwa-Q-av avra>u, rjyovv 'iyyXiwort, in English ! 

62 Procopius, Vol. II. p. 397, 18. 

63 Menander, p. 327 [A. D. 577J. Id. p. 404, 15. Theophanes, 
p. 360 [A. M. 6051. A. D. 551]. 

54 Theophanes, p. 559 [A. M. 6183. A. D. 683]. 

65 Porphyrogenitus, De Them. p. 53 [A. D. 741 - 775]. De 
Adm. p. 217 [A. D. 802-811]. Ibid. p. 220 [A. D. 829-867]. 
Theophanes, p. 707 [A. M. 6272. A. D. 775]. 



INTRODUCTION. XXVli 

tated Bulgaria in the early part of the ninth century. 56 In the 
reign of Basil, they, together with other Slavic nations, adopted 
the ritual and the alphabet of Byzantium. 57 In the latter part 
of the twelfth century they assisted the emperor against the Co- 
mani and Blachi. 58 

The Slavic bequeathed to the Greek a small number of 
words, and the following diminutive endings : — 

-clklos, from -€K, -ijk. Theophanes, p. 706, 10 [A. D. 774]. 

^ravpaKios, the diminutive of Sravpos. 
6.kt]s, syncopated from -clklos. Theophanes Continuatus, p. 361, 
1 1 . Qeo8oTaKr]s from Qeodoros. 

-clkiov, the neuter of -clklos. Theophanes, p. 582, 16 [A. D. 
703] klovclklov, from klcov. Porphyrogenitus, l)e Cer. pp. 20, 23 
(TTevaKiov. 341, 5 KamorpaKiv. 

-clklvos, modern - a k l a v 6 s, the Slavic - e k and the Greek -lvos com- 
bined. Malalas, p. 232, 12 XeTrraiavos, rather thin. 

-LTo-a, -lt£cl, Slavic -r]T(ra. Cedrenus, Vol. II. pp. 435, 19 Pa- 
IxeravLTCa. 436, 20 Tpia8iY£a, the Slavic Tp6r)T(ra. 459, 14 2rpou- 

-Irans, -ir£r)s, the masculine of -Ircra. Theophanes Continua- 
tus, p. 379, 3 Bao-iXiTfys. Porphyrogenitus, Vit. Basil, p. 224, 
22. *Op [0eo(piAoi/J vTroKopi^ofxevoi Qeocpikir^rjv eKaXovv. 

-ltctlv, -lt£lv, the neuter of -iro~a. Symeon Magister, p. 713, 
17 irpoaarir^v, write TrpoacrTiT&v, from Ts-podo-reiov. Common'in 
PTOCHOPRODROMUS ; as KapvdLTcriv, Kpop,p,vdiraLv, piKporepiro-iv. 

-oicas, Russian -ok, -lok, heard in jvlokcls, from yvios, vlos, son. 

-ovtctikos, Slavic -rsheic, -rjrsheK, in adjectives: fUKpovraiKos, Xt- 
yovraiKos. Common in PTOCHOPRODROMUS. 

The Tatar Element of the Romaic. 

The Hunns, Avars, Turks, and Bulgarians belong to the 
same family. The first three of these appellations are by the 
Byzantines sometimes confounded with each other. The Hunns 
appeared in Europe in the fourth century. 59 In the middle of 
the fifth, they overran Thrace. 60 About a hundred years later, 
they proceeded as far as Greece. 61 In the early part of the 
seventh century we find them before the walls of Constantino- 

66 Cedrenus, Vol. II. p. 372 [A. D. 802-811]. 
57 Glycas, p. 553, 4. Scriptor Anonymus in Bandurii 
Animadv. in Porphyr. p. 362 et seq. 

68 NiCETAS,p. 691 [A. D. 1195-1204]. 

69 Eunapius, p. 75 [A. D. 374]. Priscus, p. 141, 8. Porphy- 
rogenitus, De Adm. p. 123, 7. Theophylactus Simocata, p. 
47 22. 

*° Tiieophanes, p. 186, 1 [A. M. 5966. A. D. 466]. 
61 Agatiiias, p. 301 [A. D. 558]. 



XXVH1 INTRODUCTION. 

pie in conjunction with the Avars . 62 According to Theophylac- 
tus, the name of "Afiapoi was improperly given to the inhabi- 
tants of Pannonia. 63 Porphyrogenitus speaks of certain Slavic 
tribes that were called also "A/3apot. 64 The Turks sent ambas- 
sadors to Constantinople about the middle of the sixth century. 65 
In the time of Porphyrogenitus, the country now called Hun- 
gary was inhabited by Tovptcoi. 66 The Bulgarians first became 
known to the Byzantines in the latter part of the fifth century. 67 
Conjointly with the Avars they attacked Constantinople in the 
seventh century. 68 In the reign of Constantine Pogonatus they 
crossed the Danube and invaded Thrace. 69 In the eighth cen- 
tury they were converted to Christianity. 70 The Bulgarians 
of the present day speak a Slavic dialect, which circumstance 
is the origin of the current opinion that they are of Sclavonic 
descent. 

In addition to a large number of words of Tatar origin, the 
following formative endings have crept into the vulgar Romaic 
through the medium of the Turkish : — 

-A?}?, -AiKt, -rays, from -li, -lik, -dzJii, respectively. (§ 16. 1.) 

. 62 Theophanes, p. 485, 5 [A. M. 6117. A. D. 617]. 

63 Theophylactus Simocata, pp. 283. 284. Nicephorus Con- 

STANTINOPOLITANUS, p. 38, 19. 

64 Porphyrogenitus, De Adm. pp. 126. 141. 

65 Menander, p. 295, 19 TA. D. 568]. Theophanes, p. 378, 
19 [A. M. 6064. A. D. 564]. ^Compare Id. p. 485, 12 [A. D. 617]. 

66 Porphyrogenitus, De Adm. pp. 81. 141. 168. 177. Zona- 
ras, XVI. 12 [A. D. 886-911]. 

67 Theophanes, p. 222, 3 [A. D. 494]. Zonaras, XIV. 3. Com- 
pare Genesius, p. 85, 22. 

68 Georgius Pisides, Bell. Avar. 197. 409. 

69 Theophanes, p. 544 [A. D. 671]. Porphyrogenitus, Them, 
p. 46, 1 [A. D. 668-685]. 

70 Porphyrogenitus, Vit. Basil, p. 342, 7. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



B. stands for Boeckh's Corpus Inscriptionum Graecanim. 

B. A. Bekker's Anecdota Graeca. 

C. Curtius's Anecdota Dclphica. 

Et. M. Etvmologicum Magnum. 

R. Rossius's Inscriptiones Graccac incditae. Fasciculus I. 

Naupliae, 1834. 



THE ALPHABET. 



The Modern Greek letters, breathings, accents, 
and marks of punctuation are the same as in 
classical Greek. 

1. Letters. 



Figures. 


Representatives. 


Names. 


A, a 


a 




V A\cf>a 


A Ipha 


b, /3, e 


bh, 


or v 


Brjra 


Bhita 


r,y 


gh 




Ta/jL/na 


Ghdma 


A, 8 


dh 




Aekra 


Dhelta 


E, e 


e 




'E yjriXoi 


E'psilon 


z.e 


z 




Zrjra 


Zita 


H, rj 


i 




*Hra 


Ita 


9,0,% 


th 




OfJTCt, 


Thita 


1 1 


i 




lcoTa 


Iota 


K, K 


h 




Kdirira 


Kdpa 


A, \ 


i 




Ad/jL{3$a 


Ldmbhdha 


M,p 


m 




MO 


Mi 


IV, v 


n 




m 


Ni 




A*5, 


or x 


Hi 


Ksi 


0, o 







U fJLLKpOV 


Omilzron 


JT, 7T, W 


P 




m 


Pi 


P.P 


r 




Pu 


Ro 


X 0-, 5 final 5 




Uly/jba 


Sighma 


T, T 


t 




Tav 


Taph 


r,v 


i 




'T yjrckov 


Tpsilon 


$, * 


ph, 


or/ 


$2 


Phi 


x > % 


kh 




XI 


KM 


y,* 


ps 




Wl 


Psi 


12, 6) 




1 




SI fieya 


Omega , 



THE ALPHABET. 



2. Breathings. 

Smooth breathing ( ' ), as in aicovw, e^w, rj\0ov, 



oIkos, clvtos 



Rough breathing ( ' ), as in oXotckrjpos, lepa^ ottov, 
alfia, eiTra/xev. 

3. Accents. 

Acute ( ' ), as in airiaTos^ dirl(TTOV, fcaXos avOpcoiros, 
av0p(O7ro<; tcaXos. 

Grave ( % ), as in Tifir), rca/coi, ^v^poi. 
Circumflex ( " \ as in e/celvos, rtfiaTe, Tifia, /caXois. 

4. Marks of Punctuation. 

Comma . 

Colon and Semicolon 

Period 

Interrogation 

Apostrophe 

Coronis 

Diaeresis . 

Parenthesis . . . . • ( } 

Exclamation . 



Pronunciation. 

§3. 

1. Pronunciation of the Vowels. 

The Modern Greek has but five elementary 
vowel-sounds, represented by A, E, I, O, OT. 

Three of these, namely A, OT, I, may be called 
independent. The remaining two may be denomi- 
nated intermediate. 



PRONUNCIATION. 3 

A. 

The full utterance of A requires the mouth to 
be opened as much as possible, and the breath to 
come up freely, that is, without any effort to check 
its progress or change its direction. It is essen- 
tially the same as a in far, farm, calm, father. 
After I, it is preceded by a sound resembling a 
weak y consonantal ; as in ftap&la, dXrjOeta, vyela. 

Represented by the Italian a ; as /cardpa, katara, 
d'jrdp'xpiLai, apdrkhome, diro, apo, <ro(j>la, sophia. 

or. 

The utterance of OT requires the corners of the 
mouth to be brought as near each other as possi- 
ble, and the breath to strike against the upper 
teeth, and not against the extremities of the lips. 
It is the same as the English oo in moon, spoon, 
soon. 

Represented by the Italian u ; as ovpavd^ uranos, 
tovtov, tutll, avyovarov, abhgllUStU. 

I. 

The utterance of I requires the corners of the 
mouth to be kept as far apart as possible, and the 
breath to strike against the upper teeth. It cor- 
responds to the English i in marine, machine. 

Represented by the Italian i ; as irlvw, pino, 
Tt/jLovcrc, timusL 

E. 

E is intermediate between A and I. It requires 
the mouth to be moderately opened, and the 
breath to proceed horizontally. It is approxi- 



THE ALPHABET. 



mately expressed by the English e in spend, 
ferry. 

Represented by the Italian e ; as ^g), ekho, 
alfiaTWfjbivo^, ematomtnos, Xeyercu, leghete. 

O. 

O is intermediate between A and OT. It re- 
quires nearly the same position of the vocal organs 
as OT ; the breath, however, must strike against 
the extremities of the lips, and not against the 
upper teeth. It is approximately expressed by 
the English oh. 

Represented by the Italian o ; as 07r&>?, opos, 
7roraf6o?, potamos, Xeyo/juevcx;, leghomenos. 

h, r. 

As to the vowels H and T, they are now each 
pronounced like I. 

Represented by the Italian i; as Orj/crj, thiki, 
Kvpios, kirios, 1x66s, ikhthis. 

The vowels can be divided also into hack-vowels 
and front-vowels. Thus, E is a front-vowel in 
relation to A and O, but a back-vowel in relation 
to OT and I. 

The relative position, in the vocal apparatus, 
of the vowel-sounds, may be illustrated by the fol- 
lowing diagram. Of course, it is not to be sup- 

OT 




PRONUNCIATION. 5 

posed that such a figure is actually formed in the 
mouth. 

2. Pronunciation of the Diphthongal Sounds. 

The classical diphthongs, with the exception of 

av, ev, 7]v, cov, are monophthongs in Modern Greek. 

Thus, 

ai is sounded like e. Represented by e ; as al/xa, 
ema, alrrjai^, etisis. 

ai or a, like a. Represented by a ; as aocpla, sophia, 
aSo), ddho. 

av, ev, 7)v, cov. Before a vowel, or semivowel (ft y, 
8, f, X, fju, v, p), the v in these diphthongs has the 
sound of /3 ; as /cava, kdbho, cpevyco, phebhgho, 
7]vpa, ibhra. In all other cases, the v has the 
force of (f> ; as avros, aphtos, evdvs, ephthis, rav, 
tdph. 

The diphthong cov does not occur in Modern 
Greek. 

ev, like i. Represented by %•■; as elira, ipa, e/celvos, 

ekinos. 
7)i or rj, like c. Represented by i ; as ry rtpfih ti 

timi. 
oi, like c. Represented by i ; as oltcoi, iki, fcoikia, 

kilia, TOiouro?, tiutos. 
ou, see above, 1. 
vi, like i. Represented by i ; as vlds, ids, opyvid, 

orghid. 

The Modern Greek nevertheless has nearly all 
the ancient diphthongal sounds. Thus, when, in 
the same word, or in two contiguous words, a back- 
vowel is followed by a front- vowel, these two vowels 
1* 



THE ALPHABET. 



admit, especially in poetry, of forming a diphthong- 
al sound, that is, of being uttered in one syllable. 

AE. 

AE, the same as the Bceotic ae (Latin ae), ap- 
pears in the forms ae, aai. It is heard in deros, 
when a dissyllable ; also in the verbal ending -ae 
when pronounced in one syllable. Not unfre- 
quently, the first element (A) belongs to the end 
of a word, and the second (£) to the beginning of 
the word following. 

Ka\ '? T7]V ^rfkri fiov tt]V KOp(f>r] aero? elv /caOtcrfievos. 

'O Xpovw avaTplyiace, tov ecj)ae fiavpo cfyelBi. 

Na evrpoTridfyrj tt]V yeveav tov, va evTpoir lateral fcao 

avros. 
Me tcl povya cufiaTay/uLeva gepco ore efSycuves repvefrd. 

AI. 

AI is of frequent occurrence. The forms under 
which it appears are ai, ay, ay, aei, aoi, ai). The 
diaeresis shows that a'C, ai) are to be distinguished 
in pronunciation from ac, av. Thus, ai, ai) are each 
sounded like ai in aisle ; but ai, av, like e, a/3 or 
a$, respectively (§ 2). 

To) fcaprepco tt^ avoc^t, to jjlu'C to leaXofcalpL, 

" Md'Cva" <jx0vd%ei, " ra iravid, prjge ra,' % Xe'yet,, " /caTto." 

Tcovaovcj) Apdirrj fiacncapa, ya'cBapoyevvrjiieve. 

Td iraWrjicdpia fid^cotje kolL b\ov tov rai'efia fiov. 

Tpia fjLTTaipaKia Kivrjcrav, ra rpt apa8 apaBa. 

Kal tov Kopdfcov to (f>repo to yei yal'ravo(j>pvBi. 

T' ap/JLara tmv XovXiwriaacnv ttj<; f^a/cova fie'vys XaiBoos. 

K r) yXcoaaa tov arjBovoXaXel kclI tceXai'Bei Kal Xe'yei. 



PRONUNCIATION. 



Krvirdeu fcdi to /caXiyi, o~ov nai fias voaei, o Xapos. 
Tcopa i) epopees avxyokaXovv kcll Xeyovv. 
c 07roi5 rr]v fcXelBcoae 6 Xpiarros k Tj Uavayid y pueyaXrj. 
Awheica Ypdvovs hcafia ra fiarta tt?? Bev ra elBa, 

AO. 

AO is heard in the verbal ending -dco. It results 
also from the union, in pronunciation, of two con- 
tiguous words. 

Maaropa, firjv iriKpaLveaai, k eyco Traco va cr to <j)epco. 
OeXco va (fraco OeXco va irion deXco va TpayovB-qaco. 
Kai av fJbera^r]<T(D Trpoftaro, icai av fiera(f)ao) Kpiapi. 
GeXco va iraco *? tt\ fiavva p,ov, va iraca 5 ra yoviica fiov, 

A-OT. 

A-OT, sounded like ou in pound, spout, is heard 
in ireXaov, the genitive of ireXao, for ireXayo. 

' ' Av e(3Xe7ra iravaKi rj rov ireXaov a<f>po. 

%av to afcopirio-fia tov ave/iov ? rov ireXaov ttjv fiovafya. 

EI. 

EI, sounded like ei in reign, freight, but a little 
fuller, appears under the forms e'C, eei, erj, erj. The 
diaeresis shows that it is not the same as u (pro- 
nounced I). In certain cases it results from the 
union, in pronunciation, of two contiguous words. 

Ilap-qyopta yj=i Oavaro^ k eXerj/ioavvrj 6 Xapos. 
Uov KeXa'ihei /cade irovpvo, to Xeei teal icaOe j3pdBv. 
IIov elaat, Kvpi, va fie L&r)s, fxdvva pov, vd pk /eXafyn?? ; 
Nd ae iBco k eyco 6 Kavp,evo<$ /cal va yaipovpuai. 



8- THE ALFHABKT. 

01. 

01, pronounced like oy in boy, nearly, appears 
under the forms oi) orj, oei, wet, coy, ov. The diaere- 
sis shows that oi, oi) are different from ot, ov. It 
often results from the union, in utterance, of two 
contiguous words. 

Ho X ovv r °v po'ihov tt]V f3acj)r), tov jjbrjkov ttjv yXv/caSa. 
Kcu fivpoXot Bev tov XaXei fca/jb/jua /xvpoXoytaTpa. 
f Ayte fiov Teaopyt, (3or)0a fie air tgdv TovpKwv tcl ytpta. 
Tov Xoyo Blv airoacoae, tov Xoyo Bev arroetire. 
Wco/jlI tov Btvco fcac Bev Tpcoet, icpaat teat Bev to Trivet. 
To iBrj kcu r) ptavvovXa /jLOv kcli air tov Kalfio ireOavrj. 

X Tou? ovpavovs to Btd^erat, ? ttjv irepareta to vcpatvet. 

EBco ve to arj/JtaBt fiov, k eBa) r) airofyaat /jlou. 

Xav ftpa-ftps etv rj irXaTe? tov, gov Kaarpo r) KecfraXr) tov. 

'H crfcoTcofievo rj ^covravo ? ttjv Ho'\i va ere 7ra/jue. 

OT-I. 

OT-I appears under the forms ovet, ovrj, ovrj ; as 
aicovei dissyllabic. It results also from the union, 
in utterance, of two contiguous words. 

Tov Ktraov r) \xavva kclOovvtclv ? tt)v atcpr) ? to itotcl/jll. 
Tov Nitcov tt€(J>t r) UoTCLfiia, tov Xp7]aTov r) AXaerawva. 
Mr)T€ a<f)ov et? tov Ta(po ireerr] t bvofia tov fxeXera. 

3. Pronunciation of the Consonants. 

B 

is the aspirate of the sound represented by b. The 
difference between the Modern Greek B and the 
English v is this: v is formed by pressing the 
upper teeth against the lower lip; the Modern 



PRONUNCIATION. 



Greek B requires the mouth to be somewhat 
rounded. It is to the English v, what <f> is to f. 

Represented by bh, and often by v ; as fiaOos, 
bhdthos, efiyalvoi), ebhgheno. 

As the sound of the English b is heard only in 
the combination MIT, the Greeks employ Mil as 
an approximation to it ; as Byron, Mirdipcov, Boston, 
Mwoo-tov, Birmingham, M t irepiuyx a f J " ( See IT, below. ) 

Note 1. In Scylitzes (p. 720, 5), Robert is written YovfiTrepros \ 
in Anna Comnena, Pofiirepros. 



is the aspirate of the sound represented by g pala- 
tal (as in go, get, give). Before I and E it is pro- 
nounced like y in ye, yes, but a little stronger. 
Before the other vowel-sounds it is guttural. 

Represented by gh ; as yaros, ghettos, yepw, 
gheron, yrj, ghi, yovn-a, ghupa. 

After r nasal, it does not differ from the English 
g palatal ; as ayyapla, angaria, ayyeko?, dngelos. 

As the sound of the English g palatal is heard 
only in TT or TK, the Greeks use TT or TK as an 
approximation to it ; as Grey, TtcpeC, Graham, 
TtcpeCyap** (See K, below.) 

Note 2. In the KovyKeara we have, 1944 YKiirep, for Gilbert. 
5200 TyaXepdv, for Galeran. 

T nasal 

occurs only before the palatals K, T, X, H (that is, 
KX), and is pronounced like n in angle, or ng in 
hang. 

Represented by n ; as ayyekos, dngelos, aytceiov, 
angion, o-Jy%u<xt?, sinkhisis, o-d\Tny%, sdlpinks. (See 
also N nasal.) 



10 THE ALPHABET. 



is the aspirate sound of d ; that is, it is pronounced 
like th in that, those, this. 

Represented by dh ; as Beva, dheno, Spoaos, dhro- 
sos, $i,8d<rKco, dhidhdsko, pa/3Sl, rabhdhi. 

The sound of the English d is heard only in 
NT ; which being the case, NT is employed as a 
substitute for it ; as Dublin, NrdfiTrXiv, Dorchester, 
Nrdpraea-rep. (See T, below.) 

Note 3. So in the KovyKeora (npo\.), 103, pre M7rov\iov, de 

Bouillon. 



is sounded like z. Represented by z ; as <j>pd£a>, 
phrdzo, fa)?}, Zo-i. 

& 

like th in thin, thorn. Represented by th ; as 0eo'?, 
theos, avdpwiros, dnthropos, adeos, dtheos. 

K 

like k. Represented by k ; as tca/cd?, kakos, rcpafa, 
krdzo. 

After T nasal, or JV nasal, it is sounded like g 
palatal ; as dy/cXid, anglid, dyfcelov, angion, crvyfcaia), 
sing to, av Kalco, angeo. 



like I in last, all. Represented by I ; as XaXa>, 
lalu, Xeyw, legho, Xoyos, loghos, Xovco, luo. 

Before the sound I, it is generally pronounced 
like Hi in William. Represented by 11 ; as Xvtcos, 
llikos, KaXrj, kalli. Compare N before I. 



PRONUNCIATION. 11 

M 

like m. Represented by m ; as fiovos, monos, fievo- 
fiev, menomen. 

N 

like n in nard, nest. Represented by n ; as vdfios, 
nomos, 7r2ve, pine, vovs, nus. 

Before the sound I, it is regularly pronounced 
like ni in opinion, onion. Represented by n ; as 
VL7TTCO, hipto, irovel, poni. Compare A before I. 

N nasal 

occurs chiefly in the proclitics av, lav, 8ev, eV, crvv, 
t6v, rrfv, twv, before K, or H (that is, KX), and is 
sounded like T nasal ; that is, like n in angle, or 
ng in hang ; as av fcdirrco, angopto, Sev gepco, dheng- 
sero. (See also T nasal.) 

In the same words, this letter before TI or W 
(that is, TJX) is pronounced like M ; as <rvv iroWr), 
simboli, kv iroXei, emboli. 



like ks. Represented by ks or x ; as a£«>9, dksios, 
feVo?, kstnos. 

After r nasal, or N nasal, it is sounded like gs ; 
as crak-my^ov, sdlpingson, tcov %evcDv f tongsenon. (See 
K, above.) 

n 

like p in park, pet, pin. Represented by p ; as 

iraTras, papas, ttltttcd, pipto, inwcri*;, ptosis. 

After M, it is pronounced like b ; as o-vfiircvco, 
simbino, efiirpds, embros. So also after N in the 
above-mentioned proclitics ; tov iroXe^ov, tombole- 
mon, av irayalvo), ambagheno. (See N nasal.) 



12 . THE ALPHABET. 

like s in soft. Represented by s ; as o-wo-to?, so- 
stos, crrifjbepovy simeron. 

Before a semivowel (B, T, A, Z, A, M, N, P) it 
is sounded like Z; as Xjuvpvrj, Zmirni, x" a f jLa > 
khdzma. So also in the proclitics tovs, t«?, before 
the same consonants ; tou? PaaCkeis t?5? 7^?, tuzbha- 
silis tizghis, tovs \vkovs, tuzllikus. 

T 

like/ in tell, tin, tart. Represented by t ; as rl^ore, 
tipote, tovtov, tutu. 

After JV it is generally sounded like d ; as evTipLos, 
endimos, Gvvrpofyos, sindrophos. So after JV in the 
above-mentioned proclitics ; rbv ti^iov, tondimion, 
av rbv TLfjuas, andondimds, Bev rpe^ei^ dhendrekhis. 
(See JV nasal.) 

7% formerly also TZ, 

like ts. Represented by ts ; as Taapovyi, tsarukhi, 
TGipmw, tsimbo. 

After JV, it is sounded like dz ; as ydvro-os, ghdnd- 
zos, vraafil, dzami. 

The combinations TX, TZ approximately express 
the English ch (tsh) before the vowel-sounds E, I; 
as cherry, raepo, cheap, tow, chip, ralir. But before 
A, O, OT, ch can be approximately represented 
only by T2I ; as charm, To-iapfi, choke, rcnofc, choose, 

T(TLOv£. 

The combinations JV7% NT2I are employed to 
express the sound of the English j or g lingual 
(dzh) ; as jet, vro-e'r, gem, vro-e/j,, jib, vTo-lpLTr, gibbet, 
VTaifJLTreT, jar, vratap, joke, vratoK, jury, vrcnovpc. 

Notk 4. In the KouyxeVra, Geojjroi, that is Godfrey, is written 



PRONUNCIATION. 13 

Note 5. In ancient Greek, T2, TZ occur only in foreign words. 
Thus, rcrabr], tsade, the name of the eighteenth letter of the Hebrew 
alphabet (Septuagixt. Thren. passim). B. n. 4945 To-tvo-fxfjT, of 
the age of Diocletian. Procopius, Bell. Yand. 1, 11, p. 361 T£d£cov, 
brother of Gelimer. Bell. Pers. p. 78, 10 ol T£avol, an Asiatic people. 

The Latin ti before a vowel began to be pronounced like TZI about 
the sixth century. Thus, Theophanes, pp. 451 Aufxevr^ioXos, 454 
Ao/xez/r^t'a, Domentia (A. D. 599). Compare Isidorus, 1, 26, 28. 
YetZ Uteris sola Grseca nomina scribuntur. Nam cum justitia sonum 
Z literae exprimat, tamen quia Latinum est, per T scribendum est, 
sicut militia, malUia, neguitia, et cetera similia. Malalas has Beve- 
r£ia, for Venetia (p. 176). 

The Latin C retained its ancient power as late as the same century. 
Thus, John Lydus writes fxayicnres for mancipes (p. 69, 16), 
7rappiKidas for parricidas (p. 141, 13), (paicirjs for facies (p. 145, 
3). The sounds now given to it by the Italians and Germans, when 
it stands before e or i, seem to be recognized by Porphyrogenitus. 
Thus (De Adm. p. 125), he writes T£i/3tra No,8a, for Civita Nova. 
He remarks also (De Them. p. 32) that the Latin r^alo-ai (v. 1. 
r^eVe) is equivalent to the Greek dvarofiT], where the true reading 
seems to be rCaicno, caesio. 

requires the mouth to be rounded as in blowing 
moderately. The English f, that is, the letter 
which comes nearest to it, is formed by pressing 
the upper teeth against the lower lip. (Compare 

Represented by ph or f ; as e^aya, cphagJia, 
fypovTi^w, phrontizo, evfypalvoo, ej)hphreno. 



the aspirate of K, is sounded like the German ch, 
or the Spanish j. Represented by kh ; as %ao?, 
khaOS, XP° V0(; i khronOS, avyx vaL S> Sinkhisis, evairXay- 

%i>o?, ephsplankhnos. 

like IIS. ."Represented by ps ; as a^ro?, dpsitos, 

TJrrpjQ), pshlO. 



14 ACCENTS. 

After M, it is sounded like bs ; as e^u^o?, em- 
bsikhos. (See U, above.) 

4. Pronunciation of the Breathings. 

The smooth breathing is a weak consonant, hay- 
ing A for its kindred vowel ; that is, it is to A 
what y in ye is to e in the same word. 

In classical Greek the rough breathing corre- 
sponds to h. In Modern Greek it does not differ 
from the smooth; as al/jua, "EXkTjves, pronounced 
€fia, E\i,ve<>. 

ACCENTS. 



1. The acute accent is specifically (not merely 
generically) the same as the English acute; as 

prjrcop, ritor, TjOe%<», trtkllO, aOeos, CltllCOS, avdpcDTros, 

anthropos, Kaico?, kakos. 

The grave is the same as the acute, though 
somewhat weaker ; as kclXos avOpooiros, kalbs dn- 
thropos. 

In Modern Greek the circumflex cannot be dis- 
tinguished from the acute, all the modern vowel- 
sounds being isochronous ; thus, AraXw?, r^tf}, ^ovcra 
are sounded «a\o?, njul, p,ovaa. 

The circumflex inflection, however, is heard in 
the diphthongal sounds a'C, ao, aov, el', o'C, ovi', when 
the stress falls upon the first element (§ 2, 2) ; as 
fid'iva, maina, ^dchw, khaidho, irekdov, pelau, Xeec, 
lei, aoi, soi, ydi'Sapo?, ghdidharos. 

As quantity is not recognized in Modern Greek, 
a proparoxytone admits of ending in a syllable 



ACCENTS. 15 

which in classical Greek would be long. For ex- 
amples, see nouns, adjectives, and verbs, below. 

Such forms as Koviaprj^;, Koiuacre, errrcaaa, efipaSeiacre, 
eXoytaaa, eXoyapiacra, with the accent on the fourth 
syllable from the end, are not exceptions to the 
general rule, since the antepenult is contracted, 
by synizesis, with the penult. 

Enclitics. 

2. An enclitic is a word, which, in respect of 
accent, is pronounced as if it were an integral part 
of the preceding word. 

The most striking enclitics are the personal 
pronouns /jlov, /ue, /xa?, aov, ere, «ja?, and all the parts 
of tos ; as Sdere jjlov, KTvir^ae tov, Trpdyfxd tov. 

Proclitics. 

3. A proclitic is a word, which, in respect of 
accent, is pronounced as if it were an integral part 
of the word before which it stands. The proclit- 
ics are, — 

(1) The article; as 6 dvOpwrros, tov dvOpwirov, 
pronounced 6dv6pco7ros, TovavOpOTrov. 

(2) The pronouns /jlov, fie, /-ta?, aov, ere, era?, and 
all the parts of tos, except the nominative and the 
genitive plural tu>v ; as jjlov ypdfai, eras etira, pro- 
nounced /Jiovypd(f)ec aaerelira. 

(3) The particle vd ; as vd e^G), vd tov efiXeira, 
pronounced zW^g), vaTove/3\e7ra. 

(4) The relative adverb or pronoun ttov or oirov ; 
as etcei 7rov rpayovhovera, avrov ttov 7ra?, pronounced 
tKel 7rovTpayov$ovo~a, avrov iroviras. 

(5) The auxiliary verb 6d or 6e; as 6d ypdfco, 
6d eypa<f)a, pronounced Oaypd^co, daeypacjya. 



16 SYNIZESIS. 



(6) The prepositions ; as diro tovtov, eU iaeva, 
pronounced clttotovtov, elcrecreva. 

(7) The conjunctions /cal, av; as /cat tovto, av 
top IBco, pronounced kcutovto, (IvtovcBco. 



SYNIZESIS. 

§4. 

1. When, in the same word or two contiguous 
words, a front- vowel is followed by a back-vowel 
(§ 2, 1), these two vowels admit of being uttered in 
one syllable, if the former is changed, in pronun- 
ciation, into its corresponding consonant or breath- 
ing. (History of the Greek Alph. §§ 22, 23.) 

Thus, if the combinations IE, lA^IO, IOT, EA, 
EO, OA, OTE, OTO, OTA, are each to be contract- 
ed into one syllable, the first element (I, E, O, OT) 
is changed, in pronunciation, into its correspond- 
ing consonant. 

These combinations are not diphthongs ; for a 
consonant and a vowel do not constitute a diph- 
thong, in the ordinary sense of the term. Thus, hi 
at, pronounced aye, eye, both elements are vowels; 
but in ca, sounded ya, only the second is a vowel. 

When the first vowel is accented, the accent, in 
case of synizesis, is heard on the second; as in 
Kpovcoy clkov(o, o-ovj3\eav. And if the first element is 
I accented, the accent is usually (not always) writ- 
ten on the second ; as in /capSid, dfyevTeid, for tcaphla, 
dcpevrela. 

Kal Kpovco aovfiXeav to %e'/H fiov teal SieftTjv aireiceWev. 

Kai T60)<? OKCLTTOV 7]Up7]/Ca KCIV TOpVeaUfCLV KCL7T0V. 

X^I^cllvel 6 0eo?, o-rjjjLalv i] yrj, arjfjLatvovv tcl eirovpavia. 



SYNIZESIS. 17 

" Ayie Tewpyi d(f>evrr} fiov, ctt pai ion t] KaftaXkdpi. 

Kal [Aid €OpT7], jULLCL KVpia/CT] KCLl fJLld Xa/jLTTpT) ?]fJL€pa. 

Aeovrapofcapho to arrjdo^ tcaQevo^ aas a? <^avrj. 

Me yepdvTicraa firjrepa Kau fie avrfkiica iraihta. 

Kal KciOovvrav '? to gttiti tov, fca/co $€v er^e 6 vov$ tov. 

Elirdv fie, Md6e Oirirtavov, irelvav ovhev <f)o/3aaai,. 

IV a avoiya to ap/uaptv /nov va to ppiaica ye/uaTov. 

aya va fjbaoco ypa/afiaTa, Taya va £a> air e/cecva. 
Mtd Xvyrjprj /3aptd appcoaTa yid evos ayovpov dydirr). 

X T7]v ' Ecfrecro eirrjyave, /cac atyov 6 aSepcfros ytaTpevdr}. 
K ol okToj ahep<j>OL Bev r)6e\av icai o KcocrTavTivos OeXei, 

Akovco fcovcpia Ta Tovcfiefcca, a/covco o-fAi^ifio GTraOiwv. 

2. Peculiarities of I in case of Synizesis. 

(1)1, after K, t, X, Z, A, M, IV, P, X, H, W, in case 
of synizesis, is a weak y consonantal ; as in yjrapd/aa, 
\dyca, Tayid, ftovtya, irovXia, iravta, /caXdyprja, Kpacriov, 
fieTa^iou, ya-tyia. 

(2) IT, in case of synizesis, does not differ es- 
sentially from I consonantal, that is, y in ye, yarn, 
yet, you ; as in \6yia, naivovpyios, ayia. Conse- 
quently, this combination is regarded as the repre- 
sentative of I consonantal. Thus, IA, 10, IOT 
can be written also VIA, TIO, TIOT. 

(3) XI, when pronounced by synizesis, is not 
unlike h, followed by a weak y consonantal; as 
Tayid, tahyd. This being the case, XI is regarded 
as the representative of the sound hy. 

(4) NI, before a vowel-sound, in case of synize- 
sis is sounded like ni in onion, opinion (§ 2, 3) ; 
as (frovias, phohds, ovpdvios, urdnOS, yKp€jJbVieTai y gre- 
mnete. 

(5) PI, when it stands between two vowels, is 
sounded like PIT, TI being the representative of 

2* 



18 ELISION. 

y consonantal ; as /caOdpia, Orjpid, pronounced xaOdp- 
yca, 07)pyio. 

(6) I, at the beginning of a word, or after a 
vowel, or after B, A, Mil, NT, in case of synizesis, 
has the sound of I consonantal, which sound can 
be represented by TI; as iarpos, va\i, fiid, /capSid, 

Kovpmidy dfevreid, -x/rin^o-uto?, pronounced ytarpos, 
yvaXi, (3yio, naphyia, (cov/juryta, afavryeid, tyvy/oyvios. 

(§ 4, 2, 2.) 

As r before E or I does not differ essentially 
from I consonantal, it can take the place of TI 
before these vowel-sounds ; thus, lepdia, if a trisyl- 
lable, admits of being written yepdta. 

(7) I, after T, 6>, IT, $, in the same word, in 
case of synizesis, is not unlike a weak y consonan- 
tal preceded by A, which combination can be ex- 
pressed by XI (§ 4, 2, 3) ; as (pcond, Oetdfa, iridvw, 
kov </uo?, pronounced ^cor^ta, B^ecdc^i, ir^tava), Kovcfrxios. 

At the end of a word, J, in this case, is equiva- 
lent to a weak y consonantal ; and before E or I, 
it may be omitted in pronunciation ; as, 

Md t i eyet 6 irpcoTOfjudcnopa^ k elv erari ^oXiaapuevo^ ; 
Ti oXov rov koctjulo dvdyvpa kclI tIttot6<; Sev rjvpa. 
T l elv 6 «%o? 7rov yevercu k r) Tapayj] rj fxeyaXr) ; 
X Triv"E<f>eao eyvpiare vd yiarpevOfj rj irXrjy^ tov. 



ELISION. 

§5. 

1. When a word ends in an accented vowel- 
sound, and the next word begins with the same 
vowel-sound, the latter sound admits, especially 
in poetry, of being dropped in pronunciation (and 



ELISION. 19 

even in writing). If the second sound also is ac- 
cented, it makes no difference which one is omitted 
in pronunciation ; as, 

* Apya vtvctov, apya aXXa^e, apya va 7ra? 5 to ybo/xa. 
Kal t)vb <nra6ia acrrjfjuevia yia tov iroXefMO. 
Jtrj/covovfAcu ttoXv ra^ca, Bvo cope? oacrov va (pe^rj. 

2. Kal, and, before the vowel-sounds E, I, admits 
of dropping the ac ; as k eyw, k rjKOvaa, for Kal eyco, 
teal r/Kovo-a. Before A, O, OT, it regularly coalesces 
with these sounds (§§ 4, 1 : 2, 2) ; as, 

Kal BlBco to kol dyopacra crov/3Xbv arro Tcrayyapiv. 
0\a tol /cao~Tpr] irarrjae Kal bXa ra fiovaorrripia. 
Tl e^et?, /3pe yepaXacpe, Kal ovXo KXalv to. fiarta crov ; 

Most commonly, however, Kal is sounded like KI 
before A, O, OT, and is usually written el. But 
since, in Romaic, H is equivalent to I, it is more 
correct to adopt its later Bceotic form ktj. Thus, 
kt) avTos, kt) o7roLos, kt) ovXo, for the unauthorized 

kI aVTOS, Kb OTTObOS, Kb OvXo. (§ 7, 5, 2.) 

3. The pronouns /aov, crov, tov, wov or ottov, the 
article tov, and the verb elve, often elide the vowel- 
sounds even before a consonant; as, 

Tpafta, Ka\e /jl , rrjv aXvcro, Tpa(3a tj]v aXvcrlBa. 

Aev cr to "ira, Arjfio, fiba <f)opa, Bev cr to ira rpet? Kal 

7T6VT6. 

Kab irbaveb k evav ^covTavo, cneXveb T Tbovcrov(f) Apairr]. 

4. The verbal endings -y and -e of the aorist sub- 
junctive and imperative, active, are often elided be- 
fore the articles or pronouns to, tov, to,, tovs, re? ; as, 

Kat payjre to TrapaXvfiav, eirap to pa-^nfAov crov. 
To irobo va, prj^rj tt) /3po^r], to irobb va pr\1~ to ybovb. 



20 CONTRACTION. 

Kat, coaov v avoi% ttjv nropra t?7? e^ejBye r) "tyvyy) rr}<;. 
ByaX tcl tcl paaa, yovp,eve, fiyaXe to TriTpa%Tiki. 

5. The same remark applies also to dirdvco, Kara, 
pecra, in the combinations dirdv '?, kclt \, pea \, 
followed by the articles to, tov, tov, ttjv, tovs, tU, 
tcl ; as airav 9 to o~Tpcop,a, kclt 9 tcl irevTe ftCkatTia, 

/ J > v / 

p,€0- 9 TO aiTLTV. 

6. The adverb p,6vo, for p,ovov, often loses its 
final o; as, 

Mov GTetXTe Xoyo 9 tt) $paytcia va ' pOovve Tpcd KapajBua. 

7. The preposition dird often drops the o before 
the forms of the article beginning with t ; as <z7r' 
T^9 flpvais to vepo, air ttjv ap^rjv, air tcl kokoXcz fiyaX- 

pL€V7]. 

CONTRACTION. 

§©. 

1. When the articles to, tov, t«, the pronouns p,ov, 
(tov, tov, to, tcl, the adverb or pronoun ttov or 6-rrov, 
the auxiliary 6d, the particle va, and some other 
words, are followed by a vowel, a contraction takes 
place, according to the following examples : — 

ra aXoya contracted rtiXoya commonly written r akoya 

va eiTrjj ; vaTvfi • va '7777 

va. r)v€ face va. Ve 

to. ovofiara ravofiara ra vofiara 

to aXoyo raXoyo r aXoyo 

to e'Xeya ToXeya to 'Xeya 

to etna ■ — Ton a to na 

tov ovpavov • '■ Tovpavov r ovpavov 

fiov eXeye povXeye pov 'Xe-ye 

floC €17T€ fXOV7T€ flOV Vff 

2. II ov or ottov, before e, in this case usually 



COMMUTATION OF LETTERS. 21 

becomes iro or otto ; as irov €%<w, 7ro^co, jro yea ; ttov 

€pX 6Tat "> rTro PX^ Tai '> ' iro PX €Tai " 

3. For contract verbs, see below. 



COMMUTATION OF LETTERS. 

§ 7. 

1. Commutation of A, E. 

1 ' Appa^oavid^co appe/3a)i>ia£co, (3aXdvi /SeAaw, Kpdfiaros Kpeftdrt., pdcpa- 
vos pendvii rdXapos raXepi. 

'E-yyi£a> cryyt'£<u, i'yyovos dyyovi, iXecpdvrivos dXecpavTivos, ipya- 
arrjpLOV dpyaaTrjpi, epooTaJ dpooTai^ rinoTe tittoto, tpfioXr) a/x7rdAt, 
vecpeXrj i>e(pa\o, impaired Tvaparoa. 

2. Commutation of A, O. 

'Opdi>G> dpoi>a>, oppid appidi, 6ppa66s app,adt.d, opepapos dpepapos, 
SXoKXrjpos aXaKepos-, dpaXoyelou dvaXayeios. 

3. Commutation of A, AI. 

Tdbapos yat'Sapo?, Kapa tcd'tpa, Kapos Ka'ipos, Kapevos Ka'ipepos, KeXa- 
§<5 KeXa'ibci), icXdp.a. KAai'pa, ^aSeuco ^aVSeuw, x^®* X a '^/*° y » x a H-* vos 
Xa'ipevos. 

4. Commutation of E, O. 

'E(3paios 'OftprjoS) e£co o£ou, epprjpevat opprjpevco, cvmipos oCpKaipos^ 
Zpopcpos opopepos. 

"OXvpnos *F.Xvp7TOS) oyp-e cN/z-e, ttovtvotc itovitera. 

5. Commutation of E, I. 

HepovL 7Ttpovvi, errpeepco (rrpi(pa), raeKovpi rcriKovpi. 
HinTO) 7re'(pTa>, crti'Sdi'i aevrovi. 

Kr]pi Kepi, prjpi p(pi, Qrjpio Oepio. aTrjKca crreKco, £r)pos £epos, vyirjpos 
yiepo? yepd?, cridrjpos aibepov, p-qrivt] percrLvr), arjiropai aeTropat. 

Tvouta yepveo, avpw aepvai, tevpd fcepa, 7rAvJ>a) 7rAei>a>, pixpvPCD piKpevco. 
Mdyeipos pdyepus, Ct COOK. 



22 COMMUTATION OF LETTERS. 

(1) Before a vowel, E is regularly changed into I ; as pr/Xea, 

[xrfkid, crvKea crvKid, j3apea fiapid, irXiov ttXio. 

(2) When AI (sounded E) is changed into the sound I, it is 
more correct to represent the latter sound by 77, after the anal- 
ogy of the later Boeotic dialect ; which orthography satisfies the 
classical eye without offending the modern ear; as alpa rjpa, 

copalos aipr/os, 'Ipvpvaios Spvpvrjos. (See also § 5, 2.) 

'Efipaios 'Ofiprjos. So the article fj for al. 

6. Commutation of OT, I. 

KivS) kovi/q), 7rp1va.pt. rrovpvapi, nXe^ida TrXe^ovda. 

ZrfXevco £btiXeua>, (rrjTria crouma, (prjicdpi ayovmpi, (pdcrrjXos (pacrovXi, 
(prjplfa <povp.i£a>) arjo-apiov aovadpi. 

'AyicvXos dyKovXa, ayKvpa ayizovpa, (Spvaivia (Spovvid) rvKavr] dov- 
Kavrj, kvXXos kovXXos, KoXXvpa KoXXovpa, pvo~Ta£ povaraKi, pvKavrj 
povicdvr), (tkvXos o-kovXos, avpi£a> aovpi£co, avpai aoi/pvco, avcpap aovcppa, 
(TTVTrelov <ttovttl, arvpa^ arovpam, toXvttt) TovXovira, Tvpiravov rovp- 
ttclvov, rpvna rpovTra. , In words of this description, the sound OY 
may possibly be a relic of the ancient pronunciation of Y. 

UpoUa irpovKa, dowry, from the classical irpol^ irpoiKos. 

7. Commutation of 'IT, B, #, M, T (consonantal). 

II , B . "Apa\jf *Apa(3os 'ApaVris, Apaftla Aparrta, kotttco K07rr)vcu 
Koftaj. 

B , <£ . 'AXeicpco aXei/3cD, (3Xt)(tkovvi (pX-qaKovvi. 
II , $ . Td(pavos peirdvi, koXttos Kopcpos. 
B , M . Mv£dco /3u£aVa>, XV M axvftaSa* 

(1) n before T is regularly changed into $ ; as pdnrco pdcprto, 

KOTTTCO KO(pT<D, (TKaTTTOJ (TKaCpTCO, TpiTTTrjS Tpi(pTT)S. 

(2) B after M regularly becomes n, pronounced b (§ 2, 3, n) ; 
as yapfipos yaprrpos, ipfiaivco ipTTalvco, accumbo aKKovpfico aKKovpnco. 

(3) Y, in the diphthongs AY, EY (now pronounced a/3, e/3, or 
a</>, e</>), has all the properties of B and $. 

Kavcris Kcr^a, e<avcra eKayj/a, cKXavaa e/cXa^a, e^acriXevaa e/3a(riXrv^a, 
eXevcris eXe\|a, dovXevcris dovXe^i, 'EXev(riva Ae^lva. 

'EXawxo Xdpva>, cvvoaros epvucxTos, evvovx os p-uov^os or /xowoi^os, 
after the analogy of aep.vos from o-e(3opai. 

Nevo yvecpco, analogous (SXrjXM PXtjctkovpi cpXrjo-KOVVi. 

(4) When EY loses its first letter, B or $ is used for Y in 
order to preserve the true pronunciation. 

EvayyeXiov /3ayyeAto, evyevqs fiycvrjs, evXoyi'a /3Xoyid, ivplcTKco 
/3pto"/<a), 7rpo evodeoi 7rpo/3oSco, €v6r)vos (pOrjvos (prrjvos, cvKaipovu) <pKai- 
povo), evOeidfa (preidvoi (pKeidvcOy to. ci^oi/rai rd 'cp^oiaat. 



COMMUTATION OF LETTERS. 23 

So when e becomes o ; evKaipos o<pKaipos, empty. 

(0) Av6evTf]s, master, pronounced dcpOeprrjs, becomes d<pevrr]s. 

8. Commutation o/T, A, 0, Z, 5. 

T, G. ScortKa crcodiKa, /3arpa^oy fiadpaxds j3a.6pa.ic6s, dvTifioXrj 
ddifioXf), enddio-a eKaraa or eKdraa. 

T , A . "Ybvov vrvov, TVKavt] dovKavrj, arpaKTos ddpdxrc, to£ov 
86£a bo£dpi, apKTos dpKovba. 

A , Z . 'Opddi, pa£l, Trohewv pTrov^ovvas pTvov^ovvi. 

2 , Z . 2d<xapov (dxapi, o~6yxos £oxos C°X^P 1 ' 

T , 2 . TevrXov aev<Xov o-earnXov, beet. 

(1) e after 2, <£, X, is regularly changed into T; aKovo-OrjKa 

tUKovo-rriKa., eXovadrjv eXovo~TT]v, eo~x'- 'Q r l Ka eaKiaTTjKa : <p6dva> cprdva), 
€ypdcp6r]Ka eypdcpTTjKa : e^Oes tyres, tyOpos oxrpos, pox&f]pov povxrepov. 
So €K.av8r]K.a eicavTrjKa, eXevdepos eXevrepos (§ 7, 7, 3). 

(2) A after N is regularly changed into T, pronounced like d 

(§ 2, 3) ; as bevdpov hevrpov, evdvvco evrvvco vtvvco, avbpas avrpas, 
V7rav8peva> navrpeixo, pavbvas pavri. 

9. Commutation of T, 6, Z, 2, K, $K, T2. 

T , K . TevrXov o-eanXov, dvrXia dyicXid, (pretdvco (pKeidva, (prvdpi 

(pKVapL, OTtX/3oQ) 0"kAi/36cO. 

T , T 2 . Tayyos raayyos, KXrjparis KXrjparidos KXr)paTo~i8a, pryrivr) 
peraivr]. 

, T 2 . 'AmvBoxoipos o-Kavrcroxoipos or ayavro-oxoipos. 

Z , T 2 • Ziyylfiipis To-ivrcrifiepis, £i£v(pos To-ivravcpov. 

2, T2. 2v<pap To-vna, adyapis securis To~eKovpi> o-iXr}7ropda> 
TaiXrjTrovpdco, cricpXos ralpnXa, situla Tcnrovpa, SUgo tctov£g), ser- 
vulus To-ep(3ovXi, sergia (Italian) raepya. 

2 K , T 2 . UecrKos nerai, o-Kipos ralpos. 

10. Commutation of K, T, X. 

K , r . "Oprvf; opTvyos oprvKi, SiaKopigco diayovpifa, eicdepco yBep- 
vco, €k8vco yftvvco, enXvoo yXvco, koXlkl KaXiyi, Kapis yaplba, Karos 
ydros, icXvo~Tr)p yXvorrjpi, Ka>(3ios yovftios, o~KavTo~6xotpos cryavTcroxoipos. 

K , X . AeiKvvpi 8eixvu>, Sicokco ftidoxvco, Kdnrco ^a^roj, X°P$V «6p8a, 
Kapxr](riov Kapiceo-i. 

r , X . Tlaiyv'181 iraixvihi, pr\yvvpi prjx va> ' 

(1) K before T is regularly changed into X ; as Krkvi x T * v h 

prjKTOs prjxros. 



24 ADDITION AND OMISSION OF LETTERS. 

(2) X after 2 is changed into K ; as aKifa, axoXelop o-*oXei6, 
(rxoXrj (tkoXtj^ (TKokaa-fia. 

11. Commutation of B, T, A. 

B , r . BXeVco yk€7Toc>, fiXecpapop yXe(papop, fiovna yovna, aovfiXa 
trovyXa, KaXiyopai KaXi(36pa>. 

B , A . Kovpddi Kovvdfii, from the classical Kipados. 

12. Commutation of O, $, X. 

, $ . 'ApapidprjTos dpicpvrjros, vrdOpr) a-Ta^vrj, 0r]Kapi cprjicdpi 
(povKapi, BpLaaa (pplacra. 
, X . "A.xva a0i/r). 
$ , X . &ox>XTa x°t' ( P Ta '> XfiX 40 yAei^G). 

13. Commutation of A, M, IV, P. 

A , N . 'AinxpavTrjS dXvtpaprrjs aXvcpavrdicos. 

A , P . 'AdeXifios dftepcpos, dpeXyco dppeyco, dXpvpos dppvpos, 
ftaXfjapos (3dp<ra.poS) (3oXj36s (3opj36s, BovXyapos Bovpyaprjs, eXBelp 
epdovpai rjpOa, koXttos icopcpos, (TKaXpos <TK.app.6s. 

"Aporpov dXerpi, dxpds o^XaSa, iyp-qyopd>s oyXrjyopos^ Kpocraoi kXo<t- 
aia, Kprjcrdpa KX-qcrdpa Kvqo-dpa, 7rpwpa TrXcpp-q. 

M , N . i Apapldpr]TOs dpi(pvr)TOS, arddpr] crTaffivT]. 



ADDITION AND OMISSION OF LETTERS. 

§ 8. 
1. A prefixed. 

Bao-Kcilvco dfiao-Kaivo), /38e'XXu d/38eXXa, (3pdfivXov dfSpdp.r)Xov, (3pva>- 
via dftpowid, Kivdpa dyKivdpa, and many others. 

Before a vowel, this prefix becomes dp- ; dyaXXidopat dvayaX- 
Aia'£a>, alwpios dpaiojpios, dpaios dpdprjos, dpTpapifa dpaPTpapifa, v<pap- 
ttjs dpvfpaPTrjS. 

2. A omitted. 

'ApvydaXop p,vydaXop, dvraKos araKos, dgovyyi $ovyyi, and a few 
others. 

3. E prefixed. 

2e f'cre eVeVa, tovtos ctovtos, tots cYJre, re'rotos eYcrotor, pi£iKov 
epi£iKop. 



ADDITION AND OMISSION OF LETTERS. 25 



4. E annexed. 

(1) E is often annexed to words ending in N ; as ypdepow ypd- 

epovve, eXeyav iXeyave, 7rai§io)i> 7rcudia>z/e, ierevav ierivave, ypap.p.ivov 
ypafXfxevove. 

(2) Particularly rov, ttjv, p.ds, eras, rods, before a consonant, 
very often take this suffix, which is usually written as if it be- 
longed to the next word ; as rov iridvei, rove iridvei, rov etndvei ; 
eras yXerrcd, erase yXeVco, eras eyXiirco ; rovs Krv7rdei, rovse KTVTrdei, 
rovs iKTvivdei. 

5. E omitted from the beginning of a word. 

'E/cSepoj y8epi>a>, €k8vvco ybvvco, irraipveo 7raipvoz>, epcorco peorw, eprjfxla 
pr]nid, kerrid ernd, and many others. 

6. AT, ET, before M. 
Before M, these diphthongs drop the Y ; as Kadfia Kapa, Kavp.evos 

Kap.evos, nXavpLa icXdp.a, yevp,a yep.a, evfiopcpos efxopcpos^ ^/evfia ijf€p.a, 
Traidevpevos irai8ep.evos. 

7. O prefixed. 

Aelva 6h)e1va, yia oyict, kcittolos oklittoios, Kairoeros OKaTToeros, Karrov 

OKUTVOV, KUTl OKCITI, v6o~np,OS 6v6o~Tip,OS) 7TOV OTTOV. 

8. O omitted from the beginning of words. 

'OXiyos Xiyos, 6p,iXco p.tXa>, ovop.a vop.aroi, oeriririov enriri. 

9. T prefixed. 

Alp,a yalp-a, XvKocpcos yXvKoepeyyei yXvKoxapdgei, \ana> yXaKeb, Xet^a) 
yXetcpco, vfjdoi yvedco^ vevco yveepco, u r n a yovpva, ovXa yovXia. 

10. T inserted. 

Aepas'dyepas, oXierOrjpos ayXiorpco, acopos ciyovpos, evavrlos dyvdv- 
rios, bov ovov avyapid, wov avyov, evvoia eyvoia, p,vta p.v7ya, ervvveebov 
ervyveebov, rvpavvos rvpayvos, fieXeos p.eXeyos, erep.l8a\is erepuyddXi, 7m- 
Xaios 7ra.Xat.y6s- 

In verbs r is inserted before w when this ending is preceded 
o 



26 ADDITION AND OMISSION OF LETTERS. 

by a VOWel, or by the Sound B ; 7repvda> Trtpvdyco, aicove* aKovycO) 
Kaico Kaiyco, p.€Tavoa> p,€Tavoy£>, Tpifico Tpifiya), yvpeva yvpevyoo. 

11. r omitted. 

Aeyta Xeeo, \ayrjvt \arjvi, pvpohoyi pvpokoi, 7rpo(r(payi 7rpoo~cf)d'i, cra- 
yiTTa craiTTa, rayifa rai^oo, rpayco rpaxo, cpv\dya> cpvXdco^ and some 
others. 

It is regularly omitted before M ; as irpaypa Trpdp.a, Tayp,a Tapa, 
a(paypevos acpapevos. 

12. T nasal inserted. 

*A.Kavda dyicddt, d<[s dyKida, Kivdpa dyKivdpa, p,vpp.rj£ pvpp.r}yKi, ap,l- 
\a£ crp-ikdyKa. 

13. T nasal omitted. 

r nasal is regularly omitted before X ; as eyx^ vs X*^ L > ™yxP 0S 

K-tXPh pe^dyxpovs p-eXaxpivo;;, (Tvy\oipu> cri^copco. 

14. N omitted. 

(1) N before is usually omitted ; avOos adds, ai/n/3oXr; dBifioXr), 

KokoKvvOr} KokoKvOi, ityivdos d^n&id. 

So in the aorist passive of verbs ; epapdvdrjv p.apddr)Ka, iinK.pdv6rjp 

iiVLKpdOrjKa. 

(2) In nouns and adjectives, the endings av, ev, rjv, iv, ov, w, ow 
regularly drop the N. For examples, see below. 

(3) Particularly, the articles tov, ttjv, and the negative SeV, 
omit the N before a semivowel (B, r, A, z, A, M, N, P), or as- 
pirate (0, <E>, X) ; as to /3acriXta, to yepovTa, to Xaipd, de 6e\w, Trj 
(pvXaKr]. 

15. N annexed. 

N is annexed to the second and third persons singular, and to 
all the persons of the plural, of the imperfect passive. See the 
jDaradigm. 

16. N prefixed. 

The ignorant, imagining that the N of the article, in expres- 
sions like the following, belonged to the noun, have formed a 



ADDITION AND OMISSION OF LETTERS. 27 

number of curious words. Thus, from rfju Alvov, Trjv"lov, rfjv Tr)~ 
vov, rqv "Ybpav, tou ol<oKvpiv, top vttvov, rov eofiov, they have made fj 
NaZi>o, t) Nio, f) Nr^i/o, fj NuSpa, 6 voLKOKvpis, 6 vinrvos, 6 va>pos. 
Also 6 yKpepvos, from rov Kprjpvov, by substituting T nasal for N. 

On the other hand, confounding the initial N with that of the 
article, they changed Ndgos, NavnaKTos, into 'A^a, "Ettclxtos. 

The Italian names Negroponte and Stalimni or Stalimeni 
owe their existence to the expressions ttjv "Eypnro, '$• rrj Arjfivo. 

The illiterate say '$• ttjv ndAi, \ ttjv K£>, for Els rf]v TLokiv, to the 
City, that is, Constantinople, els rfjv K&>, to Cos. The Turks, sup- 
posing that els and rqu were parts of the noun, have made 2rap,- 
irovX or 2ra/i7rdA, Stambul or Stambol, 2ravKi6'i, Stankioi. Also 
j I£Wk, Iznik, from els NUaiav. 

17. N inserted. 

When MI, followed by a vowel, is to be pronounced by syni- 
zesis, it becomes MNI ; as pia p,vid, Qvp,ios Qvpvios, Foopaios Vcoprjos 
Fcopvrjds. 

18. IT inserted. 

When MA would arise from syncope, the labial n (pronounced 
b, § 2, 3,^1) is inserted betwen M and A ; as Kafie'Xdcpi KapnKdcpi, 

KopoprjXo KOpopiiko, ^a/z^Aos ^a/x^Aos. 

Compare the classical insertion of B in p.ep^ka>Ka, p,ep(3XeTai, 

pecrrjp^pia, yapiipos, apftporoS) rjpfipoTOV, ep.(3pcip.a.i. 

19. S prefixed. 

Kovis (tkovl, Kop(3os dva-(TKovp.Tr6vco, npocoBa) o"7rpa>xi>c«>, TTVpylrr]s 
<nrovpyirr]s, cfAopos acpXopos, TvpTravL^co OTOvp-iravl^co, Kopvbdkos aicop- 
8aX6s, KavOapos (TKadapos, Kap<pos cricdpcprj, Kkrjdpa crK\Tj6pov } KirnToo 

<TKV(pT(d. 



28 NOUNS. 



NOUNS. 

§»• 

1. The Modern Greek has but four cases ; the 
nominative, genitive, accusative, and vocative. 

la certain connections the educated use the classical dative. 
Still it cannot be said to form an essential part of the Modern 
Greek noun. 

2. Masculines end in the sounds AS, ES, IS, 
OS, OTS. Feminines, in the vowel-sounds A, E, I, 
O, OT. Neuters, in A, IN (I), ON (O), OS. 

3. The genitive singular of masculines, except 
those in OS, is formed by dropping the ? of the 
nominative. 

The genitive singular of feminines is formed by 
annexing ? to the nominative. 

4. The accusative singular of masculines and 
feminines, and the neuter endings IN, ON, most 
commonly drop the N. 

5. The nominative, accusative, and vocative 
plural of masculines (except those in OS) end in 
- e? 5 or - 8 e 9 ; of feminines, generally in - e?. 

First Declension. 



1. Masculines in AS, HS. 
Classical. 

S. N. Tabids T€\(DV7)<Z 

G. TafJLLOv(-a) rekwvov 

D. TCLjJLLa T€\(DV7J 

A. 7Cl[liaV T€\(DV7]V 

V. TCLjJUCL T€\(DV7) 



NOUNS. 



29 



S.N. 

G. 

D. 

A. 

V. 
P.N.V. 

G. 

D. 

A. 



P. N. V. rapulao 

G. TdfltCOV 

D. Tallica? 

A. ra/ica? 

Becnrorr)? 
hearrorov 
Secnrory 

he(T7rOT7]V 

Becnrora 
Becnrorai, 

BeCTTTOTCOV 

heairorai? 
Beawora? 



KplT7}<$ 

KpiTOV 

KpiTTj 

KpLT7]V 
t 

fcpira 

KplTCLL 

fCpLTCOV 

KpiTCLlS 

f 
KpLTCL? 



reXcovao 
reXcovcov 
reXcovac? 
reXcova? 

/cXeirrr)? 

tcXeTTTOV 

fcXeirrr] 

K\eiTT7]V 

KXeirra 

fcXeirrai 

tcXeirrcov 

tcXeiTTais 

KXerrra? 



vavTTjs 

/ 
vavrov 

vavry 

vavriqv 

vavra 

vavrai 

vavrcov 

i 
vavrai? 

vavra? 



S.N. 

G. 

A. 

V. 
P.N.A.V. 

G. 



Modern. 

treasurer collector 

rafica? reXcovrj? 

ra/Ma reXcovrj 

ra/Aia(v) reXcovrj^v^ 

rapbca reXcovrj 

rafite? reXcove? 

rajucov, reXcovcov, 

rap,icov reXcovcov 



Nouns like rafilas and TeXavrjs are of rare occurrence in Mod- 
ern Greek. 



S.N. 
G. 
A. 
V. 



judge bishop thief 
Kptrrj? Becnrorr]? KXe<prr]? 
Kpcrrj Bearrorri fcXecprrj 
Kpirv^v} Becrnrorrj^y^ /cXecf)rr)(vJ 
Kpirr) Beairorr] fcXecfrrr) 

N. A. V . KptraBe? BecrTrordBe? /cXecpre? 
G. tcpiraBcov BeairoraBcov nXecf>rcov t 

/cXecfrrcov 
3* 



sailor 

vavrr]? 

vavry 

vavrif]{y) 

vavrrj 

vavre? 

vavrcov, 

vavrcov 



30 



NOUNS. 



Oxytones in rrjs are inflected like npirrjs. Paroxytones in ttjs, 
like icketfiTrjs, if the vowel of the penult is, in classical Greek, 
short ; and like vavrrjs, if the vowel-sound is long by nature. 

A few paroxytones in ttjs are declined like deo-noTrjs ; as acpiv- 
rrjs, iirjrpoT:6\irr]s. 

Note 1. The plural ending -es is borrowed from the third declen- 
sion. 

• The usual, but less analogical, orthography is -at s ; as xapals for ga- 
pe's-. Some write.-ats- in the accusative, and -es in the nominative, 
imagining at the same time that they follow the classical iEolians. 
But as the iEolic ending -ais of the accusative plural arises from -avs 
and corresponds to -ois (arising from -ovs) of the second declension, it 
is obvious that there is no immediate connection between the iEolic 
and modern accusative plural. Further, the iEolic never accents 
nouns on the last syllable. 

(1) Modern 'and foreign names in AX have a'Se? 
in the plural. And if the accent is heard on a?, 
the a is circumflexed. 





doctor 


waiwode 


priest 


S.K 


yovTcras 


/3oi'{3ovTa<; 


iraTras 


G. 


yOVTGd 


{3oi(3ovTa 


iraira 


A. 


yovTaa{y\ 


f3ol'/3ovTa(v^ 


ira7ra(v^ 


V. 


ypvicra 


/3oi'/3ovTa 


iraira 


P.N.A.V. 


yovTcra&es 


{3oi'/3ovTa8e<z 


TTaTrahe*; 


G. 


%0VTcra8cDv 


/3oi/3ovraBcov 


irairaZwv 



In ftoipovras, o'i are pronounced in one syllable (§ 2, 2, Ol). 

. (2) Modern nouns ending in the sound IX are 
commonly written with an y. And if the accent 
is heard on the last syllable, the y is circumflexed. 





butcher 


cadi 


S.N. 


yaaairr]^ 


fcaSfjs 


G. 


^aaairy 


. /caSrj 


A. 


^acrcnT7]{y) 


Kahri(v} 


V. 


^aaairrj 


/ca$7] 


P.N.A.V. 


^aaanrrjhe^ 


fca$r}$€$ 


G. 


^aaainjScov 


fca$7]Scov 



NOUNS. 



31 



Note 2. The endings -ddes, -rjdes, -rjdes are adopted from 
such nouns as \afi7rds \ap7rd8es, evekms eve\7ndes, eXnis e\7ri8es. 

Note 3. The accent of such genitives as reXcovoiv, vavrav, aocpiuv, 
originates in the effort to preserve the tone of the nominative through- 
out. Compare the classical dcpvcov., iTTjal&v, xpjjorcoi/, from dcpvr), irr)- 
alai, xprjo-TTjs. Also, the genitive plural of the feminine of barytone 
adjectives and participles in os. 

(3) Modern masculines in AS, formed by an- 
nexing this ending to the root of nouns of the 
classical third declension, have e? in the plural. 
And when they denote rational beings, they can 
have also JSe?. 

The accusative singular is the same as the clas- 
sical. 

Classical. 



s.x.v. 


Apayjr 


Xapvy£ 


V 

epco? 


G. 


Apaftos 


Xapvyyos 


epGoros 


D. 


Apa(3c 


Xapvyyc 


epoiTt 


A. 


Apa/3a 


Xapvyya 


epcoTa 


P.X.V. 


Apaftes 


Xapvyye? 


3> 

epcores 


G. 


ApaflcDV 


Xapvyycov 


epcorcov 


D. 


Apayjro 


Xapvyyc 


epcoai 


A. 


Apaftas 


Xapvyya? 


epcoras 


S.X.V. 


EXXrjv 


Xifirjv. 


%<iiiLwv 


G. 


EXXijvo? 


Xifievo? 


^eifiwvo? 


D. 


EXXrjvu 


Xl/jlevl 


^eifJiCDVL 


A. 


EXXrjva 


Xifieva 


yei\x(hva 


P.X.V. 


EWrjues 


Xifieve? 


'Xjsifiwves 


G. 


EXXrjvcov 


Xifxevcov 


Vei/jLCOVCDV 


D. 


EWrjat, 


Xi/iecrc 


%eL/JLCD(TC 


A. 


EXXrjva? 


Xifievas 


%et{icova<; 


S. X. V. 


drip 


r)pco<; 


firjv ^ 


G. 


depo<; 


rjpcoos 


flTJVOS 


D. 


5 / 
aepi 


7}p00'C 


fl7]VL 


A. 


5 / 
aepa 


7]pcoa 


pLTjva 



32 


NOUNS. 




P.N.V. 


aepe? 


rjpcoes 


tirjves 


G. 


depcov 


TjpOJCOV 


firjvcov 


D. 


depai 


7]pcoac 


firjal 


A. 


depas 


TjpiDCLS 


fjifjvas 


S.N. 


yiya? 


yepcov 


prjrcop 


G. 


ycyavros 


yepovro? 


prjropo? 


D. 


yiyavTi 


yepovri 


prjropi 


A. 


yiyavra 


yepovra 


prjropa 


V. 


yiyav 


yepov 


prjrop 


P.N.V. 


rylyavres 


yepovre? 


prjropes 


G. 


yiyavrcov 


yepovrwv 


prjTopcov 


D. 


yiyaai 


yepovcL 


prjropac 


A. 


yiyavra^ 


yepovra? 


prjTOpm 


S.N. 


avr\p 


irarrjp 


fiaaiXevs 


G. 


avhpos 


TTCLTpO? 


ftaaiXews 


D. 


avSpl 


irarpi 


ftaaiXel 


A. 


avSpa 


Trarepa 


fiacriXea 


V. 


avep 


irarep 


/3aacXev 


P.N.V. 


av$p€$ 


7T<2Te/36? 


ftacriXa,*; 


G. 


avSpwv 


/ 

nrarepcov 


(BaauXewv 


D. 


avBpd(Ti> 


nrarpacn, 


fiaacXeixrt, 


A. 


dvSpa? 


7ra,Tepa<z 


ftacnXeas, 




Modern 


l inflection. 






Arab 


gullet 


love 


S.N. 


"Apaftas 


Xapvyya? 


epcora? 


G. 


' Apafta 


Xapvyya 


epcora 


A. 


' Apa(3a 


Xapvyya 


epcora 


V. 


' Apaj3a 


Xapvyya. 


€ pear a 


P. N. A. V 


. Apafte? 


Xapvyyes 


epcore? 


G. 


'Apdficov 


Xapvyycov 


epcorcov 







NOUNS. 


6'6 




Greek 


harbor 


winter 


S.N. 


EXXr)va<; 


Xifievas 


'Xeifiwvas 


G. 


EXXrjva 


Xifjbeva 


yeip,<xiva 


A. 


EXXiyva 


Xifieva 


yeiyuwva 


V. 


EXXrjva 


Xifjbeva 


^ec/jicova 


P.N.A.V 


EWrjve? 


Xifjbeves 


Xei/jLcoves 


G. 


EXXrjvcov 


Xifievcov 


^ecfjicdvcov 




air 


hero 


mouth 


B.N. 


aepa? 


rjpcoa? 


/JLr)i>a<; 


G. 


aepa 


7]pcoa 


firjva 


A. 


aepa 


ypcoa 


[Jirjva 


V. 


aepa 


yjpwa 


firjva 


P.N.A.V 


. aepe$ 


r/ 

rjpcoe 1 ? 


pLTjves 


G. 


aepcov 


rjpGXQV 


fl7]V(OV 




giant 


old man 


demon 


S.N. 


yiyavra^ 


yepovra^ 


prjropas 


G. 


ytyavra 


yepovra 


prjropa 


A. 


yiyavra 


yepovra 


prjropa 


V. 


yiyavra 


yepovra 


prjropa 


P.N.A.V 


i 

yiyavre^ 


yepovres 


prjrope? 


G. 


yiyavrcov 


yepovrcov 


pyropcov 




Plural also, 




N.A.V. 


yuyavrdhe^ 


yepovraBes 




G. 


yiyavraScov 


yepovraBcov 






man father 


king 


S.N. 


av$pa$ irarepa<; ftacriXea? {3a<rcXia<; 


G. 


dvSpa irarepa fiaa-iXea 


ftacriXca 


A. 


civBpa irarepa /3aacXea 


fiacnXia 


V. 


avSpa irarepa fiacriXea 


ftaaiXia 


P.N.A.V. 


av$pe<; irarepe<; 


fiaaiXLaSes 


G. 


dvSpcov irarepwv 


fiaaiXia§(i)V 



34 



NOUNS. 



Plural also, 
N. A. V. dvSpaSe? irarepdBes 

G. dvSpdScov irarepdBcov 



2. Feminines in A, H. 



Classical. 



s.ky. 


X apa 


(Tocpca 


aXr)6eia 


G. 


Xapa? 


acxfiia? 


aXTjdecas 


D. 


X a p\ 


(Tocjjta 


aXrjdela 


A. 


%apav 


crofyiav 


a\r)0eiav 


P.N.V. 


Xapal 


cro(f)i,cu 


dk7]Qeiai 


G. 


%apS>v 


(TO'filCOV 


aXrjdeccov 


D. 


Xapcus 


erotica? 


d\7)0ecat<; 


A. 


%apa<i 


co(j>ias 


a\r]0€ia<i 


S.N.V. 


Bot~a 


fjiovad 


6a\aaad 


G. 
D. 




/LL0VG7)<; (' 

/jiovcrr) 


a?) 6a\d(T(T7]<i (-ft?) 
OaXatJcrrj 


A. 


Sogav 


/jbovaav 


Odkaacrav 


P.N.V. 


So£ac 


pbovaat 


6a\acrcrat 


G. 


Bo^(ov 


fjuovacov 


OaXaacTCOv 


D. 


Soljcus 


fJLOVGCLLS 


OaXacrcrcus 


A. 


Sogas 


{lovcra? 


OaXacrcras 


8.N.V. 


Tipr) 


SlfCT) 


jvwfirj 


G. 


TijjbTj*; 


&CK7]$ 


yv<*)/j,r)<; 


D. 


TLflfj 


Sitcr) 


yVCO/uLT] 


A. 


• TlflTjV 


Blfcrjv 


fyvwfiTjv 


P.N.V. 


TI/jLCU 


St,tcai 


yvco/juai, 


G. 


TCJJbCOP 


hiKWV 


yvcoficov 


D. 


rivals 


hiKCUS 


yvco/jiats 


A. 


Tlfia? 


Bc/cas 


yva>fACi$ 







NOUNS. 


&0 






Modern. 




• 


3°y t 


wisdom 


truth 


S.N.V. 


%apa 


crocfica 


dX^Oeta 


G. 


X a P^ 


arotyias 


aXrjOeia^ 


A. 


x a pj( v ) 


ao(j)la(vJ 


akr]6eLa(^v^ 


P.N.A.V. 


yapk 


cro^te? 


a\r)d ei,€<; 


G. 


%ap(0V 


<TO(f)L(DVi 


dXrjOeicoVj 






CO(f>L(OV 


a\r)6eLQ)v 




glory 


muse 


sea 


s. n. v. 


Sofa 


fiovcra 


OdXaaaa 


G. 


Sofa? 


/jLovcra<; 


OaXao-aas 


A. 


$ofa(z/) 


/jbovaa(v^ 


OaXaacrayv) 


P.N.A.V. 


So'fe? 


fiovaes 


OdXacraes 


G. 


So^cov, 


[lovacov, 


OaXacracov, 




Sogcov 


fiovacov 


OaXdaacov 




honor 


trial 


opinion 


S. N. V. 


TL/JbT] 


Blktj 


ryVW/jLT} 


G. 


Tl/jLTJ? 


BlfC7]$ 


yVCDfjLT)? 


A. 


TlflTl(v) 
TI/JL6S 


$lfC7)(v) 


yVC0/jL7}(v) 


P.N.A.V. 


Slfces 


ryvcofies 


G. 


TlflWV 


Sc/ccov 


yVCQfjLCOV 


(1) Modern feminine proparoxyl 


.ones ending in 


the sound I are com 


rnionly written with an 77. 






sugar 




S.N.A.V. 


&X a PV 


P.N.A.V. 


&x a P e *- 


G. 


K^x a P^ 


G. 


^ayapwv 



(2) Modern feminines in -4, formed by annex- 
ing this ending to the root of nouns of the third 
declension, retain the classical inflection in the 
plural ; except that the accusative is like the 
nominative. 



36 



NOUNS. 



The accent of the 


nominative singular is the 


same as that of the classical accusative 


singular. 




Classical. 






S. N. V. 


Xa/jL7Ta<; 


CUj; 


vv% 


xn v /- 


G. 


\a/jL7ra$o<; 


cuyos 


VVKTOS 


XV V0( * 


D. 


XafiTTaSo 


aiyi 


VVKTL 


xnvl 


A. 


Xaparaha 


alya 


Wfcra 


yrjva 


P.N.V. 


Xa^iraSe^ 


alye? 


VVKT6? 


Xfives 


G. 


\ctfjL7ra8cov 


5 ^ 

aiycov 


VVKTtoV 


yrivwv 


D. 


XajJLiraaL 


aigc 


VV%1 


xv™ 


A. 


JiafjLTTaSas 


alyas 1 


'wtcTas 


XVVW 


S.N. 


eXiTis 


opvcs 




prrryp 


G. 


e\7ri8os 


bpviOos 




firjTpos 


D. 


eXwiBt 


OpVlOi 




fJLTjTpi 


A. 


eXircSa 


bpviOa ( 


-IV^ 


firjTepa 


V. 


eX,7rt 


opvi 




fJLrjrep 


P.N.V. 


eXiriBe? 


opviOeq 




fArjre'pes 


G. 


eXwiBcov 


opvlOwv 




fX7]Tep(0V 


R 


eXlTLGL 


OpVKTl 




/jLrjrpacrt 


A. 


ekirihas 


opvida<$ 




firjrepas 




Modern. 






S.N.A.V. 


Xa/niraBa 


aXya 


t'vfcra XV va 


G. 


XajLLTraSas 


auya? 


WKTa<$ XV va< * 


P.KA.V. 


Xa/jL7ra8es 


alyes 


vvkt€<; X^ v€( * 


G. 


Xa/jiiraScov 


aiywv 


VVKT03V yT)VU>V 


S.N.A.V. 


eX7riBa 


bpviQa 




fl7)T€pa 


G. 


eXTriSas 


opviQas 




lirjrepas 


P.N.A.V. 


eXiriSe? 


opvi6e<$ 




Hrjrepes 


G. 


eXTriScov 


opvtOcov 




i 

/U,7)T6pCDl> 



Note 4. Theocritus has alyav (5, 148), as if from rj alya] 
Herodotus, xtAiaSeW (7, 103), as if from 17 X i\ia8a. 

(3) Modern feminines formed from nouns in -t? 
G. ew?, by dropping the 9, are written with an c or 



NOUXS. 



37 



i]. Those from 77? G. ijtos drop the ?; or they 
are inflected like b'pvuOa. 

Classical. 

P.X.A.V. 
G. 
D. 



S.N. 

G. 

D. 

A. 

V. 
S.X.Y. 

G. 

D. 

A. 



Suva/its 

8vva/jL€i, 
Svva/juv 
hvvafJLL 
6eoT7)<; 

OeOTTJTL 

6eoT7]Ta 



hwafAeLS 
hwafjuecov 

hwafAGGL 



P. X. ^ . OeoTTjres 

G. 6€OTT]T(OV 

D. 6e0T7]O-L 

A. 0eOT7)TCL$ 

Modern. 
strength 
S. X. V. hwa/Jii, SvvafZT} P. X.A. ^. 
G. hwafiis;, hvvafjur]<i G. 

A. hvvafii^y^, Svvafirj^v^ 

divinity 
S.X.A.V. 0e&T V , Oeir^ra P. X. A. V. 
G. OeoTTjs, deoTrjTas G. 

(4) Mvtl or /JLVT7}, nose, and ^ap, 
grace, from the classical /jlvtis, *8o?, %«/?£?, tTo?, are 
inflected like hvva^t, hwafirj. 

Second Declension. 

§ «. 

1. Masculines in 02, and Neuters in ON. 
Classical. 



Bvvafiecov 



0eOT7)TCS 
OeOTTjTWV 

or x<*pv-. 



S.N. 


\ayos 


G. 


Xayov 


D. 


Xayco 


A. 


Xayov 


V. 


Xaye 



ITOVO^ 

I 
7T0V0V 

irovw 

7TOVOV 

wove 



OlfCO? 

OLKOV 

V 
OVKO) 

oltcov 
oifce 



Oavaros 

Oavarov 

Oavarq) 

Oavarov 

Oavare 



38 




NOUNS. 






P.N.V. 


Xayot, 


f 

1TOVOI 


OLKOL 


Oavarot 


G. 


Xaywv 


irovcov 


OLKCOV 


Oavarcov 


D. . 


Xayois 


7T0V0l<$ 


OLKOLS 


flavarois 


A. 


Xayovs 


i 
7T0V0VS 


OLKOVS 


Oavarov? 


S.N.A.V. 


kcCKov 


%vXov 


CTVKOV 


bpyavov 


G. 


KOKOV 


%vXov 


ctvkov 


bpyavov 


D. 


icaXco 


IjvXcp 


C"UKCO 


opyavco 


P.N.A.V. 


KcCka 


%vXa 


CTVKO, 


opyava 


G. 


koXcov 


^vXcov 


/ 

OVKCOV 


opyavcov 


D. 


kclXois 


£vXois 
Modern. 


<TVKOl<$ 


opyavoi? 




hare 


pain 


house 


death 


S.N. 


Xayos 


TTOV05 


oitcos 


Qclvcltos 


G. 


Xayov 


/ 
1TOVOV 


OLfCOV 


davarov 


A. 


Xayb(v^ 


ttovo^v^ 


oIko(v) 


6av(no(y) 


V. 


Xaye 


Trove 


ol/ce 


Oavare 


P.N.V. 


Xayot 


TTOVOi 


oifcou 


OaVCLTOl, 

Oavarot 


G. 


Xaycov 


7T0VC0V 


ol/CCOV 


Qavarcov 


A. 


Xayovs 


7T0V0VS 


OLfCOV? 


Qclvcltovs, 

QaVCLTOVS 




good 


wood 


fig 


organ 


S.N.A.V. 


tcaXo^v) 


^vXo^y^j 


GVKo(v^ 


opyavo{y} 


G. 


KaXoV 


tvXov 


CTVKOV 


opydvov, 
bpyavov 


P.N.A.V. 


fcaXa 


%vXa 


av/ca 


bpyava 


G. 


/caXcov 


tjvXcov 


crvfccDV 


opyavcov 



Note 1. The accent of nominatives like Oavdrot is Doric. GitE- 
gorius Corinth. 123, p. 314. 

(1) Proper names and national appellatives in 
02 make the vocative in o ; as 



NOUNS. 



39 



Arjfio?, V. Arjfio, Dhimos 

NikoXos, V. NckoXo, Nicholas 

$pdy/co<;, V. $pdyfco, a Frank 

Tovpfco?, V. Tovpfco, a Turk 

(2) Nouns in 12 (written also H2, as in the 
first declension), I, T, arising from the classical 
102, ION, TON, are inflected as follows : — 







Classical. 




S.N. 


fjLaprios 


P.N.V. 


fxaprtoi, 


G. 


fiapnov 


G. 


fJiapTLCOV 


D. 


fiapri(d 


D. 


fiapriois 


A. 


fJLapTLOV 


A. 


/JLClpTlOVS 


V. 


fjiaprce 






S.KA.V. 


TTCL&lov 


TToBtOV 


Blktvqv 


G. 


7rai8tov 


7ToBlOV 


BlfCTVOV 


D. 


7raiBi(p 


7To8l<p 


hlKTVto 


P.N.A.V. 


7racSca 


7roSca 


BlKTVa 


G. 


iraihcwv 


7To8l(0V 


SlKTVOW 


D. 


iraihiois 


7roSioi<; 


SlfCTVOlS 



S. N. fiapTcs, 

G. fxapTt, fJbapTT) 

A. p,apTi{y), pudpTrj^v) 

V. pudprc, pbapTTj 



Modern. 
March 

fiaprr)^ P. N. A. V. jJLapT'i8e<s,-r}he<s 

G. /JLapT'LBcOV,'7]B(OV 





child 


foot 


net 


S.N.A.V. 
G. 


7raL$L0v 


7roSt(z>) 

7ToStOV 


SiKTVOV 


P.N.A.V. 


trachea 


irohia 


SlKTVa 


G. 


iraihtwv 


TTohiWV 


SlfCTVCOV 



40 



NOUNS. 



The endings are pronounced by synizesis when two vowels 
come together. (§ 4, 2.) 

Note 2. The accent of nouns of this class is the same as that of 
the original form ; as 'Avtoovls, Arjprjrpts, fxa.xa.Lpi, not 'Avraivis, Arjprj- 
rpis, paxaipi. Compare the Doric ibeipav, e<pd^dv, eKoaprjOev, for edet- 
paaav, eKpd^aaav, eKoo-prjdrjo-av. (ApOLLONIUS, de Synt. 3, 7, p. 
213.) Also, the Doric atyes, rraides, yvva'uces, for the original a'lyrjs, 
7rai8r]s, yvvaiKrjs. . (B. A. p. 1236, 3.) 

(3) Verbal nouns in -l/jlov, denoting the action 
of their verbs, follow the analogy of neuters in a 
(§ 12, 3) in the genitive singular, and in all the 
cases of the plural. 

Classical. 

S. 1ST. A. V. jpayjfLfiov P. N. A. V. ypa^ijjia 

G. ypa-^jro/jLou G. jpa^lpucov 

D. ypa^ificp D. jpayjrifMot? 

Modern. 
S.N.A.V. 7P ^o(v) P.N.A.V. 



G. ypayjrifiaro^, 01* Gr. 

ypatyi/jLaTOv 

2. Feminities in OS, S22, &. 
Classical. 



ypayjrl/jiara 
ypayjnfiaTcov 



S.N. 


Afiopyos 


X/o? 


S/cvpos 


Kapvcrro? 


G. 


'Ajiopyov 


Xiov 


Sfcvpov 


Kapvcrrov 


D. 


'Afiopyco 


Xlco 


Xicvpco 


Kapvarco 


A. 


'A/nopyov 


Xtov 


S/cvpov 


Kapvarov 


V. 


'Afiopye 


Xie 


S/cvpe 


Kapvare 




Attic. 


Ionic. 


Doric. 


JEolic. 


S.N. 


ArfTCO 


Arjrco 


Aarco 


Aarco 


G. 


Atjtovs 


'Atjtovs 


Aarco? 


Aarco? (?) 


D. 


Arjrot 


Arjrol 


Aarol 


Aaroi 


A. 


Arjrco 


Ar)TOVV 


Aarcov 


Aarcov 


V. 


Arjrol 


Arjroc 


Aarol 


Aarot (?) 



S.N.V. Ko>5, G. Kco, D. Kco, A. Kco(v). 



NOUNS. 41 

Modern. 
Amorgho Khio SMro Kdristo 
S. N. V. 'Afiopyo Xco Xicvpo Kapvaro 

G. 'A/jLopyos Xios Xicvpos Kapvaros 

A. 'Afiopyd^v) Xlo(v^ Hlfcvpo(v^ Kapvarofv^ 

Leto Marigho Dhespo Khaidho 

8. N. A. V. ArjTco Maptyco Aeairco Xdl'Sco 
G. Atjtg)? Mapcycos Aeanrco? Xdi'Sco? 

S. N. A. V. Ka>, G. Kw?, Co5, an island. 

' The Modern endings occur chiefly in proper 
names. Common substantives belonging here 
have -69 in the plural; as 

chain 
&N.V. dXvcro P.N.A.V. aXvaes 

G. aXuaos G. aXuacov 

A. a\vcro(v) 

So decline 77 a/z/Ao (dfifios), sand, rj o-vvobo (avvodos), meeting. 

Note 3. For nouns like Mapiyco, compare B. nn. 13G5 Eevcos. 
138G 'Ac^poSoos- 1710 NeiKaaais- 1 763 KoWlcttcos • 2481 'A/cevcrcos 1 . 
2554, 55 es Aaron/. R. 81, 15. 18 Aa/zwy, Aa^cdv. 

3. Masculines in OT2, and Feminines in OT. 

Nouns of this class are of modern or foreign 
origin. 





grandfather 


Mokhoghlus 


S.N. 


ircnnrovs 


Mo^oykov? 


G. 


ircnnrov 


Mo%oy\ov 


A. 


iraiTTrovfv^ 


MoftoyXov^v) 


P.N.A.V. 


ircnnrovhes 




G. 


irairirovDaiv 

4.* 





42 NOUNS. 

fox 

S. N. V. dXconrov P. N. A. V. d\(07rovSe<i 

G. aXcDTrovs G. dXco7rovBcov 

A. aX(07rov(v^ 

Note 4. The feminine ending -ov was suggested by the genitive 
of such nouns as A^ro>. 

Third Declension. 

§ i». 

1. In Modern Greek, the nominative of mascu- 
lines of the ancient third declension is formed by- 
annexing AS to the root ; that of feminines, by 
annexing A. The inflection then proceeds as in 
the first declension, which see. 

Note. The classical ending -cov G. ovtos, is, in a few instances, 
changed into -oy. Thus, yepcov, dpaKcov, Xapav, modern yepos, old man, 
dpaKos, dragon, Xdpos, Death. 

So diaKos, deacon, from the mediaeval Siaicwv, for diaKovos. Por- 
phyrogenitus, de Adm. p. 138 dpxt-SiaKOOV. 

Upoeo-Tos, ov, 6, the Christian chief magistrate of a Greek village, 
or the prior of a monastery, for the classical npoeaTais, cotos. 

Keparov, ov, to, horn, from the classical Kepas, aros. 

2. Masculines in HS, IS, TS are, in Modern 
Greek, inflected after the analogy of the first de- 
clension. 

Classical. 

S. 1ST. "Apr]? Ilept.fcXrjs IldpK e AXvs 

G. ' Apeos nepifcXeovs IlapiSos ' AXuos 

D. ' Apei Uepiickel TJapuht ' AXvi', -vi 

A. Apr\(y) TlepLfcXrj, -e'a Uapiv r AXvv 

V. Apes IlepifcXet,? Hapi ° AXv 



NOUNS. 



43 



S.N. 
G.A.V. 



Modern. 
Ares Pericles Paris Halys 

Apr)? UepiKkr)? Uapi<$ ' A\v$ 

' 'Apr) HepLKkr) Ildpc ' A\v 



3. Neuters in A, AS, OS. 



Classical. 



S.N.A.V. 

G. 

D. 
PJ.iV. 

G. 

D. 



Trpay/xa 

7rpd<y/J,a,T0<; 

7rpay/jLarc 

irpaypLCLTa 

irpayfiarcov 

Trpay/jLaai, 



Kpea? 

i 
Kpearog 

Kpeari 

k pear a 

tcpearcov 

Kpeacrc 



yevos 

yevovs 

yevet, 

yevr) 

yevcov 

yeveat, 



Modern. 



S. N A. V. TTpaypbd 

G. irpay/jbarov 

P. N. A. V. TTpayiiara 

. G. rrpayfiaTcov 



fcpea? 

Kpearov 

fcpeara 

i 
tcpearcov 



yevos 

t 
yevovs 

yevr) 

yevcov 



4. Masculines in ES, and Feminines in E. 

All nouns of this description are of foreign 
origin. 





coffee 


Daponte 


S.N. 


/caches 


Aairovres 


G. 


fcacpe 


AairovTe 


A. 

TT 


fcacfiefv} 


AdTTOVTeiv) 


V. 


Kacpe 


Aairovje 


P.N.A.V. 


KCL(f>eSe$ 


AairovreSes 


G. 


Ka<f>eBcov 


AajrovreScov 



44 NOUNS. 

Fatimah 
S.N.V. Qar/te P.N.A.V. QarfieSe? 

G". <£<2Tyl6€? GL ^CLTfJieScOV 

A. $aT{ie(v) 

Proper Names. 

§ IS. 

A proper name can have a regular plural form 
when it designates more than one individual per- 
son ; as 

' * Avavias, AvavU?, Ananias 

XraOas, %Ta6ahe<;, Stath&S 

Tiavvrjs, TLavv7)he$, John 

M7roTcraprj<;, M7roT<rap7]Se<;j Sotsaris 

But when the family, party, or soldiers of a dis- 
tinguished man are spoken of, the plural ends in 
-eot(for the classical adjective ending -tot from 
-£o?), written also -aloe; as 

Taa(3e\as, TaafteXeGi, *$aiv, -eou?, the Tsabhelas 

family, or soldiers of Tsabhelas. 
MTroraapris, M7roT<rapeoi, -eoov, -eou?, the family 01* 

soldiers of Botsaris. 

Note. The plural here regularly corresponds to the classical ol 
dp.(p[ TLva, or ol irepi riva. Thus, ol dpcfn Tlpiapov, rcov 7rep\ Ke/«po7ra, 
rovs dpcpl rbv Kvpov, in Modern Greek would be ol llpiafiioi, ra>v Ke- 

Kp07T€(0V, TOVS KvptOVS. 

Indeclinable Nouns. 

§ I*. 

1. In classical Greek, the names of the letters 
of the alphabet are indeclinable ; as to, tov, to> 

aX(f>a. 



NOUNS. • 45 

In Modern Greek, those ending in a are regular 
feminines; as rj aX<fia, rrj? a\(f)as, r\ aX(/>e?. Except 
to, tov aiy/jia. 

2. All foreign words not Grecized are indeclin- 
able ; as 6 Me^/MET, 6 Ma^ovr nraaas, 6 Ifiep Bpco- 
vrjs, 6 BaaLyfCToov, 6 T/ct^co, 6 £ov/3apo(p. 

Irregular Nouns. 

§ 15. 

1. A few nouns in AS, especially such as are 
derived from the. classical third declension, are in- 
flected, in the plural, after the analogy of the 
second. Their genitive singular ends in a or ov. 

See apxovras, (BpovKoXaKas, yeirovas, yepovras, daipovas, KovaovXas, 
KopciKas, fidyeipas, pdaropas, below. 

Note. Compare the ancient datives, B. n. 1693 ivrvyxavdvTois, 
dyoouots, C. nn. 3 avivioiS' 1G TrcoXeovrois- 30 ovtols. 43 Aa/xt- 
eoLS. 

2. ndiras, the pope, has TraV^Se?, -7]0(ov, in the 
plural; the regular TrairaZe^ belonging to naira^, 
priest. 

r^e'/ca?, a Geh, has TtceicqSes, -TjScov, in the plu- 
ral, after the analogy of TVa/x^Se?, Alclitt)^, T6a/cr)- 
Se?, Albanian tribes. 

3. A few feminines of the first declension have 
aSe?, ahcov, in the plural. 

See dhep<pr], Kvpd, pdvva, polpa, vvcpr), 6<d, below. 

4. Turkish nouns in -/Jbirao-T]^ (head, captain) 
have -77869 or -aSe? in the plural. 

captain of a company 

S. N. fJL7rov\ovK/jL7ra<T7]$ P. N.A. V. fXTrovXovKfiiTaa-'fjSe^, 
G. fJL7rov\ovK/jL7raarj /jLirovXovfCfMTraaaoes 

A. fJsTrovXovfCfjLiracrri^v) G. /jL7rov\ovKfJ,7rao-rficDV, 

V. inrovkoviciATraar) jjarovXovKixiraaahwv 



46 



NOUNS. 



5. Nouns in APIX (written also APHX), synco- 
pated from the classical apto?, have apeoc, dpoc, or 
dpi&es, in the plural. (Compare § 11, 1, 2.) 



Classical. 



S.N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 



/narceWapLOS 
fia/ceWapiov 
fia/ceWapiG) 
fjbcuceXkapLov 
fjLa/ceWapLe 
P. N. V. fia/ceWapiot 
G. /LLcifceWapicoi/ 
D. /jLctfceWapiots 
A. jACifceWapLovs 



macellarius 

macellarii 

macellario 

macellarium 

macellari 

macellarii 

macellariorum 

macellariis 

macellarios 



S.N. 
G. 
A. 
V. 



Modern. 
butcher 

P. N. V. /JLafceXX-apeoi, -apot, 
G. fJLcuceXX-apecov, -apcov 

A. fJLafceW-apeovS) -apovs 



fjua/ceWapcs 
fiafceWapi, 
/jbaKeWapi(v^ 
fjLafceWapo 

Plural also, 
N. A.V. ficiKeWapiSes, G. fiafceWapiScov 



6. Modern nouns in PHX (written also PIX) 
follow the analogy of the preceding class as far 
as they go. 





guest 


Turk 


S.N. 


fjLovaacfriprjs 


Kovtaprj^ 


G. 


/jLOVcra(j>Lp7j 


Koviapr) 


A. 


[Aovaatylprj^v^ 


K.6viapr)(v} 


V. 


/JbOVcrac^Lpr) 


Koviaprj 



NOUNS. 47 

P. N. V. fiovcracpcpeoc Koviapot 

G. {JLovacKfupecov Koviapwv 

A. fjLovo-acpLpeovs Koviapovs 

Plural also, 

N.A. V. fMovcracjjip7]Se<; Koviaprfies 

Gr. fiovcracplprjScDV Kouiaprjhcov 

7. Sometimes the genitive plural of dissyllabic 
paroxytones of the second declension throws the 
accent on the last syllable. 

See &pdy<os, TovpKos, ^poi/os, ndarpov, below. 

8. Neuters in PON sometimes make the plural 
in prj, after the analogy of those in o?. 

See aarpov, devdpov, marpov, below. 

9. A list of Irregular Nouns. 

doepcpf), r)s, rj, (aSeXtp?)) PI. doepcfies or doepcpddes, -ddcov, sister. 

(§ , 15 ' 3,) , 
'AppJvrjs, rj, 6, Q App.evios) PL 'App-evrjoes, -ndcov, Or y App.eveoi, -ecov, 

-iovs, Armenian. (§11; compare § 15, 5.) 

apxovras, a, 6, (apxoov) regular (§ 12, 1). Also G. dpxovrov, PI. dp- 

XOVTOL, -OVTCOV, -OVTOVS. (§ 15, 1.) 

1 . A notable, primate, a person of distinction, in a town. 

2. A rich man. 

aa-rpov, ov, to, PI. aarpa or aarprj, Star. (§ 15, 8.) 
dcpevrns, rj, 6, (av6evrr]s) PI. d<p£vres or dcpevrdbes, -ddcov. G. also 
dcpevros. (§ 10, 1.) 

1 . Blaster, lord. 

2. Governor. c O dcpevrns rrjs BXaxt'a?. 

fie(lpns, 77, 6, (Arabic) PI. fie£ipr]8es, -rjdcov, or /3<r£ipaSes, -ddcov, vizer, 

or vizier. 
Bovpyaprjs, n, 6, (BovXyapos) PI. Bovpydpoi, -dpcov, -dpovs, a Bulgarian. 

(§15,6.) 
fipovKoXaicas, a, 6, G. also (3povKo\di<ov, PL fipovKoXdnoi, -diccov, -dicovs, 

bhrulcolalcas, say Vampire. (§ 15, 1.) 
yen-oi/as 1 , a, 6, (yei'rcoy) G. also yeirovov, PI. yeiroVoi, -oixwi/, -ovovs, 

neighbor. (§ 15, 1.) 
yepovrar, a, 6, (yepcov) regular. Also G. ycpovrov, PI. yepovroi, -ovrcov, 

-OVTOVS. (§ 15, 1.) 



48 NOUNS. 

1. An old man, ye pes- 

2. A town officer, analogous to the selectman In New England. 
The yepovres (called also drjuoyepovres) of a Greek community in 
European Turkey are Greeks annually chosen by the Greek mem- 
bers of that community. 

3. A title of honor given to monks ; say father. 
TiaviTaaprjs, n, 6, PI. TtaviTaapioL,-api(ov, -apiovs, or riavirirdpoi, -dpcov, 

-dpovs, Janissary. (§ 15, 6.) 
T<€Kas, a, 6, PI. TK€Krj8es, -nftav, a GeJc. (§ 15, 2.) 
daip.ovas, a, 6, {8atp.o3v} G. also baip-ovov, PI. daifxovoi, -ovoov, -ovovs, 

demon, devil. (§ 15, 1.) 
devdpov, ov, to, PI. devdpa or dsvBpn, tree. (§ 15, 8.) 
deo-7r6Tns,r], 6, PI. deaTrorddes, -ddcov, bishop. (§ 10, 1.) 

The modern vocative decnroTn is given to bishops ; the classical 

vocative dia-rrora, to presbyters. 
Kamrdv, or Kanerdv, 6, indeclinable, captain, before a proper name. 

c O Kamrav Nik.t]to.$, tov Kamrav TiarpaKov. 
Karnrdvios, or Kairerdvos, ov, 6, (Italian c a p i tano) PI. Kamraveoi or Ka- 

TriTavoL, -ea>v, -eovs, chieftain. (Compare § 15, 5.) 
2. A captain, as of a vessel. 
Kacrrpov, ov, to, (Latin ca strum) PI. KaaTpa, Kdorpcov, also Kao-Tpn, 

KaoTp&v, fort. (§ 15, 7, 8.) 
Koviaprjs, n, 6, QIkoviov) PL Kovidprjbes, -dpndeov, or Kovuipoi, -apcov, 

-dpovs, a Turk. (§ 15, 6.) 
KovcrovXas, or KovcroXas, a, 6, PI. kovctoXoi, -oXcov, -oXovs, a consul. 
KopaKas, a, 6, (<6pa£) G. also KopaKov, PI. KopdKoi,-aKG)V,-dKovs, crow. 

(§ 15 * 1 ) . . 

Kvp {Kvpios), 6, indeclinable, Blister, as a title. r O nvp Kooo-tos, tov Kvp 

JJavXov, tov Kvp Ilerpo. 
Kvpd, as, fj, (Kvpia) PI. icvpdBes, Kvpdhwv, lady, mistress. C H Kvpa. Ku>- 

a-Taiva, ttjs Kvpas JJavXaivas- 
[xdyeipas, or fidyepas, a, 6, (jxdyeipos) PI- p,ayeipoi, -eipcov, -eipovs, cook. 

(§ 15, 1.) 
fidvva, as, f), PI. fxdvves or fxavvdBes, -ddcov, mamma, mother. (§ 15, 

3.) 
[It is the primitive of the ancient derivative fxavvdpwv.] 
fxdo-Topas, a, 6, (fiataTcop, Latin magister) G. also p,ao~rupov, PI. p.a- 

oropot, -opcov, -opovs, architect. (§ 15, 1.) 
2. TJie master-workman. 
[HESYCHIUS. Mayiorcop, emoTaTns, SiSaovcaAo?. — Maylvrpovs, 

§i$ao~KaXovs, imoraTaS'] 
fxdo-Toprjs, 77, 6, PI. iiao-Topoi, -opcov, -opovs, another form of the preced- 
ing. (§15,6.) 
fiolpa, as, fj, PI. fioipes, p.oipddcav, fate, fortune. (§ 15, 3.) 
fjiovaacpip-qs, n, 6, (Turkish) PI. p.ovcra(fHp£oi, -eoov, -eovs, or p.ovcra<pipr}- 

8es, -ndcov, guest. (§ 15, 6.) 
vxxprj, rjs, rj, (vvficpr)) PI. vvqbcs, or w(pddes, -ddcov, bride. (§ 15, 3.) 

2. Daughter-in-law. 

3. Sister-in-law, a brother's wife. 



NOUNS. 49 

6<d, as, r), (Turkish) PI. o^aSe?, -dboav, oka or olce. (§ 15, 3.) 

7rdiras, a, 6, PL 7ra7r77§€y, -rjbcou, the Pope. (§ 15, 2.) 

Taraprjs, rj, 6, PI. Tardpoi, -dpcov, -dpovs, also Tardprjbes, Tjbav, Tatar. 

(§15,,6-) 
raoxavraprjSj 77, 6, (Turkish) PL ro-oxavrapeoi, -ecov, -eovs, one of the 

body-guard of a pasha. (§15,6.) 
ToCpKoy, ou, 6, PL G. TovpKcov or ToupKow, Twr£. (§ 15, 7.) 
$pdyicos, ov, 6, PL G. ^pdyKoav or $payK.a>v, a Frank. (§ 15, 7.) 
Xpovos, ov, 6, PL G. xpovcov or j^povaiv, year. (§ 15, 7.) 

Derivation of Nouns. 

§ 16 « 

1. Common Substantives, 

from the classical -as G. -a8o?, is equivalent to the English -ness : 
yXvuos, siceet, yXvicdda, sweetness, Trpdawos npaacvdba, greenness, dyXr)- 
yopos oyXnyopdda, quickness, voo~Tip.os voo-rifidda, agreeableness . 

-aiva 

signifies the wife of, in proper names : Kdxrras Kwaraiva, the wife of 
Kostas, Ar]p.T)Tpis Arjp.rjTpai.va, Ilerpos TLerpaiva, NiicoXas NucoXawa. 
See also -iva. 

r 
-apio^^ 

from the Latin -arius, most commonly syncopated into 

-apt?, 

as Ka(3d\\r)s KafiaWdpis, horseman, 7repi/3oAt TrtpifidXdpis, gardener, 
ndpra iropTapis, door-keeper, porter, rafiepva rafiepvdpis, tavern-keeper. 

-a? 

denotes seller of, dealer in, maker of, keeper of: fiovrvpov (3ovTvpas t 
butter-seller, •v/z-wpi yj/cop-as, baker, icpacri Kpaaas, vintner, wine-merchant, 
KTevi KTevas, comb-maker, Xddi Xatas, oil-merchant, p,vXos (jivXeov) p.v- 
Xoavas, miller. See also -ov. 

r 

-ea, 

for -1 a: (BLra-a (3traia, pa/38i pa/3Sea, o~ovfiXa aovfiXea. Now obso- 
lete. 

-r]Xa or -v\a, 

probably from -r]X6s (as in virvr)\6s), occurs in some nouns denoting 
color: axrrrpos d<nrprjXa, whiteness, p.avpos p.avpriXa, blackness, kokklvos 
Ko<Kivr)Xa, redness. Also in £ivr)Xa, sourness, KarjXa, a burning sensa- 
tion, from £-tvos, Kala. 

5 



50 NOUNS. 

-ta or -la 

denotes the effect produced by any instrument or organ : /xa^atpt pa- 
^aipta, a stab with a knife, kov8xjXl KovdvXid, a mark with a pen, kclvovi 
Kavovid, the report of a gun, or the ball propelled by a gun, part, pand, 
glance. 

-tflOV, 

the neuter of the classical -i/ios, denotes the action of a barytone verb : 
ypd(pco ypdyj/ifiov, writing, the act of writing, ko'ttto) Kotyifiov, cutting, 
rpe^o> rpe^ipov, running, devco deo-i/iov, binding, rpifico rpi^nfiov, rubbing. 
See also -pa. 

•iv a, 

the same as - a i v a , is used when the masculine is accented on the 
last syllable. Qodaprjs OoScopiVa, NiKoXrjs NtKoXiVa. 

-era, 

from the Italian -ita (Latin -itas) : dpyos apyira, delay, ex@p6s c^" 
Optra, enmity, <a<6s kclkitcl, badness, pavia fidvira, rage, wrath. 

from the Turkish -li, a native of: BeXearlvos BeXeanvX^s, a native of 
Bhelestinos; KaicrepXf)?, a native of Ccesarea. 

from the Turkish -lik, the province of, the distinct of: K abrjs KafyXiia, 
the district of a cadi, povXas /xouXaXua, dpparcoXos ap/uzrooXiKt, irao-as 
7ra<xaXtKi. 

-fia 

denotes the action of a pure verb : ktvtt(o Krvirqpa, striking, blow, irpocr- 
Kvva 7rpoarKvpr)pa, ivorshipping, nepveo nepaapa, passing, nr)8a> 7n)8i]pa, 
jumping, leap, nXrjpovco (nXvpa) 7rXr)pa)p,a, paying, ldpov<o (Idpa) iSpco- 
p.a, sweating. See also -ip.ov . 

-ov, 

the feminine of -as: (Hovtv pas fiovrupov, a female butter-seller, or a but- 
ter-seller 's wife, KocrKivas kovkivov, a sieve-maker 's wife. 

-ovpa, 

from the Latin -ura , heard in a few words : aXelo* icXeicrovpa, vkotos 
VKOTOvpa, xdvco xaaovpa. 

-ovpia, 

in a few names of places: Tadprjs Taapovpid, the country of the Tsd- 
midhes, Aiani^s Aiairovpid, Too-ktjs ToaKovpid. 

KXecpTovpid and Koviapid mean simply ol KXtcprts, oi Kovidpot 
or Kopidprjdes. 



NOUNS. 51 

-7TOV \0?, 

from the Latin pull us, less probably from the classical natkos, the 
son of: 'A\e£is 'AXe^oVovXo?, U.erpos ilerponovXos. 

-irovXa, 

the feminine of -ttovXos, signifies the daughter of: apxovras, dpxovro- 
7rov\a, a nobleman's daughter, fioanos fioo-KOTrovXa, iplpns ep-iponovXa, 
&pdyKos QpayKonovXa, TovpKos TovpKonovXa. 

2,Kvpo7rov\a, the daughter of Skiro, or Little Skiro, is the name of 
an islet near Skiro. 

-TTOVXOV, 

the offspring of, child of son of: apxovras dpxovT07rovXov, dyeviKos 
evyasiKonovXov. 

Sometimes it has a diminutive sense : Ttor^pi TrorvpoTrovXov, ^aXi'dt 
yl/aXidonovkov, 7ratSi 7rai.d67rovXov. 

-rpa, 

from the classical -rpia : yfrdXr-qs \jsdXrpa, songstress, -^/evrns y^evrpa, 
female liar, fivpoXoya p.vpoXoyiarpa, female mourner or singer of 
dirges. 

- t o-rj ? , formerly - r f rj ? , 

from the Turkish -dzhi: icaim Ka'iKTO~rjs, boatman, 7rairovTO~t, ira7rov- 
to~t}?, shoemaker, yepivro-rjs, sailor, yioXvro-rjs, passenger. 

•v\a, see "7]\a. 
-&>, or -« paroxytone, 

in feminine proper names : 'AyycAiKco, 'Apyvpa, 'Ao-^/ao), BaaiXco, Ae- 
cnrco, MaXdpa>, Mdpco, Xpv<ra>, from dyyeXiKos, apyvpos, do-rjjJLi, BaaiXns, 
beanoLva, p.dXap.a, Mapia, xpvaos. 



2. Diminutives. 

The classical diminutive endings tov, IScov, apiov, 

acnov, dcJHov have generally lost their diminutive 

force in Modern Greek ; as ttoSiov iroBc, foot, %«- 

plov yjuptb, village, town, ofelStov (j>ec8i, snake, iro^a- 

piov 7r0Ea.pt, foot, Kopaatov KOpacri, girl, ^copa^cov %(D- 

pa(j)t, field. 

-aica, 

the feminine of -d*K 77? or -duos: yiuyid yiayidna, dear grandma, 
\idwa p.avvdm, dear mamma. 



OZ NOUNS. 

-a/c^7?, formerly also -a*; jo?, 

from the Slavic -ek, or -ik, chie% in proper names : Teapyi? Teap- 
ya.Kr]s, dear George, Ni/coXas Nt/coXa/c^s, Tidvvrjs TiavvdKTjs, Tovpnos 
TovpKciKrjS' 

-aid, formerly -d/ciov, 

the neuter of the preceding: /naya/pt paxaipdici, little knife, Kpaat 
KpacraKi, a little, or dear, wine, iroTrjpi. irornpaKi, little cup, arop.a aro- 
HaraKc, little, or dear, mouth. 

-a/to?, 

the same as -d/cns, is heard chiefly in Laconia: Bevera-idvos Bevercna- 
vaKos, Tiarpos Tiarpdicos, Mi^a^X Mt^aqXa/cos. 

-?}?, 

in proper names, does not differ materially from the primitive : Tidv- 
vrjs Tiavvrjs, Kcooras Keoor?)?, NiKoXas NtKoX?)s, Qodoopos Qodcoprjs, Ka>- 
aravrlvos KtoaTavTrjs. 

-iTcra, formerly ~lr£a, 

from the Slavic -rjra-a: (BdpKa /3ap/aVo-a, little, or dear, boat, yvvcuKa 
yvvaiKiTaa, 'lEXevr) '~E\evircra, "v^uv^ 'v/ru^trcra. 

Kvpdra-a or Ke par <ra, dear madam, from Kvpd or icepd, mistress, 
lady, madam. 

-/to-???, formerly -trf?;?, 

the masculine of -iro-a, is now obsolete. See -Ito-os. 

-lt<ti(v)> formerly -It£i(v), 

the neuter of -iro-a, is now obsolete, except perhaps in Kopirai, girl, 
with the diminutive sense lost, from Koprj. 

another form of -ircrr;s, occurs in the obsolete Kvpiraos, for Kvpircrrjs, 
master, lord, as a title. 

-/eo?, 

a modification of -dicos, occurs in a few proper names : Ttdwrjs Tidu- 
kos, Jack, Johnny. 

-KCD, 

the feminine of the preceding : ' EXevrj ' EXeWco, Karepivrj KarivKay. 

i 
-otca<;, 

from the Russian -ok,-ik, heard in yvioicas, dear son, from vlds, 
yvLos. 

-ovBa, 

the feminine of-ovdi: KomXa tconeXovba, dear lass, aa7rprj danrpovda, 
raovudXa rcrovKaXovda. 



NOUNS. 53 

-ovSa/ci , 

double diminutive : ayyeXos dyyeXovdi dyyeXovbdia, dear little angel. 

-ovSi , 

from the classical -Lbiov : ydra yarovbi, kitten, yvtos yviovbi. 

Vovbi, sumac, from poos, and (pXovSi, bark, from (pXoos cpXoios, 
have lost their diminutive sense. 

-ovXa, 

from the Latin -ula : \idvva pavvovXa, dear mother, ddepcpr] dftepcpovXa, 
/3dpK.a (3apK.ov\a, kovtt) KovrovXa, dear little woman, iropra noprovXa, 
portula. 

-ov\r)<;, 

the masculine of the preceding : dcpevrrjs dcpevrovXvs, dear master, Ka^ra 
Ka\j/ovXr]S, poor fellow, Kvpidicos KvpiaK.ovXr]S> 

-ouA,t, 

the neuter of -ovXa : dbepcpos ddepcpovXi, TratBi 7rai$ovXi, x*P L X e ~ 
povXi, pvaXo pvaXovXi. 

-o vtctos, 

from the Italian -uzzo , in proper names 'Abpeas ' AvbpovTcros, Ildvos 
IiavovTo-os. 

3. Augmentatives. 

(1) Augmentatives are formed by changing 
neuters into feminines or masculines, and femi- 
nines into masculines ; as 

Koppdn, piece, rj Koppdra, big piece : cnraOi, sword, f) o"rrdda, big sword; 
KecpdXi, head, tj necpdXa, big head ; naXXnicdpi, youth, 6 iraXXr)Kapos, fine- 
looking youth ; aXoyov, horse, 6 dXoyds, large horse ; irobdpi, foot, rj no- 
ddpa, big foot ; x e 'p i > hand, rj x e P a ) la r <J e hand. 

MvTi], nose, 6 pvros, large nose. 

(2) Double augmentatives end in apa, ovpa, 
apo<$ ; as 

Xepa ^pdpa, big clumsy hand; noppdra Kopparovpa, huge piece; 
pvros pvrapos, monstrous nose ; KoprjTns Koprjrapos, huge comet ; ' E\- 
XrjvLKapa or 'EXXtjvikov pa, a big Greek word. 

(3) Augmentative proper names end in -a?, 
-a/>(X9, -apas, -apo?; as 

QeocbiXos 6eod>iXas, big Theophilus, Tprjyopios Tprjyopds, Kcooravrrjs 

5* 



54 NOUNS. 

KcacrravTas, Srddis ^raSas : ' A7roaToXr]s ^AnooToXapas, NiKijraff Nt/c^Ta- 
pas, Uavay (.earns Havayioirapos. 

Composition of Nouns. 

§ I*. 

1. "When two nouns are united into one by 
composition, the first component part has the 
force of the adnominal genitive ; as 

BaXaacrovepov, sea-water, from OdXacro-a, vepdv 

Kpaa-oiroTnpov, wine-cup, Kpaal, Trorrjpt 

poXvftoKovdvXov, lead-pencil, poXvfii, kovSvXl 

i-vXdvdpcoTTos, block-head, i-vXov, avdpezTros 

2. When the first component part is an adjec- 
tive, it retains its original force ; as 

iraXndv6pa>TT09, worthless fellow, from ivaXnos, avBpamos 
yepovTOKopcra-o, old maid yepovras, Kopircn 

3. Certain nouns, when they are used as titles, 
are united with the proper names ; as 

HcnraOvpvios, Priest Thimnios, from nanas, Qvpvios (Evdvpios) 

UcrrravTowis, Priest Anthony, iraims, 'Avravis 

HaivahtaOvpviaiva, Priest Thimnios's wife, Tvcmabid, Qvp.viaiva 

Mao-Topoyidvvrjs, John the artist, pdaropas, Yidvvns 

Tepoyepdcripos, Father Gherdsimos, Tepos, Tepdaipos 

AiaKaypnyopios, Deacon Gregory, didnos, Tpnyoptos 

AaaKaXonauayioiTrjS, Panaghiotis the teacher, ddaicaXos, Uavayi- 

WTTJS 

XaTanxprjVTos, KJirlstos the pilgrim 

Some write these words with a hyphen ; as Ilcnra-Qvp.vios, Uaira- 
bia-Qvp.via.iva, XaTan-Xprjo-Tos. 

Others accent the last syllable of nana, xaro-q ; as Hana Qvpvios, 
Xaro-J) XprjaTos. 

4. The baptismal name and the surname are 
sometimes united into one word ; as 

Tia>pyo6a>p,os, from Teu>pyis, Qcopos 

NiKoradpas, Njkos, Tadpas 

MapKop.7roT<rapr]s McfpKos, Miroraaprjs 



ADJECTIVES. 



55 



5. The Turkish titles ju7re'??? bey, ira<Tas, pasha, 
are often written as one word with the proper 
name; as 

MovoTacpdfnrerjs, from Movaracpas, fnrerjs 

nao-o/x7re?7S', Udaos, finer)? 

UeTpofnrerjs, Herpos, inters 

MovxTa.p7raa-as, Mov^rap, nacras 





ADJECTIVES. 






§ l*< 






1. Adjectives in OS. 




In 


Modern Greek all adjectives 


\ in OS have 


three 


endings, 09, oz>, 57. 




When OS is preceded by a vowe 


, the feminine 


ends ] 


in a. 




Further, the accent in adjectives 


in OS always 


retains its original place. 






Classical. 






Masc. Neut. 


Fern. 


S.K 


<ro(j>6s N. A.V.0"o<£oz/ 


"N.V.tTotf 


G. 


<TO(f)OV 


<ro(f)r)<? 


D. 


crocJMp 


<ro<f>f} 


A. 


<TO(f)OV 


0~0(j)7]V 


V. 


(ro<pe 




P.N.V. aocpol N.A.V.o-0^ 


1ST. V. (ro<f>al 


G. 


crocfhoov 


O~0<f>0)V 


D. 


ao(f)ol$ 


ao(j>ais 


A. 


crocpovs 


<ro(f>as 


S.N. 


fiovos N. A.V.fiovov 


N. V. fiovrj 


G. 


/ 

flOVOV 


f * 

flOVT]^ 


D. 


flOVG) 


flOVTj 


A. 


flOVOV 


fiovrjv 


V. 


fiove 





56 ADJECTIVES. 

P N. V. fiovoo N. A. Y.fiova 

G. . /novcov 

D. flOVOLS 

A. flOPOV? 



7rerptvo<; N. A. Y .irerpivov 
irerpivov 

TT€TpLV(t) 

irerpcvov 
irerpive 

P. N. V. nrerpLvoL N. A. V .irerpiva 
G. ireTplvcav 

D. TreTpivoi? 

A. Trerplvov? 



S.N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V 



S.N. 

G. 

D. 

A. 

V. 
P.N.Y. 

G. 

D. 



6elo$ 



Oeiov 

6ele 

Oecoc 



N.A.V.0e^ 
Oelov 
decay 



N.A.V.0e^ 

0€l(OV 



A. 0e/ou? 



N. V. ^.oi/at 

fioveov 

i 
fiovats 

i 

N. V. 7T€TplV7) 

Trerpivrjs 
irerpcvp 

7T6rpiV7]V 

N. V. 'jrerptvat, 
irerpLvwv 
Trerpivais 
TreTpivas 

~N.Y.0ela 
6ela$ 
6ela 
Oelav 

N.V.tfem* 
#€£&)!> 
Oeicus 
6eia$ 



S.N. 

G 

D. 

A. 

V. 
P.N.V. 

G. 

D. 

A. 



agLos 



agiot 






a};iovs 



N.A.V.a^a 

5*./ 

a£LQL<i 



N.V.af/a 

5c./ 

agiav 

N.Y.tytu 

amicus 



ADJECTIVES. 



57 



S.N. 


irucp6$ X. A. Y.7TLKpdu 


N.V. 


TTlKpOL 


G. 


TTLKpOV 




iriicpas 


D. 


TTlKpCp 




iriKpa 


A. 


ITlKpOV 




ITLKpaV 


V. 


TTLKpi 






P.X.V. 


iriKpot, X. A. ^V.irtKpa 


N.V. 


TTlKpal 


G. 


TTLfCpWV 




ITiKpWV 


D. 


7TlfCpOL$ 




it ik pcu<$ 


A. 


7TlKpOV<$ 

Modern. 
wise 




7TCKpd<i 


RN. 


<70<£o? N. A. V .<ro$6(y) 


N.A. 


ao(f)7] 


G. 


GO<f)OV 




(TO(f)f}<? 


A. 


co(j)d(v) 




(TO(j)7]^vJ 


V. 


<TO(j)€ 






P.X.V. 


<TO(f)Ol, X. A. "V ,<TO(j)d 


N.A."V 


. cro<£e? 


G. 


ao(j>ci)v 




crotywv 


A. 


(7O0OU? 







S.X. 

G. 

A. 

V. 
P.X.V. 

G. 

A. 



S.N. 
G. 
A. 
V. 



alone 

novo? X. A. "V.fidvo^v) X. V. fidvrj 
fidvov /iovt)<; 

fidpo(v) fiovrj^v^ 

fiove 

Hovoi X. A. V.yu.oz/<z X. A. V. [loves 

jJLOVWV fJLOVCdV 

f 
/JLOVOVS 

of stone 
irirptvo^ X. A. Y .irerpivo^v^ X. V. werpivi) 

irerptvov ireTpwr)*; 

irerpLvoiv^ irerpivrj^v^ 

irerpive 



58 



ADJECTIVES. 



P. N. V. TrerpivoL N. A.Y.irerptva N. A. V. TreTpwes 
G. werpivtov ireTpivcDi 

A. 7reTpwov<; 



ireTpivcDV 





divine 




S.N. 


dew N.A.V.0ao(z/) 


N.V. 0e&s 


G. 


0e/ou 


6ela<; 


A. 


0e£o(i>) 


6eia(v) 


V. 


0616 




P.N.V. 


, 0erot N.A.V.0e£a 


N.A.V.6fe 


G. 


6el(ov 


Oelwv 


A. 


Oeiov? 





iff. 
agio, 

agio,? 

ctf;ia{y) 



ivorthy 
S.N. a^o? N.A.V.3f«o(y) N.V. 

G. aftou 

A. a%io(v} 
V. a'?*£ 

P. N. V. a^oi N. A. V.5f *« N. A. V. £f«s 

G. a%MDV agicov 

A. atJLOvs 

bitter 

S. N. ITLICpoS N. A. Y.1TlKpb(v ) N. V. TTlKpr) 

G. TTlKpOV ITLKpY)^ 

A. TUKpo(y) TriKpj)(y) 

V. TTLKpe 

P. N. V. Tr^po/ N. A.Y. irifcpd N. A. Y. Tree's 

G. TTLKpWV TTLKpWV 

A. TTlfCpOVS 

Note 1. A few adjectives in P02 change os- into vs, in Modern 
Greek : thus, dopo?, eXacbpos, fxaicpos, Modern dSpv'?, iXacppvs, pxiKpvs- 

Compare the classical fxaKpos, length, as if from fiwcpvs. (Aris- 
tophanes, Av. 1124.) 

Note 2. The feminine of some adjectives in K02 ends in -Kid 



ADJECTIVES. 



59 



(in one syllable) : thus, dyanrjTiKos dyanrjTLKid, kokos naiad, vt)(TTIk6s 
vrjOTiKid, KprjTiKos KprjriKid, TrjPiaKos TrjviaKiA. 







2. Adjectives in 


rs. 








Classical. 










Masc. JSFeut. 




Fern. 


BL-N. 




/3a6v<; N.A.V.£a0«5 


N.V. 


fiaOela 


G. 




fiaOe'os 




/3a6eia$ 


D. 




fiaOel 




fiaOelq 


A. 




fiaOvv 




fiaOelav 


V. 




j3a66 






P.N.A.V.£a0efe j3adea 


N.V. 


fiadeccu 


G. 




fiaOecov 




fiaOeiwv 


D. 




fiaOk<n 

Modern. 
.deep 




fiaOetais 
fiadelas 


S.N. 




PaOvs N.A.V./3a<9v 


N.A. 


fiaOeia 


G. 




ftadvov 




ftaOeias 


A. 




Padv(v) 






P.N.V. 


fiaOoL N.A.V./3a&a 


N.A.A 


G. 




paOuwv 




fiaOu&v 


A. 




fiaOvovs 






The 


endings are contracted by synizesis when two vowel 


sounds 


come 


together. (§§ 4 : 7,5, 1.) 

3. Adjectives in 
Classical. 


HZ 








Masc. Fern. 


Neut. 


S.N. 


a/jLadr}? N. A. V. decides 




G 


afjuaOov? 








D 


afiaOec 








A. 


afiaOrj 








V. 


afjLdde? 







60 



ADJECTIVES. 



P.N.A.V.o/*o0€Z9 

G. afjbaBwv 

D. aiiaOkcn 



afjuaOn 



In Modern Greek, the classical ending HS be- 
comes OS ; as afia0o$, ignorant, afiXaffos, harmless, 
aTrpeTros, improper, arvxps, luckless, Sucttv^o?, unfor- 
tunate, aueXos, 



S.N. 

G. 

D. 

A. 
P.N. 

G. 

D. 

A. 



N.V. 



N.V. 



Fern. 

airXrj 

airX^ 

difky 

dirXrjv 

dirXai 

dirXai^ 
dirXa? 



4. Adjectives in OTS. 
Classical. 
Masc. Neut. 

dirXovs N. A.V \dirXovv 

dirXov 

dirXG) 
dirXovv 
dirXol N". A. V.<x7rXa 

dirXcov 

dirXols 
d7rXov$ 

In Modern Greek, the classical OTS becomes 
OS oxytone ; as dirXos dirXov dirXri, simple, hnrXos, 
double, TjOt7r\o?, triple, xpvo-os, golden, dpyvpos, of sil- 
ver, aiSrjpos, of iron. 

Note 3. Compare the classical 8opv£e, as if from $opv£6s. Also, 
N. T. Matth. 23, 15 SurXorepov, as if from dnrXos. 

Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs. 

§ !»• 

1. Comparison of Adjectives, 

cro<^o?, wise, o-ocpwTepos, wiser, crocJHDTaTos, wisest 
6eios, divine, deiorepos, more divine, OewTaro*;, most 
divine. 



ADJECTIVES. 61 

agios, worthy* dgiwrepos, more worthy, dgccoTaro<;, most 
worthy, 

in/cpos, bitter, TwcpoTepo?, bitterer, m-ucpo'Taro?, bitter- 
est 

fiadv?, deep, fiaOirepos, deeper, fiaOvTaros, deepest. 

apaOrjS, ignorant, apbaOeaTepos, dfiaOeorTaros. 
7rpofcofjt,fjLevos, learned, irpOKO^pbevecrTepos, 7rpotco/jL/j,€ve- 

<TTaTO$. 

(1) Certain modern comparatives end m-rjrepos, 
less correctly -prepo?. 

apxq-, dpxaios dpxrjTepos, previous. 

KaKos, bad KaKoorepos, KanrjTepos, x el P° T€ P 0S > worse, KaKararos, 

worst 

Ka\6s, good KaXrjrepos, KaXXiorepos, neuter koXXlov, better, KaXa- 

tutos, best. 

kovtos, short Kovrorepos, Kovrrjrepos, shorter, Kovroraros, shortest. 

fjLeyaXos, great, large p,eyaXr]Tepos p-eyaXeiorepos, fieyaXodTaros. 

noXvs, much, many nXeiorepos, TrepiacroTepos, more, noXXoraTos, 

most, very many. 

Trparos, first 7rpa>Tr)T€pos, less correctly 7rporfjTepos, former. Ob- 
solete irpcoroTepos. 

rpavos, big Tpavrjrepos, rpavitraros. 

Xovdpos, thick, fleshy xovftporepos x ov ^P^Tepos, x ov $P° TaT0 ?' 

Note. If we assume that they presuppose a positive in -vs, this 
ending should be written -vrepos. But if it be admitted that it arose 
from -airepos, we must write -rjrcpos (§ 7, 5, 2). As to -jjrepos, with 
an i under the rj, it is contrary to all analogy. 

(2) The comparative is sometimes formed by 
means of irXeov, more, and the positive ; as ifkeov 
fjueyakos, larger. 

(3) Sometimes ifk'eov precedes the regular com- 
parative ; as ifKeov dcnrporepos, whiter. 



2. Comparison of Adverbs. 

Adverbs of all degrees of comparison, derived 
from adjectives, are, in Modern Greek, the same 
6 



62 ADJECTIVES. 

as the accusative neuter plural of those adjec- 
tives. 

Classical. 

(rodeos, wisely, aodjeorepov, more wisely, o-ocfxoTaTa, 

most wisely. 
fiaOews, deeply, ftaOvrepov, fiaOvTara. 

Modern. 

croefxx, wisely, crofywrepa, ao^wrara. 
fiadid, deeply, fiaOvrepa, fiaOvrara. 

(1) The comparative of adverbs also (1, 2) ad- 
mits of being formed by means of irXeov and the 
positive ; as irXeov ticucpia, for fiaicpvTepa, farther. 

(2) A few adverbs derived from adjectives are 
the same as the accusative neuter singular of the 
adjectives; thus, 

Mo *>oi>, only, iroXv, much, ttoo-ov, how much ? too-ov, so much, 
oaov, as much as. 

Derivation of Adjectives. 
§ 2»- 

-aiciavos, 

a prolongation of the diminutive ending -dici (§ 16, 2) : £rjp6s or 
gepos, ^paKiavos or gepaKiavos, rather spare or lean. 

-aros, 

from the Latin -at us, corresponds to the English -ed in participial 
adjectives: avro-a, the calf of the leg, avradros, having stout legs, pov- 
(TTaKi fiovaraKciTos, having large moustache, dpvydakov dp.xry8dX.dTos, as 
big as an almond, ykp.a> yep-dros, filled, full. 

-evios, 

a modification of -ivos, corresponds to the English -en: £v\ov £i>Xe- 
vios, wooden, pdXapa pa\ap.arepios, golden, ncrai 7rero-eVior, leathern, 
do~r)p.i do-qpUvios, of silver. 



ADJECTIVES. 63 



?70?, 



from the classical -oios, later Boeotic -^oj: Spvpvaios 2pvpvrj6s, Po>- 

pOLOS PoipVOS, ^aXovtKT] TZaXoVUCTjOS. 

-7]<T10$ 

denotes pertaining to, peculiar to : yi'Sa -yi&jcrios, goat's, of a goat, (3ovv6v 
fiovvrjaios, of the mountains, yvvaiKa yvvaucycrios, woman's, 7raidi nai- 
dtanrjo-ios, boy's, Kopirai Kopirarjo-Los, girl's, xpovos Tpio-xpovr)o~ios, three 
years old. 

-CKIO 5, 

from the classical - i ko s : avdpas dvBpUios, man's. 

- IKOS, 

proparoxytone, that is, with the iEolic, or rather Latin, accent : /3Xa- 
Xos BXdxKos, TovpKOS Tovpicucos, 'ApeptKavos 'ApepiKaviicos, Papalos Pa>- 
pa'uKos, ^revrqs yj/evTiicos, KXe(pri]s icXe(pTiK.os. 

-IfJLCLLO?, -1/47)0$, 

from the classical -tpos: dvabeijipcuos dvabe^tprjds, godson, fidirri<ns 
^anTia-ipnos, godson, pi£a pi£ipr)6s, full of stumps. 

-Itikos, 

the same as -ikos : yahovpi yaBovpircKos, asinine, rpdyos rpaylriKos, 
goat's, goatish, o-kvXos cruvXiriKos, dog's, doggish. 

from the classical -epos (as in Kpvepos), preceded by the element 
of codrjs (as in dicav6u>dr)s), is a sort of diminutive ending: dcrirpos 
da-irpovhepos, rather white, sufficiently white, kokklvos KOKKivovbepos, 
p,avpos papovbepos. 

-oi/\o?, 

a sort of diminutive ending : vepov vepovXds, rather watery, fiaOvs /3a- 
BovXos, rather deep, p.aicpvs paicpovXos, longish. 

-ovo-cra, 

from the classical -6 e era a , used substantively: yXvuocpeovovo-o-a, sweet- 
voiced female, pavpopaXXova-a, black-haired woman, pavpoparovo-aa, 
black-eyed woman, KOKK.ivo<povo-Tavovo~o-a, a woman with a red dress, 
£av6opaXXovo~o-a, auburn-haired woman, Xexoixraa, a woman in child- 
bed, a-apavTairobapovcra-a, a centiped. 

-OVTO-IICOS, 

from the Slavic -rsheic, -nrsheK, equivalent to the English - i s h : 
aanpos dcnrpovTaiKos, whitish, kokkivos kokkivovto-ikos, reddish, yXvKos 
yXvKovTaiKos, sweetish. 



64 



THE ARTICLE. 



Negative Adjectives. 

§ «i. 

1. The negative prefix «-, before a vowel «*>-, 
corresponds to the English un-, or to the suffix 
-less : 

aicaKos, harmless, from kcikos, bad. 

ama-Tos, unfaithful, faithless, from mo-ros, faithful. 

dvd£ios, unworthy, from ci£ios, worthy. 

Note 1. In dptyvnros, numberless, countless, for dvapidfirjros, and 
ayyiKTos, untouched, for dveyyiKros, da- are contracted into d-. 

Note 2. In dvdfiados, shallow, the negative is doubled. Also, in dva- 
/xeXd), to neglect, implying dvafieKos, for the classical a/xeX^s, negligent. 

2. The negative adjective corresponding to the 
perfect participle passive is the verbal adjective in 
-t6s (sometimes an adjective in -o?) with the pre- 
fix a-: 

aypanros or aypacftos, unwritten, corresponding to ypap.pJvos, written. 

d\jrr]Tos, not roasted yjsqpivos, roasted. 

dvakaros, not salted akaTLorfxeinys, salted* 



THE ARTICLE. 



§ as. 


Classical. 


M. N. F. 


M. N. R 


S. N. 6 N. A. ri N. f, 


P.N.oi N.A.«S N.ol 


Gr. TOV T?}? 


G. TOW TtDV 


D. Tft) T7J 


D. TO?? Tttt? 


A. TOV TTjV 


A. tovs rd? 



PRONOUNS. 



G5 



Modern. 
the 



S. N. o N. A. t6 N. *? 

G. TOU T^9 

A. ro(y) TT)(v) 



P.N. oZ N.A.ra' N.*? 

G. TW 

A. TOU9 



TWV 



T€9 



Note 1. In some parts of Greece, the uneducated use ^ for 6 ; as 
17 ddo-KoKos, f) avhpas. This peculiarity does not extend beyond the 
nominative singular. 

Note 2. The nominative plural of the feminine is sounded I, and 
is written 17, after the analogy of the Bceotic dialect (§ 7, 5, 2). 



S.N. 

G. 

D. 

A. 
P.N. 

G. 

D. 

A. 



S.N. 

G. 

A. 
P.N. 

G. 

A. 



PRONOUNS. 


Personal Pronouns. 




§ 33. 




. %<*> I. 




2v, thou. 




Classical. 


j r 

eyco 
ejiov, fiov 




(TV 
GOV 


e/JLOl)' fJLOl 




GOl 


ejie^ fie 




G€ 

vfiec? 


7}fl(OV 




VfJLCOV 


rjfiiv 




VfllV 


r}fias 


Modern. 


vfia$ 


1 r r 

eyco, yco 

efieva, fieva, fiov 
efieva, fieva, fie 
Tjfieh, efiels, fiel? 
rjfias, efias, fias 
rjfias, efias, fia? 
6* 


1 f 
eav 

eaeva, aeva, gov 
j / / / 
eaeva, Geva, ae 

eGels, Gels 

ecra9, aa$ 

6(7(39, 0"«9 



66 



PRONOUNS. 



Other forms : G. iaov for aov. A. ifUvav, ifiwavc : eVe, iaevav, 

eaevave. 

Note. The accusative plural aas, eaas is formed from the accusa- 
tive singular <re, eW, after the analogy of pas, e/xas from /xe, e/xe. The 
nominative a-els, eVels is analogous to pels, e/zeis. 

2. Avto$, he, Avto, it, Avtti, she. 

Classical. 
Neut. 



Masc. 



S.N. 


avrov 


N.A.a^ 


G. 




avrov 


D. 




avr<p 


A. 


avrov 




P.N. 


avrov 


N.A.aura' 


G. 




dVTCDV 


D. 




avrolv 


A. 


avrovs 


Modern. 


S.N. 


avrov 


N". A.avro, avro 


G. 




avrov 


A. 


avrov, 


avrov 


P.N. 


avrov 


N. A.avra, avra 


G. 




avrcov 


A. 


avrovs, 


avrovs 



N. 



K 



K 



Fern. 

avrrj 

avrrjs 

avrrj 

CLVTr\V 

avrai 
avrcov 
aural? 
avra? 



CLVT7) 

avrrj? 



avrrjv, avrrjv 



N. A.auTe? 



Other forms : S. N. masculine avrr)vos, avrovvos, avrovos, neuter 
avrrjvo, avrovvov, avrovov, feminine avrf)vr}. — — — G. masculine and 
neuter avrr)vov, avrrivov, avrovvov, avrovvov, rovvov, feminine avrrj- 
vrjs. A. masculine avrrjvov, avrovov, neuter avrrjvo, avrovov, femi- 
nine avrrjvr}. Plural N. masculine avrrjvoi, neuter avrovva. 

G. avrovvcov, avrovav for all genders. A. masculine avrovvovsj 

airovvovs, neuter airovva. 

3. 'At os, 6, r), or a7raT09 (aw' dro?), rarely 
air a ur 6? (aV avro?"), self, a modification of avro?, 
is used only in the nominative. 

In the plural it has also avvarol (avv, avrov). 



PRONOUNS. 67 

4. To?, he, to, it, ttj, she, the original form of 
the article, with its original signification, is either 
enclitic or proclitic (§ 3, 2. 3). 

Masc. Neut. Fern. 

S.N. TO? N.A.TO* N. t%v) 

TOV T?7? 

A. TOV TTjV 

P.K toL N.A.™' N.A.T& 



G. 
A. 



TCOV, TOV$ TCOV, TOV? 



TOV? 



Reflexive Pronoun. 

§34. 

Classical. 

'EfxavTov, of my self i 

Masc. Fern. 

S. G. ifjLCLVTOv efiavTrjs 

D. IfJiavTU) e/iavTrj 

A. ejbuavTov efJuavTrfv 

P.G. vjfi&v avTwv, throughout 

D. rjfjuv avrol? tj/mv avTCUS 

A. rjfJLas clvtov? ^yLta? a\)Ta<$ 



SeavTOV Or Xclvtov, of thyself 

S. G. ceavTov • creavTrjs 

D. ceavTcp aeavTT) 

A. aeavTov aeavT7]v 

P.G. itfACov avTcov VJACOV CLVTCOV 

D. v/uv avrols vfitv clvtcus 

. Ai i>fta? avTov<$ vfia? avTa? 



/ 



68 



PRONOUNS. 



'Eavrov or Avtov, of himself. 
Masc. Neut. Fern. 



S.G. 


iavrov 




iavryjs 


D. 


iavrcp 




iavrrj 


A. 


iavrov 


iavro 


iavrr\v 


P.G. 


iavrcov 




eavrcov 


D. 


4avTois 




iavral? 


A. 


iavrov? 


iavrd 


iavra? 



Modern. 

The modern reflexive pronoun iavrov, self, is 
preceded by the article, and followed by the enclitic 
genitive of the personal pronoun. It is not used 
in the nominative. 

G. tov iavrov pov, of myself ': tov iavrov gov, of 
thyself: tov iavrov tov, of himself of itself ; 
tov iavrov T77?, of herself : tov iavrov /xa?, of 
ourselves, and so on. 

A. tov iavrov fiov, myself: tov iavrov o~ov, thy- 
self ': tov iavrov rrjs, herself: tov iavrov /-ta?, 
ourselves, and so on. 



Reciprocal Pronoun. 

§ 35. 

Classical. 

P. G. dWrjXav, of one another, all genders. 
A. dWrjXovs, a\\r]\a, dw-qXas, one another. 

Modern. 
The modern reciprocal pronoun is formed by 



PRONOUNS. 69 

means of 6 eW9 or 6 eh, the one, and the oblique 
cases of 6 «X\o?, the other. For examples, see 
Syntax. 

Possessive Pronoun. 
§ 26. 

Classical. 

eyuo?, ifiov, ifirj, my, mine 

r)jj,eT€po$, rffiirepov, rjfierepa, OUT, ours 

tro?, gov, err), thy, thine 

vfjuerepo^, vfierepov, vfierepa, your, yours 

09, ov, 7], his, her or hers, its 

a(j>€Tepo<;, <7<f)6Tepov, Gcperepa, their, theirs 

Modem. 

The modern possessive pronoun is formed by 
means of the adjective IB i «o9 or eoiKo^, own, and 
the enclitic genitive of the personal pronoun. 
The adjective refers to the property, and the geni- 
tive to the owner or owners ; as 

eSt«o9 fiov, eScKov jjlov, eBacr) fxov, my, mine 

eScfcos //,a9, ehucov /xa9, eBc/crj fias, our, OWS 

€$lk6$ gov, ehucov gov, eSifcrf gov, thy, thine 
iSi/eos <ra9, editcov Gas, eSi/cr) Gas, your, yours 

cBlkos tov, eSifcov rov, eBiKt) rov, his, its, eSt/cos rrjq, 

e&c/cov rrjs, eBifcr} 7779, her, hers 

col/cos tcov 01* tovs, eSctcov tcov or rovg, eBi/crj tcov or 

tou9, e&i/col tcov or tou9, their, theirs 



70 



PRONOUNS. 





Demonstrative Pronouns. 




§ «*• 






1. 05to9, Tovto? 


, this. 




Classical. 






Masc. Neut. 


Fern. 


S.N.V. 


OVTO? N. A..TOVTO 


N-V.^tt; 


G. 


TOVTOV 


TaVTTJ? 


D. 


TOVTG) 


TaVTTj 


A. 


TOVTOV 


TCLVT7JV 


P.N.V. 


OVTOl N. A..TCLVTa 


N. V.clvtcu 


G. 


TOVT60V 


t 

TOVTCOV 


D. 


TOVTOIS 


TCLVTaiS 


A. 


TOVTOV? 

Modern. 


TavTav 


S.N. 


TOVTO? N. A..TOVTO 


N. TOVT7] 


G. 


TOVTOV, 


T0VT7}?, 




TOVTOVVOV 


T0VT7)V7]<i 


A. 


TOVTOV 


T0VT7)(v) 


P.N. 


TOVTOi N. A.TOVTd 


N. A.Tot5re5 


G 


l 
TOVTCOV, 


TOVTfOV, 




TOVTOVVWV 


TOVTOWO)!/ 



A. TOUTOf?, 

TOUTOl/J/OU? 

The modern tovtos often takes the prefix e ; as irovros, ctovtt), 



S.N. 
G 
D. 
A. 



2. 'Eye eZi/ o? 5 £to, Ae. 




Classical. 






Masc. Neut. 




Fern. 


e/celvos N. A.e/cet^o 


N. 


etcelvTj 


e/eeti/oy 




€fCeiV7]$ 


e/ceiz/o) 




e/ceivr) 


e/ee«/oi/ 




etcelvTjv 





PRONOUNS. 






P.N. 
G. 


i/celvoo N. A.ifcelva 

€fC€lVG)V 


N. 


eKelvai 

€fCeiVG)V 


D. 
A. 


e/cewot,? 
eicelvov? 

Modern. 




e/ceivcus 
e/ceiva? 


S.N. 
G. 


ixeivos N.A.e/ce«/o 
e/eeivov, 


N. 


eKeivq 
i/ceivr]?, 


A. 

P.N. 

G. 


etcetvov 
eKelvov 
etceivoi N. A.efcelva 

efceivGov, 


eiceivri$ 
eKelvrj(y^ 
N. A.e/eew/e? 
e/ceivow, 


A. 


etceiv&v 
efceivov?, 
efceivovs 


- 


eiceiviov 



71 



The Ionian Islanders convert etcelvos into (kcios, e\caa, iiceio. 

Note. The Doric nominative plural of ovtos is tovtoi, ravrai. 
(Apollonius, de Synt. 2, 8, p. Ill, 22. De Pronom. p. 332 B. 
De Adverb, in B. A. p. 592, 7.) The modern tovtos was suggested 
by tovtoi. 

Interrogative Pronouns. 

§28. 

1. TU.who? what? which? 

Classical. 



Masc. Fern. 




Neut. 


S.N. 


t/? 




N.A.t/ 


G. 




TWO? 




D. 




rlvc 




A. 


riva 






P.N. 


rive? 




N.-A..rlva 


G. 




tivcov 




D. 




tIctc 




A. 


riva? 







72 PRONOUNSv 

Modem. 
The modern t/s is inflected, as far as it goes, 
like the classical. The neuter t/, however, is used 
for all numbers, genders, and cases. 

2. The classical iroloq, what kind of? is in- 
flected like 6em (§ 18, 1). 

The modern 7roto9, by synizesis, is inflected 
like 0eto5 (§ 18, 1). Its masculine accusative 
never drops the v. 

Other modern forms. S. G. masculine and neuter <iroiavov, feminine 
7roiavrjs. — Plural G. noiavav for all genders. A. masculine iroia- 
vovs. 

3. Nrd or "Ivra, what? indeclinable, is a cor- 
rupt form of rL With yid (8od) prefixed, it be- 
comes ycdvra or y car a, for Bear I, why? wherefore? 

Indefinite Pronoun. 

§ 39- 

1. Ti$, certain, some. 

Classical and Modern. 



Masc. Fern. 


Neut. 


S. N. ri? 


N.A.7* 


G. TWOS 




D. TlVl 




A. Tivd 




P.N. Tivk 


N.A.tW 


G. TLVWV 




D. rccrl 




A. Tiva? 




2. KaTt? (kclv, tU), some one, mode] 


Masc. 


Neut. 


S. N. /cart? 


N. A.*aT4 


G. kcLtwo? 




A. /canva 





PRONOUNS. 



73 



The neuter kuti, some, when used adjectively, 
stands for all genders, numbers, and cases. 

3. Tlirore (t/, 7roTe), any, anything, aught, in 
Modern Greek, stands for all genders, numbers, 
and cases. 

4. The modern /fa 71-0 to? (/cav, iroi o'?), some one, 
commonly pronounced by synizesis, is inflected 
like afyos (§ 18, 1). Its masculine accusative 
never drops the v. 

Other forms : S. G. masculine and neuter Kcnroiavov, feminine kcltvoi- 
avijs. Plural G. Kanoiavav for all genders. A. masculine 



Kcmoiavovs. 

Relative Pronoun. 




§ 3®. 


1. '0 


o7rcuo?, who, ivhich. 




Classical. 


M. N. 

S.N. & N.A.6' 

Ijr. ov 

D. <£ 
A. 8v 


F. 

?;? 

V 
rjv 


M. K F. 
P.K ol N.A.5 N.af 

ijr. <yz> wz> 
D. ot? at? 
A. of? a? 



Modern. 
The modern relative is 6 nolo?, inflected like 
the adjective Oeio? (§ 18, 1). It is* always pre- 
ceded by the article. Thus, 6 ottoIos, r) oirota, to 
ottolov, and so on. 

2. r/ 0<TTt$, whoever. 
Masc. Neut. Fern. ♦ 



S.N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 



OCTTIS 



OVTLVO? 



COTLVO 



OVTLVa 



rt 

rj(TTLVO$ 

rjTLVL 

TjVTLVa 



74 PRONOUNS. 



(bvTLVCDV biVTLVCOV 



P.N. otrives N.AiWfl N. 

G. 

D. okttmtl alariau 

A. ovGTivas acTTivas 

Modern. 

N.A. o n, whatever, for all genders and num- 
bers. 
G. otwos for all genders, but only singular. 
A. onva masculine and feminine singular. 

3. The modern ottolos, whoever, is inflected 
like afyos (§ 18, 1). Its masculine accusative 
never loses the v. 

Other forms : S. G. masculine and neuter o7roiavov, feminine onoia- 

vijs. Plural G. onoiavav for all genders. A. masculine ottol- 

avovs. 

Note 1 . "O n o i o s is formed from noios after the analogy of the 
classical oris, 6'rou, ora>, oVa)?, ottov, from t\s 7 rov, rw, 7to)s, ttov. 

4. 'Ottoioo-Stj'tt ore (ottolos, SrjTrore) is a little 
more indefinite than ottolos. 

5. TIov or 'Ottov, that, who, which, is an inde- 
clinable nominative or accusative. 

Note 2. n o v is nothing more than the relative adverb ttov or 
67ro0 with the force of a pronoun. Compare the English where in 
where-as, where-at, where-fore, and the like. 

6. ''Ottov, indeclinable, is equivalent to ottoios. 
It is the same as the adverb ottov with a pronomi- 
nal sense. 

7. JToto?, in the sense of ottolo?, he who, who- 
ever? is now obsolete or obsolescent. 



NUMERALS. 75 



NUMERALS. 
§ 31. 

1. Cardinal Numbers. 

Classical. 

F. 
N. fila 
fiias 
fjiia 
fiiav 

N. pa 
fjLias 
fiia(y) 

(1) KaOels or Kad evas , KaOeva or tcadev, Ka6ep.ia, G. Ka6evos y 
Ka6ep,ids, A. nadevav, KaOeva or KaBev, Kade fiiav, (icard, els) every one. 

Kdde , every, a corruption of KaOeis, is indeclinable. 

(2) Kdveis or Kavevas (ko.v eh, or k&v evas), at least one, any, 
anybody, any one, is inflected as follows : — 

M. N. F. 

N. kdveis, Kavevas N. A. Kaveva N. Ka\i\ua 
G. fcdi/ei/ds Kap.p,ias 

A. Kavevav Kd\x\ua(y) 

Classical. 
P.N. A. Svo, Suo), G. 8v<Si/ rare, D Suo-i, all genders. 

Modern. 
P. N. A. 8Jo, <w;0, G. dvovav, all genders. 

Classical. 





M. 


N. 


N. 


CIS 


N.A. eV 


G. 




eVd? 


D. 




€W 


A. 


era 


Modern. 


N. 


evas, 


one N.A. era 


G. 




eva 


A. 


evav 





M. F. 


N. 


P.N. A. rpeh 

G. rpia>v 
D. rpio-4 


rpia 


Modern. 




P. N. A. rpels, three 
G. rptaJj/ 


Tpla 



76 



NUMERALS. 



Classical. 

M. F. N. 

P. N. Tecro-apes N. A. reaa-apa 

G. Tecradpav 

D. reacrapai 

A. Teaa-apas 



Modern. 

P.N. A. rea-o-€p€S,four 
G. recrcrepcov 



reave pa 



Also, PI. A. masculine reo-aepovs. 

The cardinals from 5 to 100 inclusive are indeclinable ; except 
beKarpels, deKareo-o-epes- 



5. 


7Tevre,five 


70. 


efiBoprjKovra, modern 


6. 


eg, modern egi 




efidoprjvTa 


7. 


€7TTa, modern ecfyrd 


80. 


oyboTjKovra, modern 6y- 


8. 


6kto>, modern o^ra> 




dorjvra or 6y8a>vTa 


9. 


evvea, modern evvid 


90. 


ivvevfjKovra, modern ev- 


10. 


deKa 




vevr\vTa 


11. 


evdeKa 


100. 


eKOTQV 


12. 


86>8eKa 


200. 


biaicoo-ioi, cu, a 


13. 


deKarpets 


300. 


TpiaKoaLoi, modern rpa- 


14. 


deKarea-arapes, modern deica- 




Koaiot 




rearaepes 


400. 


TerpaKoaioi 


15. 


heKcmevTe 


500. 


TrevraKoaioL 


16. 


demeg, modern 8endgt 


600. 


e£a.KO(noi 


17. 


deKaenrd, modern SeKcuprd 


700. 


enTaKoo-ioi 


18. 


deKaoKTO), modern SeKo^rd) 


800. 


OKTdKOaLOl 


19. 


deicaevvea, modern SeKaevpid 


900. 


evvaKoa-LOL, modern evve- 


20. 


e'tKoav 




a/cocrtot or evutaKoaioi 


21. 


e'lKoai eh, modern e'Uoa-i evas 


1000. 


X&ioi 


30. 


rptaKovra, modern rpiavra 


2000. 


Stcr^iAtot 


40. 


Teaa-apaKovra, modern <rapdv- 


3000. 


rpia-^i'Xiot 




ra 


10,000. 


/xvpiot 


50. 


TrevrrjKovra, modern irevr^vra 


20,000. 


biapvpioi 


60. 


e£r)K.ovTa, modern egfjvTa 


1,000,000. 


p.CKKiovvi, modern. 



In Modern Greek, thousands are formed by means of the plural of 
the substantive f) x^"i8a and the cardinal numbers ; as ftvo xiXmSes' 
ai>dpa>7roi, two thousand men. 



NUMERALS. 



77 



2. Numeral Substantives. 

Classical. Modern. 

1. fiovas, unit jiovdba 

2. bvds, the number two 

3. rpids, triad 

4. rerpds, quaternary 

5. irevrds, the number Jive 

6. egds, the number six 

7. efibopds, the number seven 
7. oybods, the number eight 

9. evveds, the number nine 

10. bends, the number ten beKaptd 

11. evbends, the number eleven 

12. deadends, dozen bcobeKapid 

1 5 . beKarrevTapia 

20. elicds, score elicocrapid 

30. rpiavrapid 

40. reaaapaKovrds o-apavrapid 

100. eKarovrds eKaroarr) 

200. SiaKoo-apid 

1,000. ^lAia's, a thousand XiAtaSa 
10,000. pvpids, myriad 

(1) The ending -apid, from the Latin -arius, as in binarius, de- 
narius, vicenarius, denotes a multiple of ten or Jive. Acobeicapid is the 
only exception. 

(2) The ending -dp a, a modification of the preceding, is used in 
names of certain coins : Trevrdpa, a Jive-lepta piece, beicdpa, a ten-lepta 
piece. 

(3) The neuter ending -dpi applies to certain Turkish coin's: 
bvdpi, a two-piastre piece, rpiapi, beicdpi, boobendpi, eiKocrdpi, elnoanrev- 
rdpi. 

3. Numeral Adverbs. 



Classical. 



1. a7ra£, once 

2. bis, twice 

3. rpis, thrice 

4. rerpdicis, four times 

6. ££-dias 

7. ilTTaKLS 

8. oicraKis 

9. evveaKis 

10. beicd/cis 

11. ivbenaKis 



12. bcobeKUKis 
20. elKoo-dias 
30. rpiaKovTcuus 
40. TeaaapaKovrdias 
60. et-rj/covrdias 
70. i^boprjKovrdKis 
100. eKarovraKis 
200. biaicoo-idias 
1,000. X iXiaias 
10,000. (ivpidicis 



78 



VERBS- 



Add to these iroo-aKis, how often? how many times? roaaKis, so often, 
so many times ; 6a-dias, as often as, as many times as ; noXKaKis, often- 
times, many times ; oXtyaKiy, a few times. 

In Modern Greek this relation is expressed by means of the cardi- 
nal numbers, and <popd or ftokd, time ; as iroaes <j>opes ; how many 
times ? plav (popdv, once ; dvo <f)opes, twice ; Sena %i\iddes (popes, ten 
thousand times. 

In multiplication, the uneducated use fxiai, dvoi, rpi'crt, reWepeo-t, 
•nivTti, e£u, ecprd'i, o^rou, ivvd'i, dem'i, and SO on, for anai-, dis, rpis, 
and so on. 

4. Ordinal Numbers. 



1st. 


irpwros 


20th. eiKooros 


2d. 


devrepos 


21st. elKoaros 7rpa>roff 


3d. 


rp'iros 


30th. rpiaKocrros 


4th. 


rerapros 


40th. reaaapaKoaros 


5th. 


7re/z7rros 


50th. irevrnKoaros 


6th. 


CKTOS 


60th. e^rjKoaros 


7th. 


eftdopos 


70th. e(Sdop.r)Koo~r6s 


8th. 


oydoos 


80th. 6ydoT]Koo~ros 


9th. 


evvaros 


90th. evvevrjKoo-ros 


10th. 


deKaros 


100th. eKaroaros 


11th. 


evdeKaros 


200th. diaKoo~ioo~Tos 


12th. 


dcodeKaros 


300th. rpiaKoaioaros 


13th. 


deKaros TpLros 


400th. rerpaKoorioaros 


14th. 


deKaros rerapros 


500th. TrevraKoo~i.oo~r6s 


15th. 


deKaros ire pnros 


600th. e^aKoatoo-ros 


16th. 


deKaros cktos 


700th. enraKocnoaros 


17th. 


deKaros e(3dop,os 


800th. oKraKoaioarog 


18th. 


deKaros oydoos 


900th. evveaKocrioaros 


19th. 


deKaros evvaros 


1000th. xtXiooros 




5. Multiplicatives. 


Classical. 


Modern. 


1. dnXovs 


cnrKos, simjjle, fiovos, single 


2. dirrXovs 


SwrXo?, double 


3. rpinXovs 


rpwrXoy, triple 


4. rerparrXovs 


rerpanXos, fourfold 



5. Ttevraiikovs, and SO on. 



VERBS. 

§ S2 - 

1. The Modem Greek verb has three simple 
tenses ; the present, imperfect, and aorist 



VERBS. 



79 



The formation of the imperfect presents no dif- 
ficulty whatever. The characteristics of the aorist 
and perfect participle passive are exhibited in the 
following table : — 



Pres. 


Aor. 


Aor. Pass. 


Perf. Part. 


aivco 
a'XAo> 


ova 
aWa 


dvdrjv, 

d0r]v 

dXOrjV 


appevos, 
ao~p.evos 
a\p,evos 


dvco 
dpco 


aaa 
aprjera 


do~0r)v 
apr]cr6r)v 


acrpevos 
aprjerpevos 


ova 


avcra, 


avOrjv 


avpAvos, 


/3a> 


ayj/a 
tya 


cp0rjv 


apAvos 
p,pevos 


yco 


$" 


X drjv 


ypevos, 


yyco 


& 


%fm 


pAvos 
ypevos 


610) 

eKvco polysylL 
eXvco dissyll. 


etcra 
eika 
eika 


€lO~0r]V 

dXdrjv 


eicrpAvos 

eXpevos 

aXpAvos 


even 


eivd 






evco (yv<o) vva 

epvco (epa), eipco) eipa 
epvco (ypco) vpa 


vvdrjv, 
vdrjv 
dpBrjv 
vp6rjV 


vpAvos 

appevos 
vppAvos 


evco 
Ceo 


evcra, 

e\jra 

era, 


ev0r\v 

O~0J]V, 

X Or)V 


evpevos, 
epievos 
trpevosy 
ypAvos, 


0<o 

IP<0 


era 
iprjcra 


<J&T)V 

tprjadrjv 


p.evos 

crpAvos 

iprjap.evos 


Ico 


icra 


icrdrjv 


icrpAvos 


KTOi 


fr 


X0r}v 


ypevos, 


KG) 


£a 


X Bt]v 


pevos 
ypevos, 


ovco (da)) 


axra 


coBrjv 


p.evos 
copevos 


ovco 

7JTG) 
7TG) 


ovcra 


OVCT0TJV 

cpdiju 
(p0r)v 


ovcrpevos 

ppevos 

pp.evos 


vvco 

vpvco (ypco) 


vva 
vpa 


vvdrjv, 

v0rjv 

vpBrpt 


vp.evos 
vppevos 


vco 

(prco 

(pco 


vera 
yj/a 
y(ra 


v0tjv 
cpBrpt 
<p0r\v 


vpevos 
p,pevos 
ppivos 



80 



VERBS. 



Pres. 


Aor. 


Aor. Pass. 


Perf. Part. 


X va> 


& 


X<V 


yfievos 


X™ 


& 


xV 


y^ievos 


X* f . 


la 


yftji» 


yfievos 


co (aa>) 


qcra, 


r)6r)v, 


Tjfievos, 




ao-a, 


dcrOrju, 


aapevos, 




7?£a 


VXfyv 


rjyfxevos 


w (eto) 


T^o-a, 


rjfievos, 




ecra 


eaOrjv 


efievos, 
T]o-fxevos 



Note 1. In some parts of Continental Greece the uneducated use 
Ka for era in the aorist active ; as rndvoa eVta/ca, (ra7ri£(o eo-dmica, (p6eu- 
dva> e<fideiaica, £vfiova> e£vfi(OKa. 

2. The future, perfect, and pluperfect are formed 
by means of the following auxiliary verbs and the 
infinitive or perfect participle passive. 

6e\<o, will, shall, imperf. rj6e\a, would, should. Mutilated form 6d 

indeclinable* 
e'xa, have, imperf. et^a, had, fut 6a e^to, shall have, will have, 
elfxai, am, imperf. fjfirju, was, fut. 6a rjfiai or 6eXa> eladai, shall be, 

will be. 

Indicative of elfjuac. 
Present Indicative. 



Classical. 



S. elfii 
P. cafiev 



S. et/xai 
P. e'lfieda 



ei (els) 
ecrre 



Modern. 



Ho~6e 



€LV€ 

eive 



Other forms: 1 pers. plur. e'l/xecrTe, e'lfiacrre, elfieOev, etpeaQev, 
e'ifieada, e'lfxearav. 2 pers. plur. eiare. 

Note 2. The third person elve is usually written eivai, and is 
confounded with the classical infinitive chat. It is strictly a modifi- 
cation of the Doric ivri (Theocritus, 19, 5. tvt6ov Qrjplov £vr\ 
fxeXiao-a, for eerrt). Its original form is ev, eve, found in PTOCUOPRO- 
dromus. Compare § 33, n. 1. 



VERBS. 81 



Imperfect Indicative. 

Classical. 



s. 

p. 




r/s (rja6a) 
f}T€ 

Modern. 


f (?) 
r\(rav 


s. 
p. 


fjfxovv 
TJfieOa 


W°> 

rjaovv 


rjrav 

TJTOV, rjTCLV, 

r)(rav 



Other forms : 1 pers. sing, rffiovve, rjiiovva. 2 pers. sing, fjcrovve, 

?otch>, fja-rave. 3 pers. sing, rjrove, rjrave. - 1 pers. plur. rj^xa- 

orav, fj fiacre, rjixdo-reve. 2 pers. plur. rjaraaTav, rjaaa-Te. — — 3 pers. 

plur. fjroue, fjrave, rjaaai. 



Future Indicative. 


Modern. 




S. 6a r}fj.ai 6a rjcrai 


6a%ve 


P. 6a T]fxe6a 6a r}o~6e 


6a r\vz 


Also, 




S. 6eka> eladat 6e\et,s eiadai 


6e\et €L(j6ai 


P. 6z\ojx€v €ia6ai tfeAere elo~6ai 


6k\ovv eladai 


Subjunctive. 




Present Subjunctive. 


Classical. 




S. Z> fjs 


3 


P. &fiep ?re 


&(Tl 


Modern. 




S. rjixai rjaac 


f]V€ 


P. %uh w 0c 


rjve 



The variations as in the indicative: thus, 1 pers. plur. jj/xeore, 
^/xacrre, and so on. 



82 VERBS. 



Future Subjunctive. 

Modern. 

S. fjdtka eladai rjdekes elaOai rjdikeu etaBai 

P. T]6e\afj.€V eiaOai rjdeXere eicrdai rjdikav eiadai 

Also, 

S. 6a. rjjiovv 6a rjcrovv 6a rjrov 

P. 6a rj fie 6a 6a r}a6e 6a rjaap 

Imperative. 

Present Imperative. 

Classical. 

S. 'lade (ecro) eVrca 

P. core eoraxrau 

Modern. 

S. €<to as rjve 

as rjve 

Infinitive. 
Present Infinitive. 

Classical, elvai, to be. 

Modern. elo-6ai, or eib-rat, be, only after the auxiliary 6e\a>. 



Participle. 
Present Participle. 



Classical. 



Masc. 


Neut. 


Fem. 


. N. V. &p 


N.A.V. 6V 


N.V. oZaa 


G. 


OVTOS 


OVOTjS 


D. 


OVTL 


01/077 


A. ovra 




ovaav 







VERBS. 




P.N.V. 


ovres 


N.A.V. '6vra 


N. V. odaai 


G. 




OVTOW 


ovcrcov 


D. 




overt 


ovcrcus 


A. 


OVTCLS 




oviras 



83 



Modern. 
ovras, formerly i'o-ovras, eo-TovTas, being, all indeclinable. 

Indicative Active of yp defray, to write. 

§ 33. 

1. Present Indicative Active. 

Classical. 

S. ypdefrco ypa<f)€i$ ypacfret, 

P. ypacfrojuuev ypacfrere ypacfrovcri 

Modem. 

S. ypacfray ypacfret? ypacfret 

P. ypacfrovpbe[v^ ypacfrere ypdcfrovv 

Other forms : 3 pers. plur. ypdepowe, ypdepov. 

Note 1. The ending -ovv of the third person plural appears to 
be a modification of the Doric -ovn . Hesychius says that zyovi is 
Cretan form for %yovcri, 

2. Imperfect Indicative Active. 

Classical. 

S. eypacfrov eypacfre? eypacfre 

P. eypacfrofiev eypacfrere eypacfrov 

Modern. 

S. eypacfra eypacfre? eypacfre 

P. eypacfrap,e(v) eypacfrere eypacfrav 

Other forms : 1 pers. sing. eypd(pa,fjypa(pa. 2 pcrs. sing, iypd- 



84 VERBS. 

fas, fjypacpes. 3 pers. sing, cypdcpe, rjypcKpe. 1 pers. plur. 

eypd(pap.av. 2 pers. plur. iypcxpars, eypdcperav. 3 pers. plur. 

dypdcpav, eypdcpave, iypd<f)a(Ti, iypdcpa. (§ 33, nn. 4. 5.) 

Note 2. For the connecting vowel of the modern imperfect 
active, compare the Ionic ea or qa, eare, from et/xi, and iridea from 
ridt]fu. 

3. Aorist Indicative Active. 
Classical. 

S. eypayfra eypatyas eypayjre 

P. eypd^afiev eypd^are eypa^av 

Modern. 

S. eypa^ra eypa-tye? eypayfre 

P. eypayjrafie^v) eypatyere eypatyav 

Other forms : 1 pers. sing, eypdyjra, rlypay^a. 2 pers. sing, iypd- 

yp-es, tfypatyes. 3 pers. sing, eypai/z-e, rjypatye. 1 pers. plur. 

iypdy\rap,av. 2 pers. plur. eypa\j>erai/. 3 pers. plur. iypdtyav, 

eypdyjrave, eypd\jra(n, iypd>\ra. 

Second Aorist Active of fjuavOdvco. 
Classical. 

S. ep,a0ov efiaOes efiaOe 

P. ifjuaOofiev e^aOere efiadov 

Modern. 
efiaOa inflected like eypa^a. 

Note 3. For the connecting vowel of the modern second aorist, 
compare the classical tlna, ijveyKa. Herodotus, 1, 80 axr(ppavTo. 
Also the later forms, Orph. Argon. 133 edpciKa. 119 el8a. Septua- 
GINT. Reg. 2, 19,42 e(pdyafiev. 2, 17, 20 eSpav. 2, 23, 16 eXa/3av. 
Amos 4, 4 d<rr)\da.T€. HESYCHIUS, dydyas for dyayd>p. B. n. 2266, 
1 1 evpciav optative. 

According to Heraclides (apud Eustath. ad Od. 14, 352, p. 
1759, 10), forms of this description were used by the Asiatic Greeks. 

Note 4. The ending -a at of the third person plural of the im- 



VERBS. 85 

perfect and aorist may be compared -with the classical tado-i, c'lgdo-i, 
which have the characteristic of the aorist and the personal ending of 
the perfect. 

Note 5. For the accent of forms like iypdcpav, iypd-^av, compare 
the Doric iXeyov, e\dj3ov, eo-Taaav, edeipav, for the original iXeyoaav, 
iXdficxrav, eordo-ao-av, ideipacrav. (APOLLONIUS de Synt. 3, 7, p. 213. 
Gregoritjs Cokixth- 127, p. 316. Scholiast, ad Theocrit. 7, 
60. Et. M. p. 119, 45.) 

4. Future Indicative Active. 

The future indicative active is formed by sub- 
joining the aorist subjunctive to 6 a (also to OeXec, 

Be vd, 0a va)\ as 

S. 6d ypatyay, 6a ypayfrr)?, 6a ypd^ry 

P. 6a ypayfrcDfjiev, 6a ypayfrere, 0a ypa^ovv 

It is formed also by subjoining the aorist infini- 
tive to 6e\co inflected ; as 

S. 6eXa> ypmfrei, 6e\et<? ypdyjrei, 6eXeo ypd-^rei, 
P. 6eXco ypdyjrei, 6eXer€ ypatyet, 6eXovv ypdyjreo 

Sometimes it is formed by subjoining the aorist 
subjunctive to vd ; as 

S. vd ypayfrco, va ypa-tyrjs, va ypa^rj 
P. vd ypa-^rcofjiev, vd ypa^rere, vd ypatyovv 

Note 6. For the auxiliary use of #eA&>, compare Herodotus, 1, 
109. Et 8' ide\f)(rei .... dvafirjvai. 2, 11. El &>v 8rj edeXrjcrei eKTpe- 
y\rai. 7, 49. Et eOeXot, rot p.r)$ev dvri^oov Karao-TTJuai. 

5. Continued Future Indicative Active. 

The continued future indicative active is formed 
by subjoining the present subjunctive to 6 a (also 
to 6eXec, 6e vd, 6d va) ; as 

S. 6a ypacpco, 6a ypa<f>r)$* 6a ypa(f>y 

P. 6a ypa(f)CD/jL€v, 6d ypa(f)6T€, 6a ypdcpovv 

8 



86 VERBS. 

It is formed also by subjoining the present in- 
finitive to OeXco inflected ; as 

S. OeXco ypafyev, 6eXei$ ypafei, OeXei ypacpet 

P. OeXo/juev ypa<f)€i,, deXere ypac^et^ OeXovv ypafai 

Sometimes it is formed by subjoining the pres- 
ent subjunctive to va; as 

S. va ypa<f)(D, va. ypafyrjs^ va ypafrq 

P. va ypacfxajiev, va ypafere, va ypacj)ovv 

6. Perfect Indicative Active. 

The perfect indicative active is formed by sub- 
joining the aorist infinitive to e^o) • as 

S. e%&> ypatyei, e^et? ypatyei,, e^ei ypayjrec 

P. e^ofjuev ypatyet,, e^ere ypayjrec, eypvv ypayjrei, 

It is also formed by means of ey» and the accu- 
sative of the perfect participle passive ; in which 
case the participle is predicative ; as 

To ey« ypa/jLfievov to ypa^fxa^ I have the letter writ- 
ten ; not I have ivritten the letter. 

7. Future Perfect Indicative Active. 

The future perfect indicative active is formed by 
subjoining the accusative of the perfect participle 
passive to the future of eyw ; as 

0a to e^o) ypafijxevov to ypapiia, I shall have the let" 

ter written ; not I shall have written the letter. 

8- Pluperfect Indicative Active. 

The pluperfect indicative active is formed by 
subjoining the aorist infinitive to efya ; as 



VERBS. 87 

S. el^a ypa-tyet,, el^e? ypaifrei, el;ye ypayjrei 

P. el^afjuev ypatyei, et^ere ypayjrec, el^av ypatyec 

It is formed also by means of el^a and the ac- 
cusative of the perfect participle passive ; as 

To eiya ypapufjuevov to ypap,/j,a, I had the letter writ- 
ten ; not I had written the letter. 

Subjunctive Active. 
§ 34. 

1. Present Subjunctive Active. 
Classical. 

S. ypacf)co <ypa<f>r)$ JP^J} 

P. ypd(j)a)fjL6v ypcMprjre ypa$<ocri 

Modern. 

S. ypa(f)(0 ypa<f>r)<; ypa<j)7} 

P. ypa(j>ovfAe(v^ ypa<j>€Te ypafyovv 

Other forms: 3 pers. plur. ypdcpovve, ypdcpov. 

Note 1. The modern present subjunctive, so far as sound is con- 
cerned, coincides with the present indicative. 

2. Aorist Subjunctive Active. 
Classical. 

S. ypayjrco ypafyr}*; ypayfrrj 

P. ypayjrcofiev ypayfnjTe ypayjreoo-i 

Modern. 

S. ypayfrco ypatyrj? ypayjrT) 

P. ypayjrovfie(v) ypa-^rere ypayjrovv 

Other forms : 2 pers. plur. ypctyre, syncopated. 3 pers. plur. 

ypd-^ovve, ypd\jrov. 



88 







VERBS. 






Second Aorist Subjunctive 


Active. 






Classical. 




s. 
p. 


fia6(D 
fidOcofiev 


fiadr]T6 

Modern. 


fiadrj 
fiaOaxri, 



/jbdOoo, inflected like ypd-frco. 

Note 2. The subjunctives eiVcS, iSco, i\8a>, evpa>, -ma, from Xeyo), 
/3AeVa>, epxofiat, €vp[(rKa), nivct), take the circumflex on the last syllable, 
because they are commonly pronounced Vco, '&3, 5 X0o3, '/3p<3, 7r«o 
monosyllable. 

3. Future Subjunctive Active. 

The future subjunctive active is formed from 
the future indicative by changing 6d into rjOeke in- 
declinable; as 

S. rjOeke ypa'frco, 7j6eXe ypa-frrj^, rj6eXe ypd-fri) 

P. 7]de\e rypaylrcDfJLev, rjOeXe ypa"frere, Tj6eXe ypa-frovv 

It is formed also by changing 6eXco into rjdeXa 
inflected ; as 

S, r)6e\a ypd-fret, rjOeXes y pa-fret, r}6eXe y pa-fret 

P. rjOeXafxev ypa-fret, rjdeXere ypa-fret, rjOeXav ypa-fret 

It is formed also by subjoining the imperfect 
indicative to 6d ; as 



S. 6a eypacjya, 6a eypafas, 6a 'eypafe 

P. 6d eypdcpa/jtev, 6d eypdcpere, 6a eypafyav 



Sometimes it is formed by subjoining the im- 
perfect indicative to vd ; as 

S. vd eypacfra, vd eypacjyes, vd eypacf>e 

P. va eypdcj)afjLev, vd iypdcfrere, vd eypa(j>av 



VEEBS. 89 



4. Continued Future Subjunctive Active. 



is 



The continued future subjunctive active 
formed from the continued future indicative by 
changing 6d into r^eXe indeclinable ; as 

S. rjOeke ypdcf)G), rjOeke ypctffrrjs, rjOeXe ypd(f>r) 

P. rjOeXe ypd<fxo/JL€V, rjOeke ypafyere, r)6e\e ypacpovv 

It is formed also from the same tense by chang- 
ing 6e\co into r)de\a inflected ; as 

S. rj6e\a ypcxpec, r)6e\e<; ypdfyei, rjOeke ypdfec 

P. rjOeXa/juev ypcKpei, rjOeXere ypa<fiei, rjdekav ypafei 



5. Perfe&t Subjunctive Active. 

The perfect subjunctive active is formed by sub- 
joining the aorist infinitive to the subjunctive of 
e%<» ; as 

S. e^co ypayfrec, e^? ypayjrei, e^y ypatyei 

P. e^cofiev ypa-yjrei,) e^ere ypayjrei, eyovv ypayfrec . 

Imperative Active. 
§ 35. 

1. Present Subjunctive Active. 

Classical. 

S. ypa(p€ ypa(f)era) 

P. ypd(f>€Te ypacf)dvrcov, 

ypa(f)eTcoaav 

8* 



90 



VERBS. 



Modern. 



S. rypacfre a? ypacfrr) 

P. ypacpere a? ypdcpovv 

The third person of the imperative is formed by 
subjoining the subjunctive to a? (for a$e$), let. 

2. Aorist Imperative Active. 
Classical. 

S. ypdtyov ypatydrcD 

P. ypd^are ypayjravTcov, 

jpayfraTcoaav 

Modern. 

S. ypdyfre a? ypa^rrj 

P. ypdyjrere a? ypdyfrovv 

The second person plural is often syncopated ; as ypd\jrTe, Selgre, 
mda-re. 

Note. For the modern aorist imperative, compare II. 3, 103 
oto-ere. 105 a'£er<r. 16, 81 e>7recr\ Od. 22, 482 oicre. ARIS- 
TOPHANES, Ach. 1099 olae. Av. 842 Kara7reo-\ 

Second Aorist Imperative. 

Classical. 

S. fiaOe fiaderco 

P. iidOere /AaOovrcov, 

fjLa6ercoaav 

Modern. 

S. fJbdOe a? fJbdOr) 

P. pudOere as paOovv 



VERBS. 91 

Infinitive Active. 

§ 36 - 

1. Present Infinitive Active. 

Classical, ypdfaw 

Modern, ypdfei, only after the auxiliary deXco. 

2. Aorist Infinitive Active. 

Classical. ypd-xfrac 

Modern. ypdtyei, formerly also ypd^etv, only 
after the auxiliaries 0e\co and e%&>. 

Second Aorist Infinitive Active. 

Classical. ^aOeiv 

Modern. /maOec, only after 6e\co and e^a). 

Note. The modern aorist infinitive takes the ending and accent 
of the present infinitive. 

As to the infinitives et7ret, iSeT, e\0et, evpe7, 7net, they are circum- 
flexed because they are commonly pronounced Vet, 'Set, 'Atfet, * (3ptl, 
7rtet (monosyllabic). Compare § 34, n. 2. 

Participle Active. 

§ St. 

1. Present Participle Active. 

Classical. 
Masc. JNTeut. Fern. 

S. N. V. ypdcfxcv . ~N. A. \.ypd<\>ov "N. ^V.ypdcj)oucra 

(jr. ypa(f)0VT0$ ypa<fiovcrr}$ 

D. ypa<j)OVTL ypa(f)Ovcrr) 

A. ypa<f>ovTa ypdcfrovaav 



92 VERBS. 

P. N. V. ypdfovre? N. A..*V.ypd<f)ovTa N. Y.ypdtyovcrai 



• G. 
D. 
A. 


<ypa<f>6vTQ)v 
ypa(f)ovao 
ypa(f>ovTCi<? 

Modern. 




ypacf>ovacov 
ypacf>ovorai<; 
ypacpovcra? 


ypafyovraS) writing, indeclinable. 


(§ 


12, 1.) 




2. Aorist Participle Active 


• 




Classical. 






S'.KV. 


ypdyjra<; N. A. Y.ypatyav 


"N. V .ypa^raaa 



G. ypayfravros ypayjrdaT]? 

D. ypa-^ravrt, ypayjracrr} 

A. ypayjravra ypa^raaav 
P. N. V. ypdtyapreslN.A.V.ypdtyavTa N.Y.ypd-yjracrai, 

G. ypayfrdvTGOV ypa-^raawv 

D. ypa-^raat ypa-tyacraLS 

A. ypdyjravras ypa^daa^ 

Modern. 

ypd-frovras, rarely ypd^avras, having written, in- 
declinable. 

Second Aorist Participle Active. 

Classical. 

S. N.V. padm T$.A.Y.fia0ov ^.Y.fiadovaa 

G. fJLaOdvTO? fiadovarjs 

D. fiaOovrt fiaOovar) 

A. fiaOovra fiaOovcrav 

P. N.V. /Jua6dvT€<; N. A.V./-ta#oWa N. Y.fiaOovaau 

G. fiaOovTCou fxaOovawv 

D. fiadovat, fiadovo-acs 

A. fiaOovTcis fiaOovaas 



VERBS. 



93 



Modern. 
fiaOovTas, having learned, indeclinable. 

Indicative Passive. 
§ 38. 

1. Present Indicative Passive. 

Classical. 

S. ypacfiOfjLai, ypa^V ypafyerai 

P. ypa(f)op,6da ypafeaOe ypa^ovrat, 

Modern. 



S. ypa<f)ov/jLa(, 
P. ypa^ofieare 



ypa<f>eo-at, 
ypa^eare 



ypafarai 
ypacpovvrac 



Other forms: 1 pers. plur. yparpovpea-re, ypafpovfiaare, ypa<pop.e0ev, 
ypacpopeaOev, ypa(pop,ea6a. (§ 38, n. 2.) 

All the classical forms of the passive, except the second person sin- 
gular of the present and imperfect indicative and subjunctive, admit of 
being used in good Modern Greek. 

Note 1 . The modern second person singular retains the original 
personal ending -aai, -cro. Compare N. T. Luc. 17, 8 (payeaai, 
7ri€(rai. 16, 25 68vuacrai. Rom. 2, 17 Kavxaaai. 

Note 2. The ending -pedtv, as in ypacpopedev, is iEolic. (Apol- 
lonius, de Adv. p. 604, 24, in Bekker's Anecdota. Et. M. p. 559, 
30.) 

2. Imperfect Indicative Passive. 



S. e<ypa(f)o/JL7]v 
P. eypcKpofAeda 



Classical. 

eypd(f>ov 
eypcKpeade 

Modern. 



S. eypdfyovfJLOW eypd(f>ovaouv, 

eypcKpecro 
P. eypacfrovfiaaTav eypa^ovaaarav 



eypacfaeTo 
eypdcfrovTO 



eypdcpovvTav 
eypdcfrovvTav 



94 VERBS. 

Other forms : 1 pers. sing, cypdcpopovv, eypacf)6p.ovv, eypa(povp.ovv, 

eypacpovp-ovva, iypdxpovpLva. 2 pers. sing, eypdcpoaovv, eypcKpovovv, 

iypacpovaovv, eypdcpovo-rav. 3 pers. sing, iypacpovvrav, eypaCpovv- 

rave, eypdcfcovrav, iypa<p6Tovv, £ypa<poTovv€, iypacporav. 1 pers. 

plur. iypacpovpaare, iypacpofxaare. Also eypdcpovpdarav with two 

accents. 2 pers. plur. iypacpovcracrTe, eypaipoaaa-re. Also eypd- 

cpovada-rau with two accents. 3 pers. plur. eypacpovvrav, iypa- 

(povvrave, iypdcpovrav. 

The second person singular in -ecro belongs to formal style. 

Note 3. Forms like eypdcpovpaaTav, iypdcpovo-dcrrav, with two ac- 
cents, owe their existence to the effort to keep the tone on the radical 

-Jl -\ 
1 . 

3. Aorist Indicative Passive. 
Classical. 

S. eypcufidrjv eypa(f)dr)$ eypd(f)0rj 

P. n eypa(f)Or)fjL€v eypac^Orjre eypd(j)Oi]aav 

Modern. 

S. €ypd(f>67]fca eypdcfiOrjfces eypacfiOrj/ce 

P. eypafyOriicafJLe^v} iypa(f)6r)K6T€ eypdcfrOrj/cav 

Other forms : 2 pers. sing. iypacpOrjiccs. 3 pers. sing. iypafyOrjKe. 

1 pers. plur. eypa(pdr)<r ~v. 2 pers. plur. eypacpOrjuerav. 

3 pers. plur. iypacpdrjicay, icpdrjKave, e' t pcKpOrjuaai, iypacpdrjua. 

Second Aorist Indicative Passive. 

Classical. 
€ypd<pr)v inflected like iypd(f>6r)v. 

Modern. 
eypd(f)7]ica inflected like eypacfrOyfca. 

4. Future Indicative Passive. 

The future indicative passive is formed by sub- 
joining the aorist subjunctive passive to Od (also 
to 6e\€i, 6e vd, Od va) ; as 



VERBS. 95 ' 

S. 6a ypa<f)6co, 6a ypacfrdr)?, 6a ypacj)6fj 

P. 6a, ypatydafiev, 6a ypa<f)6rJTe, 6a ypa<j)6ovv 

It is formed also by subjoining the aorist infini- 
tive to 6e\(o ; as 

S. 6eXa> ypa<f>6rj, 6eXei$ ypa$6r\, 6eXeu ypa(f>6rj 

P. 6eXofJL6v ypacf)6r], 6eXere ypacj)6rj, 6eXovv ypa(f)6rj 

Sometimes it is formed by subjoining the aorist 
subjunctive to vd; as 

S. va ypacf)6co, vd ypa(f>6fj^, vd ypacj)6jj 

P. va ypa(f)0cop,ev, va ypa^>6rjre, va, ypa<f>6ovv 

5. Continued Future Indicative Passive. 

The continued future indicative passive is 
formed by subjoining the present subjunctive pas- 
sive to 6 a (deXet, 6e vd, 6a vd, or simply va) ; as 

S. 6a ypacfxo/juai,, 6a ypdcpeorai, 6a ypdtyerat, 
P. 6a ypa<j>(tifjLe6a, 6a ypd(f)€a0€, 6a, ypdcjxovrac 

It is formed also by subjoix g the present in- 
finitive passive to 6eXco ; as 

S. 6eXco ypafaadai, 6eXeis ypdcj>ea6ai, 6eXeu ypdtye- 

a6au 
P. 6eXopuev ypd$ea6ai, deXere ypdfeaOai, 6eXovv ypd- 

(f)6cr6ac 

6. Perfect Indicative Passive. 

The perfect indicative passive is formed by 
means of etfiac and the perfect participle passive ; as 

S. elfjbai, ypa/jbjuLevos, o, 77, elaai ypa/JL/jLevos, 97, ov, and 
so on. 



96 VERBS. 

P. el/neOa ypafifievoi, a, cu, elaOe ypafifievoL, a, ai, 
and so on. 

7. Future Perfect Passive. 

The future perfect indicative passive is formed 
by subjoining the perfect participle passive to the 
future of elfMat; as 

vS. 6a rjfjbat ypafifievo?, ov, rj, and SO On. 
P, 6a rjfieOa ypa/uLfievoi, a, at,, and SO on. 

8. Pluperfect Indicative Passive. 

The pluperfect indicative passive is formed by- 
means of Tjfjqv and the perfect participle pas- 
sive; as 

S. rjjjbrjv ypafi/jLevos, ov, tj, fjao ypafifievos, ov, r), and 

so on. 
P. rj[ie6a ypafi/jLevoc, a, at, rjcrde ypa/JLfievot, a, ai, 

and so on. 

It is formed also by subjoining the aorist infini- 
tive passive to e?^a; as 

S. et%<z ypa(j)6r}, et^e? ypa(f)6rj, el%e ypacpdr), 

P. eiya\xev ypacf)drj, el^ere ypacf>67]; el%av ypa(f)6rj. 



Subjunctive Passive. 

§ 3SK 

1. Present Subjunctive Passive. 

Classical. 

S. ypacpco/nac ypa(f>y ypacprjrac 

P. ypa(f)co/jb€6a ypd(pr]o-66 ypacjxovrat, 



VERBS. 97 

Modern. 
ypd(j>ovpcu, like the present indicative (§ 38). 

2. Aorist Subjunctive Passive. 
Classical. 

S. ypa<f>0co ypa(f)6r}s ypacj)0r} 

P. <ypa(j)dct)fiev ypacfrdrjre ypacfrOcoac 

Modem. 

S. ypa(f)0co ypacf)0rj<s ypa<j)0jj 

P. ypa(j)0ovfjLe(v^ . ypa^Brjre ypacpOovv 

Also 3 pers. plur. ypa(j)6ovve. 

Second Aorist Subjunctive Passive. 

Classical. 
ypacfyco inflected like ypa<f>0co. 

Modern. 
ypacj>(o inflected like the modern ypacj>0a>. 

3. Future Subjunctive Passive. 

The future subjunctive passive is formed from 
the future indicative by changing 6a into rjOeKe in- 
declinable ; as 

S. rjOeke ypa(f)0a), r)0e\e ypa<f)0r)$, rj0eke ypa(j>0fj 

P. rj0e\e ypa(f)0cofjLev, rj0e\e ypa^>0rjre^ rj0e\€ ypa- 

(j)0OVV. 

It is formed also by changing 0€\a> into y0e\a 
declined ; as 

9 



98 VERBS. 

S. 7)0e\a rypcMpdr}, rj6eXes ypacf)6rj, r)6eXe ypa(j)6rj 
P. rjOeXa/xeu ypafydri, rjdeXere ypacpdr), rjOekav <ypa$9r) 

It is formed also by means of the imperfect in- 
dicative and 6d ; ' as 

S. 6a eypacpo/XTjv, 6a eypacfiecro, 6a eypafaro 
P. 6a eypa<pop,e6a^ 6a eypacf>ea6€, 6a eypd<povro 

Sometimes it is formed by means of the imper- 
fect indicative and vd ; as 

S. va lypa§o\xr\v, va eypacfyccro, va eypdcfrero 
P. va eypa(f>o/ie6a, va eypa<pea6e^ va eypdcpovro 

4. Continued Future Subjunctive Passive. 

The continued future subjunctive passive is 
formed from the continued future passive by 
changing 6d into rjQeke indeclinable ; as 

S. ^deXe ypdcj)G)/jLai, rjdeXe ypacjiecraL, r)6eX€ ypdfyerai 
P. rj6e\e ypa(pw/jLe6a^ 7]6eX6 ypa<^ecr6e^ ?]8eXe ypdcpcovrac 

It is formed also by changing OeXco (declined) 
into rfieka (declined) ; as 

S. ij6eXa ypd<j)ea6ac, 7]6eXe$ ypa<f>€a6ac, rfieXe ypd- 

<pea6ac 
P. 7j8e\a^ev ypd(p€a6at, 7)6eXere ypdcj)€a6at, r)6eXav 

ypdcj)ea6ai, 

5. Perfect Subjunctive Passive. 

The perfect subjunctive passive is formed by 
means of the subjunctive of etfiai, and the perfect 
participle (declined); as 



VEBBS. 99 



S. rj/xtu <ypa/j,fjLevos, r f orac ypafipLevos^ r)ve ypa/n/jLevos 
P. rjfJbeOa ypa/jUfievoc, r)a6e ypajafievoi, rjve ypapLfievou 



Imperative Passive. 
§ 40. 

1. Present Imperative Passive. 

Classical. 

S. ypd<f>ov ypafacrOco 

P. ypdcpeaOe ypac^eaOcov, 

jpa<p€cr6co<7av 

Modern. 

S. ypdcpou a? ypaferai 

P. ypd<f>6crT€ a? ypdfyovvTCLt, 

2. Aorist Imperative Passive. 

Classical. 

S. ypdcpOrjn <ypa(j>0r)TO) 

P. ypdcj)6r)T6 <ypd(f)0evT(DV, 

ypacf)$7]Tcocrav 

Modern. 

S. ypdtyov a? ypacfidr) 

P. <ypa<fc0r}T6 a? ypacj)6ovv 

The second person singular of the aorist imper- 
ative passive is formed from the indicative by 
changing Qrp or a-Orjv into o-ov, cj>0r)v into tyov, and 

yQr)v into tjov ; as eTLfJLT]6r)v Ttfirjaov, ehdpOrjV Sdpaov, 
ecrrdxOrjv (TraXaov, eireLadrjv Treccrov, eypcupOrjv ypatyov, 
eirXe^drjv ifke^ov. 



100 VERBS. 

Second Aorist Imperative Passive. 
Classical. 

S. ypdcpTjOi, ypacfrrjTCD 

P. ypdcfrrjre ypacpevrcov, 

rypacj>riTQ)crav 



Infinitive Passive. 
§ 41. 

1. Present Infiiiitive Passive, 

Classical and Modern. ypdfeo-Oai. The Modern 
only after the auxiliary 6e\o. 

2. Aorist Infinitive Passive. 

Classical. ypacj)6rjvac. 

Modern. ypacpOr), formerly also ypacj>0rjv, only 
after the auxiliary verbs 6e\co, e^a>. 

Second Aorist Infinitive Passive. 

Classical, ypafyrjvai. 

Modern. ypa<j>rj, formerly also ypaffiv, only 
after the auxiliary verbs OeXco, e%G>. 

Note. The modern infinitive in -rj was suggested by the sub- 
junctive, and should be written, strictly speaking, with an-et. Thus, 
ypa(f)d(d, ypcxpOet are analogous to <^hAg>, (piket It cannot be regarded 
as a modification of the iEolic -rjv; for in this dialect, infinitives in 
-r\v are paroxytone ; thus, jxedvaBrju, in Alcseus. 



VERBS. 101' 

Participle Passive. 

§ f* 

1. Present Participle Passive. 

JL 

Classical. 
rypcufcofievos, ov, 77, inflected like iriipivo^ (§ 18, 1). 

Modern. 
ypa<j>ovfAevo$, ov, v n inflected like Trerpivo? (§ 18, 1). 

Ill some verbs, it ends in -ap.evos\ as K€Lrdp.evos, Xeyafxevos, 
Xaipdjievos. 

2. Perfect Participle Passive. 

Classical. 
yey pa/ji/ievos, ov, rj, inflected like fzdvos (§ 18, 1). 

Modem. 
ypafifievos, ov, ??, written, inflected like /novo? 
(§ 18, 1). 

The ending -a\xivos (pronounced -£p.evos) sometimes becomes 
-£6fievos or -£ov(j.evos in Romaic ; as 7repaa-pevo9 7repa£6p.evos, </>o/3t- 
o-fxevGS <po,3i£6fxevos or (pofti^ovpevos, ypap.p.a.7icrp.€Vos ypajxpLan(ovp.^vo^. 

3. Aorist Participle Passive. 

Classical. 

Masc. Neut. Fern. 

S. N.V. ypa<f)6ek N.A.V. ypacj)9ev N.V.ypacpOelcra 

G. ypacfrOevTOS ypa^Qeiat]^ 

D. ypa<f)6evTi ypa^Oeiar] 

A. ypacf>6evTa ypacpOelaav 



102 VERBS. 

Modern. 
ypa(j)0evTa, indeclinable and obsolete. 

Contract Verbs. 
§ 43. 

1. In the following verbs, contraction is effected 
by simply dropping one of the vowel-sounds : — 

gkovo), hear — clkovzis cikovs, aicovei dnov, aKovovjie d<ovfie, d/covere 

aKovre, aKovovcri dicovai, duovovv aKovv. Imperative, aKove aicov, 

aKovere duovre. So Kpova>, Kpovs* 
Kctia), burn tcaUis nals, Kalovfxe Kaifie, Kaiovv kcllv. So kXcu'co, 

(praico. 
Xew (Xeyeo), say \eeis Xe'y, Xeoupe \ep.e, Xeere Xere, Xiovat \ecri, 

\eovv \eu. So #eAoo, 6es, #eiie, flere, 6ev. 
7rd(o (jraya>) , go 7raeis 7ras, Traei 7ra, naov/xe 7ra/ie, Traere Ttdre , ndovu 

ixdv. So (pda> (^xxyo)), from rpcoya>. 
rpco<a (rpcoyoo), eat rpooecs rpcas, rpcooupe rpw/^ic, rpaere rpare, 

rpa>ov(Ti rpaxri, rp&ovv rpa>v. 

2. The classical endings eco, oco are generally 
changed into aw, -6vco, respectively. 

Indicative Active. 

Present Indicative Active. 

Classical. 



s. 
p. 


rip,co 
Tip.cop.ev 


rip.ds 
rip-dre 

Modern. 


Tifid 
Tifiaxn 


s. 
p. 


Tipco 
Tip.o0pe(i/) 


Tip-ds 
rifidre 


ripa 
np,ovv 



Other forms : 1 pers. sing, rt/zaco, Tt/zayco. 2 pers. sing, rifideis, 

rifidyeis. 3 pers. sing. ripdei, Tip,ayei. 1 pers. plur. rtitaite. 

3 pers. plur. rip-oiive, rt/xuj/e. 



VERBS. 



103 



Classical. 



S. 170X0} 


irare7s 


Trarei 


P. irarovfiev 


irarelre 
Modern. 


iraroixn 


S. 7rarS) 


7rare7s 


irarci 


P. traToviieCv 


) Trarelre 


TTOTOVV 



Also, 3 pers. plur. narovve. 



Imperfect Indicative Active. 



P. eVi/nco/xei/ 



Classical. 

irLfxas 
irifAaTe 

Modern. 



S. irifiovo-a irifiovaes 

P. iTifxovo-afieiv) eTifiovaere 



eTLJJLOiV 



€Ti[j.ov(re 
irifjiovo-av 



The variations as in eypcnjra, the aorist of ypdcjxo. 

Other forms : 1 pers. sing, erlfxaya. 2 pers. sing, eri'/iayeff. 

3 pers. sing, irifiaye. 1 pers. plur. eYt/xaya/xe. 2 pers. plur. 

ert/xayere. 3 pers. plur. irlfxayav. 

Classical. 



S. iiraTovv 
P. cVaroG/xej/ 



eTrareire 



Modern. 



S. iiraTovaa inaTovcres 

P. eTraTovaafiefv) irraTovaere 



eirarei 
endrovv 



€7raTov<re 
inaTovaav 



Other forms : 2 pers. sing, evanes for the classical iivdrees. 

3 pers. sing, inane for the classical iirdree. 

Note. The imperfect in -over a was suggested by the Boeotic 
endings -ovaav, -axrai/, contracted from -eoo~av, -oocrav, -docrav. Sep- 
TUAGrxT. Gen. 6, 4 iyevvaaav as a various reading. Exod. 33, 8 
\arevoovaau as a various reading. Reg. 2, 20, 15 ivoovcrav. Nehem. 
4, 18 (OKobofMovcrav. Job 1, 4 tiroiovaav as a various reading. Ps. 5, 
9 edoXiovaav. Ezech. 22, 11 t}vo\iov<jov. Jerem. 41, 10 iaxrav. See 
also Et. M. p. 282, 34. 

B. n. 1583, 4 eviKaxrav, to be accented iviK&crav, not iviKaxrav. It 
is a Boeotic imperfect, third person plural. The expression in which 



104 VERBS. 



it occurs corresponds to 1584. ' Ol8e i'piKav rov ay&va ra>v Xapirrj- 
arioov. 1585. 'Evei/ccoy eirl <&\aovi(oi Havkelvm. 



Subjunctive Active. 

Present Indicative Active. 

Classical. 
rt/xo>, like the indicative. 

Modern. 
TLjxco, like the indicative. 

Other forms: 1 pers. sing, ri^aa, ri\iaya>. 2 pers. sing. Ttfidfls, 

Ttfxdyys- 3 pers. sing. Tijua/7, rifxayrj. 1 pers. plur. rifiafie. 

3 pers. plur. ri/JLovve, Tijiave. 

Classical. 



s. 
p. 


rrara> 


Karris 
7raTT]T6 

Modern. 


Trarfj 
Trarwcn 


s. 
p. 


Trarovfie(v) 


Trarfjs 
TTarrjTe 


Trarfj 
irarovv 



Also 3 pers. plur. irarovve- 



Imperative Active. 
Present Imperative Active. 

Classical. 

S. rifxa Tijjidray 

P. Tifxare rijxcovTOiv, 

TLfidrcoaav 

Modern. 

S. rifxa as rifia 

P. rtjiare as Tipovv 





VERBS. 




Classical. 


s. 


71-arei irareirco 


p. 


7rarelTe TrarovvraiV, 




iraTeiTGMTav 




Modern. 


s. 
p. 


7rdrie hs irarfi 
Trarelre as ttotovv 



105 



Infinitive Active. 
, Present Infinitive Active. 

Classical, rifxap. Modern, ri^ia, honor, only after the aux- 
iliary 8e\a). 

Classical irareiv. Modern. 7rarel, tread, only after the auxil- 
iary 0e\o>. 

Participle Active. 

Present Participle Active. 

Classical. 
Masc. Neut. Fern. 

S. N. V. rifxcov N. A. V. Tifiav N. V. Tijxoia-a 

Gr. TLJJLeoVTOS TlfJ.G)(rT}S 

D. TificovTi Tifxaxrrj 

A. Tin&vra rifxaxrav 

P. N. V. rificovres ~N. A.V. Tifiavra 'Q "V. Tifxoiaai 

Gr. TlfiaVTCOV Tl^COCTOiV 

D. TLfiaxri Tifiuxrais 

A. Ti[i<o(TL r rifiaxras 

Modern. 

Tipavras, honoring, indeclinable. 

Classical. 

S. N. V. irCLTGiV N. A.V. 7TCITOVV N. V. narovcra 

Gr. ttotovvtos 7rarov(rr]S 

D. jrarovvTL Trarovcrr] 



A. 



naTOvvra Trarovcrav 



106 



VERBS. 



P. N. V. 7ra.TOvvTes 1ST. A. V. <narovvra N. V. 7raTOvcrai 
Gr. • TfaTovvrcov 7rarovcrcoj/ 

D. TrarovaL 



TTCLTOVVTaS 



Modern. 
ivaroiVTas, treading, indeclinable. 

Indicative Passive. 
Present Indicative Passive. 



TTCLTOVO-aiS 

narova-as 







Classical. 




8. 

P. 


TljJLCOfJLai 

Tijj.a>fxeda 


rtfiaade 
Modern. 


<e <3 


S. 
P. 


TLflOV[Xai 
TLfX0VjuL€O-T€ 


Tifxacrai 
Tifmcrre 


TL\xarai 
Tljxovvrai 



Other forms: 1 pers. sing, Tifiio/xai, ri/xLov/jLai, rifia/iaii 2 pers. 

sing. Tifxiecrai. 3 pers. sing. rifiUrai, Tiynorai. 1 pers. plur. 

ri/iioujLtea're, rifiiofieare. — — 2 pers. plur. ri/xtecrre. 3 pers. plur. 

TiyLiovvrcu, tijxiovtcii. The variations as in ypa<fiovfj.ai. 

Classical. 



s. 
P. 


TTdTOVjiai 

7raTovfieda 


7raTrj 
TtaTeitfOe 


7ra.TeiTa.i 

TTOTOVVTai 




* 


Modern. 




s. 


TcaTio\xai 


irania-ai 


iraTurai 


p. 


TTCLTlO/JLeCTTe 


TTariicrTe 


TvariovTai 



Other forms : 1 pers. sing. irarLovp,ai. — — 1 pers. plur. 7ra.Tiov/ie- 
-€. 3 pers. plur. 7raTiovvrai. The variations arc in ypdcfrovfiai. 



Imperfect Indicative Passive. 

Classical. 



S. iTlfJLUfJirjV 

P. crt/ico/ie&i 



eripco 
eripaaOe 



CTLfiaTO 

erifxcovro 



VERBS. 107 



Modern. 



S. irifMOi/fiovv iriixova-ovu, irifiovvrav 

in/Aavo 
P. irifioiifiao-Tav irifiovo-acrTap lri\iovvrav 

Other forms : 1 pers. sing, kripiovpow, eTifiiofiow. 2 pers. 

sing. eTifxiovcrovv, irifXLoaovv. 3 pers. sing, ercfxiovvrav, irifjaovrav, 

eTLfjLarav, eri^ioTovv. 1 pers. plur. eri/xow'/xacrre, irifxiovixaarav, eVt- 

ixiofiaarav. 2 pers. plur. eYi/MouVacrre, eTifXLovaacrrav, eTifjaotraarau. 

3 pers. plur. eTLfiiuvvTav, eTifxiovTav, ert/xarai/, irt[xi.ovvro. The 

variations as in eypdcpovfiovv. 

Classical. 

S. eivaTovfir]v inarov kwa.Ta.To 

P. eTraTov/jieda erraTe'iade tTraTovvro 

Modern. 

S. eTraTovfiovu eTraTOvcrovv, erraTovvTav 

e7raretcro 
P. i7raTovjjia<TTav €7raTovo-ao~Tav Ittcitovvtclv 

Other forms : 1 pers. sing. enaTiovfiovv, cVarto/xow. 2 pers. 

sing. eTrciTiovcrovv, inaTiocrovv. 3 pers. sing. irrariovvTav, enariov- 

Tav, irraTOTovv. 1 pers. plur. eVartof fxacrrav, €7raTiufiao~Tav. 

2 pers. plur. enaTiovcrao-Tav, iirariocraa-Tav. 3 pers. plur. eVart- 

ovvTav, ltra.TiovTa.v-) enxariovvTo. The variations as in eypdcpovpovv. 



Subjunctive Passive. 

Present Subjunctive Passive. 

Classical. 
TLp.wp.ai, like the indicative passive. 

Modern. 
rifiovfiaiy like the indicative passive ; except that to becomes 

ico ; as Tipicopeo-Te. 

Classical. 

S. naT&pai varf} 7raTrJTai 

P. TraToofxeda rraTrjade rraTcovTat 



108 VERBS. 



Modern. 



7rariovixai f like the indicative passive ; except that to becomes 
t»; as Trartwfieore. 



Imperative Passive. 

Present Imperative Passive, 

Classical. 

P. TifxaaOe Tifiao-dap, 





TifidaOccKTav 




Modern. 


s. 
p. 


TifJLoO as rifiarai 
Tifia(TTe as rifiovvraL 




Classical. 


s. 


irarov narelcrOco 


p. 


TraTcio-Qe naTeta-Saiv, 




TrareicrdoiHrav 




Modern. 


s. 
p. 


irarov as nar^Tai 
7rareicrre as Trarovvrai 



Infinitive Passive. 

Present Infinitive Passive. 

Classical and Modern. Tipao-Oai. The Modern only after 

the auxiliary deXco. 
Classical and Modern. Trariiadat. The Modem only after 

the auxiliary OeXa. 



VERBS. 109 



Participle Passive. 

Classical, npapevos, declined like Trirpivos (§ 18, 1). 
Modern, npovpevos, declined like virpivos. 

Classical, rrarovpevos, declined like 7rerpivos. 
Modem. naTovpevos, declined like irerpivos. 



Augment. 

§ 44. 

1. The imperfect and aorist of the indicative of 
verbs beginning with a consonant prefix an e 
(called the syllabic augment) to the root ; as 

Ttpa, eripcou, eripaprju, iriprjaa 
ypacpa>, eypacpov, iypcKpoprjv, eypa\j/a 
y}/€v8opai, He, eyjrevdoprjv, i-^evadrju 
pcnvToa, sew, eppxirrov, £ppa(P&r)v. 

As a common rule, the uneducated omit the syllabic augment 
in verbal forms of more than two syllables ; as ypdcpovpovv, ypa- 
cprrjKave. 

Kote 1 . The illiterate usually change the augment i- into rj- in dis- 
syllabic verbs ; as f/ypacpa, fjyparpes, ijiua. This is simply substituting 
the sound I for E, and should not be regarded as analogous to rjfiovkrj- 
drjv, TjdvvfjOrjv. 

2. When the verb begins with a vowel-sound, 
it generally retains that sound throughout ; as 

aKovco, hear, iikovcl, aKOvovpovv, aKovcra, aKovadrjKa 

epcoTa, ask, epcoTovcra, epcoTovpovv, epcoTrjva, ip<oTi]0r)Ka 

evxppai, pray, bless, evftopovv, ev)(r]dr]Ka 

ovopafa, name, 6v6pa£a, ovopd^opovv, ovopaara, ovopdaOrjKa. 

Scholars regularly employ the classical temporal augment ; as 

rjKovov, rJKOvo-a, rjKovadrjv ; rjpoiTcov, TjpcoTTjdrjv ; rjvxoprjv ; u)vopdadr)v. 

3. The perfect participle passive takes no aug- 
ment whatever ; as 

10 



110 VERBS. 

ypdcpco, ypafifiepos, classical yeypap.pevos 

ripco, ripvpevos ■ reripnpevos 

CTTeXvco, araXpevos iaraXpevos 

p'nrT<£>, ptp-pcvos ■ eppiphos 

The classical form is used by scholars. 

4. In Romaic no distinction is made between 
simple and compound verbs ; as 

KCLTCLKOCpTGi, cut up, eKaraKocpra, eKaraKonvKa. 

Scholars commonly follow the classical rule ; that is, they put 
the augment after the preposition ; as KareKoirra, KareKdirnv. 

Note 2. The omission of the augment belongs to Epic, iEolic, 
and Doric poetry. In Ionic prose, the temporal augment is often 
omitted. 

Note 3. For the augment of compound verbs, compare the an- 
cient rjvoiyov, eKa8e£6pr]v, and the like. 



Irregular and Defective Verbs. 



§ 45 < 



aKpifiaivec), A. aKplftrjva, (a.KpLJ36s) enhance (lie price of anything ; become 

dear, 
dpaprdvu), apapralvco, A. qpapTnaa, rjpaprov, Pp. i]paprrjpevos, sin. 
ape, plur. dpere or dpere, (dpeuco) go, f/o ye. 

[HesYCHIUS. ' Apevcracrdai, dpelfieadai, dteXOeu', nepaLcocracrdaL. 

Et. M. pp. 82, 12 : 88, 28. 'Apevco, to nopevopai.] 
dpTTu>6(0, dprrdovco, dpirdoxvco, A. cipnw^a, dp.7rd>x8r)v, Pp. dp7rcoypieuos, 

(dncudeco) push. See also o-7rpa>x V(1) - 
dvaj3aii>co, dve(Saivu>, A. dvefinvov dvefinKa, subj. dvafta), aVe/3a>, or «W,3co, 

imperat. dvefia, dvej3dre, or dvefirjre, infin. dvafirj, part. dvafOds, coma 

or f/o up, ascend. 
dvafidvco, A. subj. dvafid\a>, (dra/3aXXco) mention. 
dvayivuxTKco, dvayvovco, dvayvccOco, A. dvdyvcaaa or dveyvco era. dveyvdoaBrjv, 

Pp. dvayvcjtrpivos , ran/. 
dvacrraiva , a va or/; jaw, A. dudo-rrjaa, dva(TTi)6r)v , Pp. dvaar-qpevos , (arai- 

va, 0T171/C0) raise from the dead, resuscitate. 
Mid, avaaralvopai, rise from the dead. 
dve[3aiuoo, see aVa/3aiVa> . 

aVotrrati/co, A. aVoarqcra or aVocrTT/va, Pp. dvoariipevos, (Jivocrros) fin- 
der insipid, become insipid-. 



VERBS. Ill 

arredaivo}', see diroOaivco. 

an epvco, see 7repva>. 

a7T€T(5, see 7rerc3. 

aTrodalvco, aTredalvco, a7rodur)(TKco, A. airoOava or dividava, infin. aTrodavei, 
part. a7ro^aj/a)i/, Pp. diroBapivos or diteQapkvos, die, be dying ; put 
to death. 

Pp. dnoOapivos or dneBapivos, dead. Substantively, a dead per- 
son : ol dncBapzvoi, the dead. 

d7roXapl3dvco, A. drroXavcra, dneXavaa, (XapfSdvco) enjoy. 

dnoXvco, dnoXco, -as, A. aTrdXvcra, (clttoXvco) let go, let loose. 

a7roo-ratj/a), dnn<jT<o, -as, A. diroaraaa, Pp. dnoarapsvos, (d.7TocrTr)vai) 
grow tired ; be tired. 

dps^oi, dpiaco, dpeaKoi, A. upecra, Pp. dpeapivos, please. 

as (({(pes), let, auxiliary. § 35. 

ou^a^co, av^cuuco, A. avtjwcra, av^i]6rjv, Pp. av^pevos, increase, grow. 

d(plva>, A. dcprjaa, dcprjaa or a(pr]Ka, A. Pass, dcpednv, Pp. d<pnpivos, 
(dcpinpi) leave, let. 

fidfa, l3dvco, A. efiaXa, iftdXOnv, Pp. fiaXphos, (/3 aXXcd) put, place. 

fidirTCx), fiasco, A. e/Scn/m, ej3d<pr]P, Pp. fiappevos, dye, Stain. 

fiapivopai, see (3apvvopai. 

fiapiovpai, see (3apa>. 

(Sapvvopai, fiapivopai, A. ej3apvvBrjv, (ftapvvco) be iceary, be tired of. 

/3apc3, -et?, A. efidpecra, ifiapiOnv, Pp. fiapepevos, (/3apeco) &e heavy. 
Mid. (Bapiovpai, -Uaai, be tired of. 

(3d(pa>, see (SdrrToo. 

(3yd£oc>, fiydvco, see e/3ya£a>. 

ftyaiva), see efiyaivw. 

(3Xa7rr(B, jSXdcprco, /3Xa/3w, A. e,3Xa\^a, i($Xa<pBnv, Pp. fiXappevos, injure, 
hurt, harm. 

(BXao-rdvcD, fiXacrTaivcD, A. ifiXdaTno-a, fo;f/, sprout. 

fiXinco, yXenco, A. ei^a, subj. iSco, i'Sco, imperat. i§e, tSey, plur. iSefe, 
infin. Z8et, part. i§<wi/, A. Pass. eftXecpdnv, Pp. (BXennpevos, see. 
In composition, A. efiXe\j/a, as dnifiXetya. 

(Bo(TK.i£a>, /3o<jK<5, -5s-, A. e(36aKT]cra, ejSoaK^Bvv^p. ftoannpevos, pasture, 
graze. % . 

(3ovtl£cd, (3ovtg3, -as, A. efiovTLaa, ej3ovrL^a, efiovTLxBnv, Pp. fiovriype- 
vos, fiovrnpevos, ((3v6i£cq) dip, immerse ; dive. 

(3pexo>, A. tf&pef-a, eftpdxnv. Pp. (Bpeypiuos, Wet. 
Bpe^et, & rains. 
Ta fipexapeva, between wind and water. (§42, 1.) 

(3pLO~KG>, fiplxvoj, sec eupicrKco. 

[3v£dva>, (3v£aivu>, A. e(3v£acra, i$v£a%a, Zfiv(dxBr]v, Tp. (3v£aypevos, (pv- 
Cd"a>) suckle ; suck. 

yhipvoi, A. Zyhapa, iyhdp&nv, Pp. yhappivos, (eKoepooi) fay, skin. 

yovvco, A. eycWa, eydvBrjv, Pp. yhvpivos, (eicbvpeo) strip naked, un- 
dress. 

Mid. yhvvopai, put off one's own clothes, undress one's self. 

yeXco, -as, A. eyeXaaa, iyeXda-Bnv, Pp. yeXaapivos, laugh. 

ykvopai, see ylvopai. 



112 VERBS. 

yepva>,yepva>, -as, yvpvco, A. eyvpa, Pp. yvppevos, (yvpds) incline, give a 

leaning to, lean on one side, 
yivopai, yevopai, A. eyiva, subj. yevco, ylvco, irnperat. yeve, yive, A. Pass. 

iylvnv, iyivrjKa, subj.yeyc5, yivco, irnperat. yivov, plur. yeuijre, Pp. ye- 

vcopevos, become. 
ykvTovu), A. iykvTaxra, Pp. y\vrcopevos, (e/cXvros) deliver, save, rescue; 

escape. 
j> y\v(o, A. eykvcra, (e/cXuco) deliver, save ; escape. 
bayKavco, etdynaaa, ihayKaaQ-qv, Pp. dayKaapevos, also 
SctKoVco, Say/coVo), A. edaKoxra, i§a.K<s>6nv, Pp. 8aKcop,evos, (Sawcc, SaKeu/) 

Sei^i/a), Set/era), A. e'6Vi|a, ideL^Bnv, Pp. Seiypsvos, (deLKvvoo, Beiicvvfju) 

show. 
Seven, A. eSeo-a, iheBnv, Pp. bepevos, (8ea>) bind, fasten, tie. 
depvco, A. edapa, eddpdrjv, Pp. bappevos, (67pa>) whip, flog. 

Mid. bepvopai, toil, 
bia^aiva, A. ibiefir)v, e'Sta/3^.<a, subj. 5ta/3d3 or bidfico, irnperat. bidfia, 
plur. Siapr/re, infin. biafir), part, biafids, pass by, pass through, jkiss 
over. 
bibdaKco, btbd)(vco, A. ibiba^a, ibibd)(6T]v, Pp. bibaypevos, teach, 
biboo, bivco, A. eScoKa or ebocra, subj. Scoko or So'crco, irnperat, SoVe or 
809, plur. doorere or Sore, infin. Socrei, A. Pass. ebodrjv, Pp. bopevos or 
boapevos, (blbcopi) give. 
di\jfa>, -as, A. idi\jrao-a, Pp. biyjsao-pevos, (Sn/z-ao)) Je thirsty. 
e/3ya£a>, ifiydvoo, /3ya£co, (Bydvoo, A. e(3ya\a, e(3yd\6rjv, Pp. (Sya\p.evos, 

(e/</3aXXa)) j9it£ ouf, jpwi ojf, ta£e ow£, ta£e q^! 
ifiyaivco, fiyaiva, A. eftyrJKa or ^/3ya, rarely cgepya, subj. e/3yco, e/3y(», 
or /3yco, irnperat. e/3ya, plur. iftyare, infin. e/Syi), (eV/3uiVa>) come out, 
go out. 
eftydvco, see £(3yd£co. 
eiba, see /3A.e7ra>. 

ef/xai, Imperf. ^/x?;i/, F. 0a ^/mi, 5<?. § 32, 2. 
et7ra, see Xeya). 
e'Xa, see epxopat. 

epfiaivco, ep7raiva>, UTrcuVco, A. epfirjica, epirrjKa, subj. e/x/3c5, epnco, 
irnperat. ep/3a, ep,7ra, plur. epfiare, epfirjre, or epirare, ep,nrJTe, infill- 
e/xjS^, part, epftds, enter, go in, come in. 
epnopco, see rjpTropw. 

evreaa, es, e, happened, happened to be, a defective aorist. 
evrpeiropai, A. eurpdirnv, (ev, rpe7rco) &e ashamed, be ashamed of; be 

diffident or bashful, 
e^evpeo, see r)£evpa>. 

enaLvai, naivco, -els or -a?, A. enaiveaa, erraivedr^v, Pp. e waive p,evos, 
(eVati/eca) praise. 

Mid. enaivovpai, praise one's self, pride one's self upon. 
eTTalpvu), see Tvaipvoz. 

epxopai, epdopai, A. jyX&i, ^p#a, subj. Tkdco, epdeo, e\6a>,epdG>, irnperat. 
e'Xa, eXare, come. 

[The imperative e'Xa, eXare, belongs to the classical e'Xao), eXavvco, 
drive.] 



VERBS. 113 

evplaKca, /Spicr^o), fipixvco, A. evprjKci, evpijKa, rjvpa, subj. evpco, evpai, '/3p<5> 
imperat. evpe, evpe, plur. evpere, evpere, evprjre, infin. eupet or cupel, 
part. evpa>v, A. Pass, evpednv, Pp. evpnp-evos, evpep.evos,Jind. 
ev^op-ai, A. ehyr)Qnv, bless, pray. 
e^oo, imperf. eiy/i, F. #a e^o, Aai - e. 
£co £7;? <j), plur. (wp.ev ^r/re ^axri (£bw)> Imperf. e£coi/ e^jys e^, plur. 

e£d>p,ev e^rjre e^cov, A. efya-a, ({a 05 ) ^" oe - 
Tjprropa, ip.7ropa), p.7ropco, -els, A. rjp.nopecra, (ev, Trope)?). &e a&/e, ca/2. 
ij^evpco, e^evpco, tjevpoi, £epco, Imperf. rj^evpa, (e^evpelv) know. 
6d or <9f, indeclinable, ibr all the parts of the auxiliary #eXa>. § 33, 4. 
^a.-rco, dd^rco, A. Wa^ra, A. Pass. idd(p8r)v, erd(pr]v,Y]). 6ap.p.evos, bury, 

inter. 
6avpd£co, 6ap.d£a, A. iBavuaaa, e0dp.a£a, A. Pass. edapd^dr/V equiva- 
lent to the active, Pp. 6avp.aap.kvos, iconder, be astonished at. 
6L see &i. 
#eXco, Imperf. fjdeXa, A. rjGeXvcra, subj. de\fjo-(o, imperat. BeXncre, infin. 

6eXi)o-ei.. part. 6eXr t aas, wish, leant: will, shall. § 33, 4. 
£er<», A.e#ecra, e6e<a. Pp. Oep.hos, (ri6r]p.i, Oelvai) put, place. 
Opscpco, rpsepco. A. e8pe\l/a, A. Pass. edpdcpBrjv, erpdcprjv, Pp. 6pep.p.evos, 

feed, nourish. 
I'Sco, see fiXeirco. 

Ka6i£a>, A. iKuSiaa e.<aro~a. Pp. KaOicrp-evos, sit; seat. 
KaOopai (Kadrjpat), sit, defective. 
mi<o, Kaiyco, navai, A. etcavtra (e/ca-vp-a), eKanv, Pp. Kap.evos, burn. 

Pp. Ka'ip.evos, ov, rj, miserable, icretched, poor, dear, usually denot- 
ing tenderness or pity. For at, see § 2, 2 ; 7,3. 
KaXa>, -els, A. exaXefra, ex.aXeo~8qv, Pp. KaXeo~p.evos, invite. 
Kap.va>, Kap.a>, Kavco, A. e/capa, Pp. Kapcopevos, make, do. 
Kara^aivco, KarejSaLvco, A. Karejjrjv, eKarefirjKa, subj. Kara/3c3, Kare^co, 
Kare,3a>, imperat. Karefia, plur. Karefidre, Karefirjre, infin. KaTafirj, 
Karefir), part. Karafids, come down, go down. 
Kavco, see kcu'co. 

Kepba'iva), A. eKephntra, Pp. Kep8rjp.evos, also 

Kepdifa, A. eKspdi^a, Pp. Kep8tcrp.evos or Kephiyp.evos, gain, win, earn. 
kXou'co, /cXaryco. A. eKkavaa (eK.Xa\j/a), iceep. 

Mid. Kkaiopai, complain. 
Kpep.vco, Kpep.5), -as, Kpep.dya>, Kpep.d£a>, A. eK.pep.acra, eKpep-dcrdnv, Pp. 
Kpepacrp.evos, (Kpepdvvvp.i) hang. 

Mid. Kpep.vi6p.ai, suspend one's self, take hold of. 
Kpepop-ai (Kpep.ap.ai), hang, be hanging. 

KpVfiai, KpvTTTO), A. eKpv\j/a, A. Pass. eKpixpdrjv, eKpvfir)8nv, Pp. Kpvp.- 
p.evos, Kpvj3r]p.evos, hide, conceal. 

Mid. Kpvfiopai, hide one's self, simply 7<i<7<?. 
kuXo5, -a?, A. eKvXicra, eKvXiadrjv, Pp. KvXio~p.evos, (kuXio>) ?*oW. 

Mid. Kv\iovp.ai, -teo-ai, roll one's self. 
KVTTa^co, kvttco, -as, A. eKVTTatja, eKVTrdyQrpj, Pp. KVTrayp.evos, (ku- 

7TTa£a> ? ?) .see. 
Xafiaivco, Xap.,3dvco, A. eXa/3a, subj. Xa/3co, imperat. Xa/3e } infin. Xa/3ei, 
part. Xaficov, A. Pass. eXr]<p6nv, take, receive. 
10* 



114 VERBS. 

"Xavdo.vojj.ai, A. e\av6do~8r]v, Pp. Xavdaapevos, mistake, be mistaken. 

Xn^atVa), A. e\a%a, part. Xa^oiv, (Xay^aVco) happen, befall, hit. 

Xeyco, A. elira rarely elrrr/Ka, subj. cwro>, elnoZ, imperat. elne, clnes, -ne, 

TTes, plur. €L7T€T€, A. Pass, elneodnv, rarely elnrjdvv, say, tell. 
/xaSt^co, pa8d>, -as or -els, A. epddcaa, ipahiaOnv, Pp. p.adnp.evos, pluck, 

as a fowl, 
/xa^ev'co (6/iaSet'co), regular. Also 
/xa^oVto, A. e/xa£a)£a, epao-a, A. Pass, epa^xdnv, Pp. pafapivos, gather, 

collect, 
padaivco, fxavdavco, fj.a6a.vco, A. epaOa, part, p.ada>v, Pp. paOnpevos, learn / 

teach. 
fjedco, -as, A. cfxedvora, Pp. pedvapevos, (pedveo) be drunk, get drunk, 
ixekei, it concerns, it is a care to. 

pevco, fiveo~Kco, /j,vio~k.o>, A. epeiva, Pp. peivepevos, remain. 
fxrjvco, -as, A. eprjvvaa, ipnvvQifV, Pp. prjvvp,evos, (fxnvvco) give notice, 

send icord to. 
pveo-KG), see peva. 
vd (fjv, Tjvi), lo ! behold! see! see there ! 

As a verb, i/a, plur. pare, there it is ! tedee ! 
tjepvco, -as, A. e^epacra, i^epdadijv, Pp. £epacrp,evos, (e'^epaco) vomit, 

puke. 
£epa), ^evpco, see r]£evpa>. 
^xdvco, £ex v "' £ e X<"' ~? ? > A* e|e^a(ra, Pp. ^exacrpevos, ^xapivos, forget. 

Pp. ^exacrpevos, ^xapevos, stupid, adjectively. 
£wa>, £ug3, -els, P. e£ucra, i^vaOnv, Pp. £vcrpevos, (£vcd) scratch, as the 

skin for the sake of relieving irritation. 
Mid. ^vvopai, ^vovpai, scratch one's self, 
opovco, dpovco, opveoo, A. opoaa, (opvvoo) Sicear. 
Trayaivco, inrayaivco, irayoo, naco, rravoi, TTnyaivoo, A. inrjya, vTrrjya, ijrd- 

yncra, subj. vndyco, Trdyco, Pp. Ttayaipevos, Trnyaiuevos, (v7rdya>) go. 
77a6aivoo, A. enada, part. iraBozv, (jraOelv) suffer. 
iralpvoa, formerly iiraipvoo, A. iirrjpa, subj. Trdpoo, imperat. enape, nape, 

A. Pass, irropdnv, Pp. irappevos, (eVntpco) fafo?. 
7rau&), cease, regular. A. Pass. subj. dva-nabl), dva-nayco, rare for dva- 

7rav8a>. 
Traxevoi, A. eirdxwa, (jraxvvo)) fatten. 
7re6aivco, see aTToOaivui. 
vreivco, -as, A. eifeivacra, Pp. 7veivacrp.evos, hunger, be hungry. 

Pp. ireivacrpevos, ov, 7/, hungry, adjectively. 
TrepvcD, dnepvoo, -as, A. inepacra, direpacra, Pp. irepaapevos, dnepacrpevos, 

pass. 

7T€tco, dneTco, -as, A. enera^a, iireTaxG^v, {ncrdopai) fly like a bird. 

Mid. -neriovpai, -ucrai, equivalent to the active. 
7T€to), -as, A. e7T€Ta£a, Pp. Tterapevos, throw aicay, cast, cast out. 
7Tc(pT(d, A. eneaa, Pp. Treapevos, (jriiTTa>) fall. 
7Tnyaiv(o, see Tvayaivco. 

TTidvoj, A. i'mao-a, inuio-dnv, Pp. 7naapevos, (ttu^co, 7na£oo) catch. 
ttivo), A. eVta, fjma, subj. tti'co, 7ria>, imperat. nu, ttu, infin. 7rtet, part. 
7tlo)v, A. Pass. iiroOnv, inioBrfv, Pp. mopevos, drink. 

Pp. mopevos, ov, rj, drunk, intoxicated, adjectively 



VERBS. 115 

nXevco , ttXvvco, A. en\vva, eTrXvdrjv, Pp. ifkvpevos, wash, cleanse, as clothes, 

the hands, or the feet. 
rfkew, 7rXeya>, A. eVXeucra, eVXe^a, float. 
7ri>ea>, A. errvevcra, breathe, 
irviyco, A. eirvi^a, A. Pass. iiivtxOr}V, enviyrjv, Pp. nviypevos, choke, 

strangle ; drown. 
7rote3, -els-, A. enoiKa, eiroiKa, eiroicra, male, do Obsolete. 
ttovco, -els, A. enoveaa, Pp. novepevos, ache- 
nprjcTKOfiaL, A. eir pr\o-&r\v , Pp. Trpnupevos, (jrprjOco) swell, being swollen, 

as applied to a living being. 
palvco, A. eppava, sprinkle, sprinkle on. 
paiiTO). pdcprco, A. eppava, A. Pass, eppdcpdrjv, eppdcpnv, Pp. pappevos, 

sew. 
prj^vco, pf]KTGi, A. eppnga, eppr}y6r\v, Pp. prjypevos, (prjyvvpi) throw, cast, 
(rairi^a), A. iaaTvicra, Pp. craTuorpevoSi o-cnrnpevos, (ar]7ra>, eadnnv) rot. 
aenupai ((nj 7r0p.cn), rot. 
aipvco, avpvco, aovpvco, A. eavpa, l<jvpBr\v, Pp. crvppeuos, (crupco) drag, 

draw, pull. 
cttjkovu), acrnK-ovco, ctkovco, A. ecrrjicoocra, ecrr)K.codr)v, Pp. anKcopevos, (gtjkoco) 
raise, lift. 

Mid. a-rj<6vopai, rise, imperat. 2 pers. sing. arjKov, ar)ica>. 
a-piyco, A. ecrpig'a, e<7p.ix0rjv, Pp. upiypevos, (picryai, piyvv<£) mix, 

unite, 
aovpvco, see crepvco. 
cnrd£(x>, (Jiidvd), A. ecnzacra., Pp. cnracrpevo?, ((maco) break. 

Pp. tnrao-pevos, ov, rj, ruptured, ajflicted with the hernia, adjec- 
tively. 
anepvoi, A. ecnreipa, emrapdnv, Pp. (rrvappivos, (o7reipa>) SOW. 
a7rpcoxvo), A. ecnrpco^a, io-Trpoix^nv, Pp. anpcoypevos, (jrpomdeai) push. 
[Petrus Patkicius, p. 126, 5 dtrcoypevov, for diraxTpevov, imply- 
ing the root <ay-.] 
crraivco, (tttjvco, A. earncra, ecrTrjBrjv, Pp. arnpivos, (Jarnpi, (TTrjvaC) 

erect, place in an erect position. 
(TTeKco, imperat. arena, are/care, A. eo-rdOnv, (larnpi, eorvKa) stand ; 

be. 
areXvco, A. eoTetXa, ecrraXOnv, Pp. araXpevos, (oreXXco) senJ. 
crTT)va>, see araiPCD. 

(TTpeCpa>, A. ecrrpex/m, earpdcpwv, turn. 

avpfiaivei, A. i awe fin, awe fin, subj. avpfifj, infin avpfirj, it happens, 
avpco, see aepvoo. 
(Kpiyyco, imperat. acp'iyye or acpiyya, A. eacpL^a, eacpixdnv, Pp. cr<pi- 

ypevos, bind tight, squeeze. 
rpafia>, -ay, rpafiifa, A. erpdfiiq'a, irpafiix^nv, Pp. rpafiiypevos, (Latin 
t r a h o) draw, drag, pull. 

Mid. rpafiiovpat., withdraw, retrace one's steps 
rpepco, Imperf. erpepa, tremble. 
Tpe'7rco, A. erpepa, eTpdrrnv, turn, 
rpecpco, see &pe<pa>. 
rpepco, imperat. rpexa, rpexdre, A. erpepa, run. 

Mid. part. Tpexovpei/or, rpexdpevos, running, adjectively. 



116 verbs; 

rpcoyco, A. ecpaya, part. (paycov, A. Pass. i<payto6r}v, Pp. (paycopivos, 
eat, devour. 

Mid. rpcoyovrai, quarrel with. 
Tvxatvcj, A. eru^a, (ruy^dj/co, ri^eli/) happen, 
vndyco, see Trayaivco. 

VTroaxofJ-at, A. vneax^nv, v7roa-xi6rjKa, promise. 
(pay a>, see rpoayco. 

(patvopat, A. £(pdpr)v, appear, seem. 

(peXco, -ay, A. i(peXecra, (dxpeXeco) benefit, do good : get on in the world. 
(pepvco, A. ecpepa, i<pipdr)v, Pp. cpepp.ii/os, (cpepco) bring, carry. 

Mid. (pipuopai, conduct one's self, behave. 
(pevycc, imperat. (pevye, (pevya, plur. (pevyare, A. e<pvya, part. <puya>i>, 

flee. 
(pSeidvco, (pTtiavco, (pKetdvco, A. e<p6eiacra, etpOeLaaOrjv, Pp. (pBeiacrpivos, 
(jEvQeia) make. 

[Formed from evBela after the analogy of TrXareta^co from TrXareia. 
' K. 868 evOvaaQfj, write evSeiacrOjj.'] 
Xctipopai, part. ^atpa/ J ie^os-, x a P°^P euos J A. ^X^P r i v i (x" 1 '/ 000 ) rejoice, be 

glad, enjoy, enjoy ones self. 
XaXvco, xaAco, -as, A. ^^aXcio-a, exdXdcrdr]v, Pp. xaXaapevos, (^aXa'a)) 

destroy, ruin, demolish. 
Xav&i A. e^acra, exdSrjv, Pp. ^a/zei/o?, (^aoa>) /a?e: destroy. 

Pp. ^a^aevos, oy, 7;, a worthless person, substantively. § 7, 3. 
xdcvKco, imperat. ^acnca, A. e^aa-K^cra, gape. 
Xopraivco, A. e'xopracra, Pp. ^opracr/ieVos, (xoprd£co) satiate. 
y\fivco, \j/r]vco, A. e^rjcra, i-^n'jOrjv, Pp. 4n-jpepos, roast, parch. 



SYNTAX 



SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 

Nominative. 
§ 46. 

1. In fashionable style the second person plural 
is used for the singular. 

Has e'x fre ! How do you do ? Has elade ; How are you f Tt m- 
fivere ; How do you do ? or What are you doing ? 

2. The number and person of a verb agreeing 
with a title of honor or respect is determined by 
the genitive of the personal pronoun following 
that title. 

'Ayiaavvn, r}, Reverence, strictly Holiness, of priests, used chiefly by 
the uneducated. 

AldeaifJLOTTjs, rj, Reverence, . of married priests. 'H albecrifj-orvs 
aov ri \iyeis els tovto ; What does your Reverence say to this ? C H 
albeaifioTrjs rav 8ev to iyKpivovai, Their Reverence does not approve 
of it. Corresponding adjective 6 aldeo-L^aTaros, Reverend, literally 
Most Reverend. 

'Acpevreid, f], Lordship, Ladyship, Worship. Obsolete or obso- 
lescent. 

'Evdogorrjs, r), Eminence, of princes. Corresponding adjective 6 
ivho^oTaTos, Most Eminent. 

'Evtihottjs, 17, Honor, of public functionaries. Corresponding adjec- 
tive 6 evTL[ios, Honorable. 

'E^oxorns, f), Excellency, of ministers of state. Formerly, of physi- 
cians. Corresponding adjective 6 e^ox^raros. 

Evyevta, Nobility {Noblesse), of gentlemen in general. 'H evyevla 
eras ri \eyere ; What does your Nobility say ? Tt elnev tj evyevia tov ; 
What did the gentleman say ? 



118 SYNTAX. 

AoytoTrjs, r), Learning, Scholarship, of scholars. Corresponding 
adjective 6 Xoytcoraros. 

Aoyov, rod, followed by the enclitic genitive of the personal pro- 
noun, forms a pronominal phrase denoting respect. It is used chiefly 
as nominative or accusative. Efam rov XSyov aov 6 Kcipapozvpis ; 
Are you the captain, sir? ILov etve rov \6yov rov ; Where is the gen- 
tleman? — After did, for, rov is commonly omitted. Aev ehai bia 
Xoyov (tov, This is not for you. 

[Compare Porpiiyuogenitus, do Them. p. 72. 'kva&nv em^rfTovai 
■£evdXia luava, oi \xlv oxides aXXa pey Xoyco avraiv, kol (iXXa Ao'yoj 
rcoy avratu yvvaiKcov.] 

Maaaptorns, r), Beatitude, of the patriarchs of Alexandria, Antioch, 
and Jerusalem, of the Pope of Rome, and of the archbishop of Cyprus. 
Corresponding adjective, 6 p.axapid>rarcs. For the title of the patri- 
arch of Constantinople, see HavayiorrjS. 

MeyaXecorrjs, r), Majesty. C H avrov avroKparopLKi) p.eyaXeu'r7]s 6 
"2ovXrdv Maxp-ovr Xav %api£ei els rovs dvrdpras TrXrjprj dp.vrj(rriav, Ihs 
Imperial Majesty Sultan Mahmud Khan grants plenary amnesty to the 
rebels. C H avrtjs peyaXeLorrjs i] ^aaiXicraa rr)s MeydXrjs Bperavias eXaj3e 
peydXrjv evxapio-rnaiv, Her Majesty the Queen of Great Britain feet ived 
great satisfaction. Corresponding adjective 6 peyaXeioraros, r) peya- 
Xeiordrr)- 

c 6o-l6tt]s, rj, Sanctity, of monks Corresponding adjective, 6 oaioi- 
raros. 

Havayiorns, r), All-Holiness, of the patriarch of Constantinople. Cor- 
responding adjective, 6 navayiooraros. It is the highest ecclesiastical 
title. 

Uavteporns, r), All- Sacred n ess, of bishops. Corresponding adjectives, 
6 7ravL€pd>raTos, of metropolitans and archbishops ; of suffragan bish- 
ops 6 OeocpiXeararos. 

Uavoo-i6rr,s, fj, Ail-Sanctity, of monk-priests (Upopdvaxoi) • Corre- 
sponding adjective, 6 Travoaiooraros. 

Ti/mottis, r), Respectability, of gentlemen. Corresponding adjective, 
6 ripaoiraros- Obsolescent. 

c Y\lrr]X6rrjS, r), Highness. C H avrov v^rjXorrjs 6 p.eyas (Se&prjs Fealr 
7rao-as, His Highness the Grand Vizer Resliid Pasha. Corresponding 
adjective, 6 v\l/rjXoraros. 

3. A collective noun in the singular sometimes 
takes the verb in the plural. 

6a p-ds Karr/yoprjcrovv 6 Koo~p.os, The world wUl censure us. To abik- 
cpdrov o-vvd(opLev Sta rb cnnrdXi, We the brotherhood (trustees) collect 
for the hospital. 

4. The subject of verbs denoting the state of 
the weather, or the operations of nature, is not ex- 
pressed. 



SYNTAX. 119 

'AcrTpciTTTeL, ao-rpaTrre, ija-Tpairre, A. ucrrpa^e, ijo-rpa^e, it lightens. 
Bpadeid^et, it grows late, it draws towards night, A. ifipddeiao-e, it 
is late: it is evening. 

Bpe^et, e^pa^e, A. e/3pe£e, it rains. 

Bpovra, ifipovrovcre, A. ijSpovTTjcre, it thunders. 

KaXooavvevei, it is clearing off, A. iKaXcoo-vvevae, it has cleared off. 

2K0T€Lvid^€i, it grows dark, A. e cr score [viaae, it is dark. 

2ovpov7Tuv€t, A. iaGvpov7Tova€, equivalent to the preceding. 

<&eyyei, it grows towards daylight, A. e<pe,£e, it is dag. 

Xapd£ei, it is dawning, A. ixdpa^e, it has dawned. 

Xiovi£ei, e)(i6vi£e, A.. e^dvLcre, it snows. 

5. MeXec, it concerns, it is a care to any one, 
appears without a subject. 

TeXeicos 8ev pe peXei, I do not care at cdl. Tlirore SeV tovs p-iXei, 
They do not care a straw. 

6. The copula el ^a i, to he, is sometimes omitted. 

To Trpaypa koXov, Sez/ e^et op.cos 7repao~iv, The article is good, but there 
is no demand for it. ^YTTepTrXovrtaa to edvos' p-dprvpes oi dbiX<pol p.ov, 
I hare greatly enriched the nation; ivitness my brothers. KaXo kcu 
airo, Pretty thing this! 

7. The nominative without a verb is used in 
designating an object without asserting anything 
concerning it. 

Xpv(ro(TT6p,nv ra cirravTa, Clirysosionis V/orJcs; Chrysostomi Opera 
Onnda- To Spapa ol 'Enra errl Qrjfias, The play, " The Seven against 
Thebes." c O 7rXoiapxos rrjs yoXeras // 'Ewco, The captain of the schooner 
Ehio. 

8. Two or more nominatives in the singular or 
plural, connected by /cat, and, expressed or under- 
stood, take the verb in the plural and in the chief 
person, which is the first in relation to the second 
and third, and the second in relation to the third. 

The verb, however, admits of agreeing with the 
nominative which stands nearest to it, without re- 
gard to the number of the other nominatives. 

'Eyco ko\ crv k eKelvrj eTrepnraTov(rap.ev, I and thou -and site were v;alh- 
ing. 'Ecu kcu civtus k' exetz/o to TratSi 8a (pvyere, TJtou and he and 



120 SYNTAX. 

that boy will go away. Kal ra £aa ml to. cpvTa e'xovv fco^i/, Both ani- 
mals and plants have life. 

Qa x a @!l s * a v> ^7"' V t 1 " '^ 1 ?? Thou and I and the state shall perish. 
"AyvaxTTos eive Kal 6 tokos Kal 6 xpovos, Both the place and the time are 
unknown. 

9. A nominative in the singular followed by 
fie, with, takes the verb in the singular or 
plural. 

e O Kapa(3oKvpi$ /ue tovs owTpocpovs rov e/xeive e/cei, The captain with 
his crew remained there. *0 Ka-nndvios p.e ra 7raX\nKdpia rov eKTVirnaav 
tovs TovpKovs, The chieftain with his men attacked the Turks. 

10. When two or more nominatives of differ- 
ent persons are separated by rf, either, or, ovre, 
neither, nor, firjre, neither, nor, the verb agrees 
with the most prominent nominative, and is un- 
derstood after the rest. 

*H rip-cls 6a xa0e3juei>, f) eKelvoi, Either we shall perish, or she will. 
OvTe o~v rjaovv e/cet, ovt cko-vol, Neither thou wast there, nor were they. 
Mrjre civtos, firjTe aels va nnyalveTe, Neither must he nor you go. Ovt 
avTos bev top eiSe, ovt€ ami}, Neither he nor she saw him. 

11. When two or more nominatives in the third 
person singular are separated by ovre or p-nre, the 
verb admits of being put in the plural, provided it 
precede or follow all these nominatives. 

Aev tou eldav ovTe tovtos, ovt eKe[vr), Neither he nor she saic him. 
Ovtc tovtos, ovt €Ke7vos Bev to eo-ToxdcrOrjo-av, Neither this man nor that 
man thought of it. 



Position of the Predicate. 

12. The nominative regularly precedes its verb, 
as in English. 

It is, however, commonly (not always) put after 
the verb, when the predicate is more prominent 
in the mind of the speaker ; as 



ADJECTIVES. 121 

Uoios eive alros ; Who is he ? Hov irrjyaiveis i<rv ; Whither are 
you (emphaticallv) going ? Elaai BovXyaprjs ff BXa^os ; Are you a 
Bulgarian, or a Wallachian f 

"Epetve 6 Aidicos *s tt) (fxoTia. fie SeKo^Tcb Xcftevres, Dhidkos with eigh- 
teen braves remained in the heat of battle. KaXt) eiW r\ pvcprj pas, povov 
€iv€ orpafirjj Beautiful is our bride, only she is blind. 



ADJECTIVES. 

§ 47. 

1. An adjective, whether attributive or predica- 
tive, agrees with its substantive in gender, num- 
ber, and case. 

Attributive. Kakos avBpunros, more formal "AvSpanos naXos, A 
good man. Tov kclkov fiao-iXea, The bad king. 

Predicative. EtSa tov ovpavb 6oXb kcu t acrrpa pM.rwp.eva, I saw the 
heaven (being) overcast, and the stars bloody ; that is, the heaven was 
overcast. 

*Eyive KLTpivos, He has become yellow (pale). Qa ylvrj agios, He 
will become worthy. 

c O fjXios fiyr}<e kokklvos, The sun has come out red. 

'O avOp<onos elve Kakos, The man is good. To cratpa clve vXlkov, The 
body is material. Holos elv ticelvos ; Who is that man f 

Mas ypd* 7j avoit-t niKprj, to KaXoKaipi pavpo, The spring has come to 
us bitter, the summer black. *Hpda Trends, I came on foot. Tov ijvpa 
favravov, I found him alive. Eiya^ to. yeveia tovs paicpid, They had 
their beards long ; that is, Their beards were long. Tov efyai/ dicpifiov, 
They considered him dear ; He was dear to them. Tov e$ay\rav £a>vra- 
vov, They buried him alive. 'Erac^ favravos, He was buried alive. 
Kcipe to Kifiovpi pov nXaTv, Make my grave broad. Tpels rjpepas eica/xa 
vrjariKT], I fasted three days. 

To KaTeo~TT)o-ev an6p6r)Tov, He rendered it impregnable. "EpaBa yv- 
p.v6s k ivrpeiropai evdvpevos, I have learned to live naked, and therefore 
am ashamed to appear clad. 2<papeva to. perpovpe, We count them as 
butchered. 

Tov vopi£ovv Tpikov, They consider him insane. No/xi£erai TpeXos, 
He is considered insane. To voptfa avoarov, I deem it disgusting. Toiis 
to Vai^ey KaXov, You have played it well for them ; Served them right. 
'E7rfjya neCos, I went on foot. 2re*w opOos, lam standing erect. 
11 



122 ADJECTIVES, 

2. The number and gender of an adjective in 
the predicate, in certain polite expressions, is de- 
termined by the number and gender implied in 
the subject. 

C H evyevla o-as elaOe TvpoQvuos (jrpoOv^oL), Your nobility is eager. 
Eiade KaXaTciTGs, You are very good. 

3. When an adjective or adverb is repeated 
without any intervening word, it has the force of 
the superlative. 

Mia y^r/krj ^rfKr] KpepdOpa, A very high gallows. UepLirarel dyaXia 
dydXia, He walks very slowly. 

4. If an adjective refers to two or more substan- 
tives, it is put in the plural and in the leading 
gender, which is the masculine in relation to the 
feminine and neuter, and the feminine in relation 
to the neuter. 

Oi avbpes Kai al yvvcuK.es kcll ra Traihla aKOvaavres ravra dvex^pijcrav, 
The men and the ivomen and the children having heard these things de- 
parted. At yvvcuK.es kcu to. iraibla aKovo~ao~aL ravra ep,eivav, The women 
and children having heard these things remained. 

(1) If the substantives denote inanimate things, 
the adjective is regularly put in the neuter 
plural. 

*H no\v(pay'ia Ka\ 17 7ro\v7roo~la eive j3\a7TTiKa rrjs vyeias, Excess in 
eating and hard drinking are injurious to health. 'H yrj Kal oi Xidoi 
ovra d\j/vxa dev eive avroKivnra, Earth and stones being inanimate ob- 
jects are not self-moved. 

(2) The adjective admits of agreeing in gender 
with the nearest substantive. 

c idpu>s Kal to aip.a ov 7rpoaKo\Xr]p.evoVf The sweat and the blood ad- 
hering. 



APPOSITION. 123 



Comparative Adjectives. 

§ 48. 

The comparative with the article before it has 
the force of the superlative. 

'O x et porepo9 avdpanos tov K.6o~p.ov, The ivorst man in the world. 'O 
nkiov rifiKarepos avOpconos tov Koarp.ov, The most honorable man in the 
world. 



APPOSITION. 

§ 49. 

1. A substantive annexed to another substantive 
or to a pronoun, whether attributively or predica- 
tively, is (by apposition) put in the same case, if 
it refers to the same person or thing. 

Attributively. 'G vop.oi.6dov evprjp-a!' laws, invention divine! 
C H ayta 2o<pia, to p.eya p.ovao-Tr\pt, Saint Sophia, the great monastery. 
'Eyco '/wu 6 Yidvvns rov 2ra0a, yap.npbs rov MnovKovfiaha, I am John, 
the son of Stathas, son-in-law of Bukubhdlas. To npcoTo tov naibl, puicpo 
7raXXrjKapaKi, His eldest son, a young lad. Xrjpa Tovpua, A Turkish 
widow. Kvp NaVo Ttpoeo-Te, Mr. primate Ndsos. 

Na p.o'v kvttcl^ovv to nai&l, to p.avpo p.ov Arjp.r)Tpi, They may look 
after my boy, my poor Dhimitris. Oi TovpKoi e<pevyav nefavpa kou Ka- 
/3aAXa, The Turks fled, foot and horse. C H KaniTavio-o-a vvcpn tov Kov- 
Toyidvvr), The captainess, the daughter of Kondoghidnis. To xPW T0 > T °v 
KaniTav Mikiovr), Khrxstos Milionis the chieftain. 

Na oreiXere ttjv £ayopa p,ia eicaTOOTr) novyyia aanpa, You must send 
one hundred purses of money for (as) the ransom. At'Sei cpopov dvo 
TaKapa tov p,rjva, He pays a tax (fine) of two dollars a month. Awpea 
kKorov dpaxp-di, A reward of one hundred drachmas. 

Predicatively. Tov dnedaga ^revo-rnv, I have proved him a liar ; 
J have convicted him of falsehood. 'hntheLxGn ^vo-ttjs, He has been 
convicted of lying. 

Bake tcl x*P La o~ov Kovirta, to. o~Tr]6n aov TipAvt, Make thy hands oars y 
thy breast a rudder. T6 banpv p.ov /3dVa> vcpo, I use my tears as a sub- 
stitute for water. 

"E-yive nanus, He has become a priest. "Eyti/e /co/i/xarta, Was broken 



124 APPOSITION. 

to pieces. Tt va yivnice 6 Xprjo-Tos 6 MtKiovns ; What do you imagine 
has become of Khristos Milidnis f Ot KXecpres yivrjicav /zd£o>£i /cat 
yivnicav fiirovkovKi, The Klephts assembled together and formed one 
body. 

'EdiopiaOrj dpxnyds, He was appointed leader. 'EftyrJKe KkttpTns, 
He has turned Klepht. . 

Avtos elve fiaaikevs, He is a king. Tt eive to ovopd <rov ; What is 
your name f Ti elve tovto ; What is this f Tt irpaypa etW 6 cridrjpos ; 
What is iron f 

'ErrayyeWeTo "Ayykos, He called himself an Englishman. 

Tiacra e%ei 6 Aid/cos to o-na&'i, j3e£ipr) to Tov<p£ni, Llidkos has the sword 
for Ids pasha, the gun for his vizer ; that is, The sword of Llidkos is his 
pasha, his sword is his vizer. "Exec avdpa TraWnicdpi, Her husband is 
a young man. "E^et to. pdyovka cpcoTid, Her cheeks are a substitute for 
fire. ILoibs e^ei a-Trjdrj pdppapo ; Who has a breast of marble ? 

Zg3, live. Zfj pay ids eKeivcov, He lives as their subject. M77 pe Bap- 
pr)Te viow(prj vvcf>rj, Regai^d me not as a bride just married. Gecopetrat 
ao(p6s, He is counted as a wise man. 

Tov Kapvovv fiacriXea, They make him a king. Ta 'icapa Tpeis X"^ L ~ 
dbes, I made them three thousand. Tou cicafiav mppdria, They made 
him pieces ; They cut him to pieces. 

Oct KarauTTjo-ovv ovcXd/3oi, They will become slaves ; Tliey will be re- 
duced to slavery. Na o~e nepvdyco fiao~ikia, prjya va a ovopd^co, To hand 
the cup to thee as a king, to call thee sovereign. Kat rcbpa Keiropai *s ttj 
yi] KoppX bLxus KecpdXtf And now I am lying on the ground, a body with- 
out a head. 

T6v Xeyovv Mi^dX^, They call him Mikhdlis. Aeyerai Mixd\ns, He 
is called Mikhdlis. "Epeive neTol Kal kokoXo, He is nothing but skin and 
bones ; literally, He has remained skin and bone. Tov vopifa K\e7rnjv, 
I deem him a thief Tov ovopao-av'loodvvnv, They called him John. 'Ovo- 
pd^erai 'ltodvvns, He is called John. 

'En-rjpe o-*Xd/3o tov narr}, He has taken the cadi as a prisoner. 2/cXa- 
/3oy payidhav «recre, He has become a prisoner of the raghids (subjects). 
Tlpoa-icvvnTr] pe crTciXave '« ev aXXo povao-rrjpi, Tliey sent me as a pil- 
grim to another monastery. 

2dv Bepia-Trjs €<pdvnKe, He appeared like a reaper. 

Tov ix^ipoTovno-av irpeo-fivTepov, They ordained him presbyter. 'E;(f 1- 
poTovrjBrj TTpeo-fivrepos, He was ordained presbyter. 2e y^rjcpi^ei ^0X7-771/, 
She appoints thee her singer. 

2. Gav/jba, wonder, in certain connections has 
the force of davfiao-ro^ wonderful, admirable. 

Eti>e Bavpa o-Ti\ovpx6s, He is a wonderful versifier. Et^e Bavpa cu- 
yXaTTiav, He had a wonderful degree of eloquence. 

3. The thing measured, weighed, or otherwise 



THE ARTICLE. 125 

estimated is put in apposition with the noun de- 
noting the measure, weight, or amount. 

"Eva ^apeXi fioaxaro 2a/xta>riKo, A barrel of Samian muscat wine. To 

/3apeXi to fj-oaxdro to Sa/itcoriico, The barrel of Samian wine. Aena 

fiapcXia Kpacrl 2K07reXiVt/co, Two casks of Skopelowine. Ta Se/ca fiapeXta 

to 2Kojre\iTiKo Kpao~i, The ten barrels of Skopelo wine. "Eva fiapeXi 

v p)Xa, A barrel of apples. To fiapeki to. p}Xa, The barrel of apples. 

Words to which this rule applies are fiape\i, barrel, cask, Papua, 
boatful, fiovKKid, mouthful, yafidda, bowl, dpdp.i, dram, ^vydpi, pair, 
£vyr}, pair, Ka'iiad, boatful, icapafiid, shipful, navici, cup, KecpdXi, head, 
Kkoivdpi or kXcovl, branch, Kop.p.dTi, piece, Konrj, flock, Xirpa, pound, p.iro- 
K.d\i, bottle, \moTikia, bottle, 6nd, oka or oke, iv^xi^ ^l* m6ap,r), span, 
TTiaTo, dish, plate, ifkaKa, slab, cake of anything, irkrjBos, abundance, 
plenty, noTrjpi, cup, novyyi, purse, pi£a, root, o-aKici, sack, bag, o~aKKov\a, 
purse, Tpovfids, satchel, TaavaKi, dish, (povKTa or (povKTid, handful, <povp- 
vid, ovenful, and the like. 

4. A substantive in apposition with two or 
more substantives or personal pronouns is put in 
the plural and in the same case. 

'HpoSoros Kal Qov-Kvbidrjs oi IcrropiKoi, Herodotus and Thucydides 
the historians. 



THE ARTICLE. 

§ *•• 

1. A noun denoting a species, genus, family, 
class, or any of the kingdoms of nature, takes the 
article. 

c O av3pa>7ros tive £<oov h'nrovv, Man is a two-footed animal. To a-ndpi 
ehe 6pe7TTLK<x>T€pov duo to KpiOdpi, Wheat is more nutricious than bar- 
ley. l O Kanvbs elve i\a<ppoTepos dno tov depa, Smoke is lighter than 
air. Ta. £a>a KivovvTai, Animals move ; have the power of locomotion. 
'O yl/(op.ds £vp,6vei, The baker kneads ; it is his trade to knead. 

2. Abstract nouns and names of sciences take 
the article. 

'H fJL€0T] eu/e pavla dXtyoxpouios , Drunkenness is madness of short 
11* 



126 THE ARTICLE. 

duration. e H dXr}0eia elve pta, Truth is one. *H (movbr) tt}? Yeape- 
rplas, The study of Geometry. 

3. Proper names generally take the article ; as, 
6 rewpyios, George, rj 'AyyeXuca), Angelica. 

4. The article admits of preceding Belva or rdSe, 

KaOels, toiovtos, rocros. 

Tov cldes tov belvu (or tov -rade) ; Have you seen such a one 1 "Hpovv 
els to ra.de ^copto, / was at such a place. SvpftovXevco tov KaBiva va 
yevrj nXovaios, I advise every one to become rich. Kara rr)v ai-iav tov 
TvpeireL va Tipdrat 6 icaOeva?, Every one should be honored according to 
his worth. Tt tovs enapve toxjs toiovtovs ; What was he in the habit of 
doing to such persons ? 'H Toarj rapa;^, This great tumulL 

5. When a noun, which has just preceded, 
would naturally be repeated, the article belonging 
to it is alone expressed. 

'O lirnos pov ical 6 tov ddeXcpov pov, My horse and that of my brother. 

Some writers, following the idiom of Western Europe, use itcetvos 
for the article. 

To nXolov pov Kol itcelvo tov (fi[\ov pov, My vessel and that of my 
friend. 

6. "When the masculine article is followed by a 
genitive denoting a city or province, one of the 
following words is to be supplied. 

'Apx<-c7rio-K07ros, archbishop. c O 2ivuiov, The archbishop of Mount 
Sinai. 

'Enio-Konos, bishop. 'O 'EpvBptov, The bishop of Erythroz. 

Mr)Tpo7ro\iTr)S, Metropolitan. c O Spvpvns, The metropolitan of 
Smyrna. 

ncuras, pope. e O Poipns, The pope of Rome. The bishop of Alex- 
andria is styled na7ras na\ 7rarptap^?y?, Pope and patriarch. 

HaTptapxns, patriarch. c O 'AAelai/opei'as, The patriarch of Alexan- 
dria. 

The adjective ayios, holy, is often inserted between the article and 
the genitive ; as c O dyios 'EcpeVou, His Holiness the metropolitan of 
Ephesus. 

Note 1. Before the introduction of the titles dpxienio-Konos, prj- 
TponoXiTns, TraTpiapxns, ivairas, the genitive depended on cnlo-Konos, 
expressed or understood. Further, the article was often omitted. 



THE ARTICLE. 127 

*• 

CONCIL. NlCAEN". Can. 6. Tov iv 'A\e£av8pcta eirlaKcmov. Tea 
iv Po> prj tirio-KOirat. SOCRATES, 1, 6. ' AXet-avbpos 6 'AXe^avBpelas. 
'EmaToXrj 'AXe£-av8pov 'AXe^av&pelas- 1, 8. TLvaefiios 6 NiKoprjheias 
€7TL(TKOTros- Qeoyvts NtKaiay. Mapiy XaXK^SoVos. 2, 7. Kcoyoraj/riVou 
TrdXecos 1 eirlaKonov. 

Sometimes dp^ifpeu?, or lepevs, was used. Pbocopitts, Histor. 
Arcan. p. 25, 15. 'Avdpeas Se o TJ7S 'EcpeVou apxiepevs. De Bell. 
Goth. pp. 17. Ilapa t6i> P&prjs dpxtepea. "O re xt)? *E<pe(Tov Upevs. 
177. "O re MeStoXai/cov tepevs. De Bell. Vand. pp. 343. 'Akclkios 6 ttjs 
noXecos iepevs. 356. Ta>v he tls iepeav, ovs drj hnaiconovs koXovctlv. 

7. In grammar and lexicography, every word 
regarded as an independent object takes the article 
of the word denoting the part of speech to which 
it belongs. 

'H eyo>, sc. avrwwpia, The pronoun iyu>. To 6, sc. apBpov, The 
article 6. To povo~a, sc. ovopa, The noun povcra. To ypa(pa>, sc. prjpa, 
The verb ypacpco. 'H ypcxpav, sc. pero^r], The participle ypdcpav. 
*H an, sc. npodeats, The preposition eirl. To ava>, sc. eirtppnpa, The 
adverb civco. 'O ical, sc. avvheo-pos, The conjunction kclL 

8. Any word or expression regarded as a neu- 
ter substantive, admits of being preceded by the 
neuter of the article. 

(1) Words explained or quoted. M^Ta^eipi^rai 
to eyco, He uses the word " 7." 

So To eav i<nzapQr\ rroXXes (popes, aXX' aKopa hev icpvrpaxre, il If , 'has 
been sown many times, but has not sprouted yet. 

(2) Certain adverbs regarded as adjectives or 
substantives. (§ 88, 8.) 

(3) Before sentences beginning with ore or m. 
(See below.) 

(4) Before interrogative sentences. Also be- 
fore the second person of the imperative. (See 
below.) 

9. The article before oao^ or oari? has the force 
of the demonstrative pronoun ixelvos. 



128 THE ARTICLE. . 

, An6 tovs oaoi ineBvp-naav, Of those who wished. 'Emo-Tripi^o- 
fiepoL els ra ocra tjkov<tclv, Belying upon what they had heard. Els ibv 
ootls OeXfjo-T) va eXdv, To hum iclio shall be willing to come ; who will 
come. 

10. In certain antiquated expressions the article 
has the force of the relative pronoun. 

Ta (pepvei f] copa, 6 \povos hev ra cpepvei, What an hour brings forth, a 
year may not. Ta as bev 6e\eis yivovrai, 6e\e ra cos yivovrai, What 
happens as you do not like, like it as it does happen. Hoao rbv TrpeVei 
va ttciOj) to. ^>o/3arai / How much he deserves to suffer what he fears ! 



Position of the Article. 

11. When a substantive appears without the 
article, the adjective agreeing with it most com- 
monly precedes it. 

KaXos- civBpamos, less common *A.vdpcoiros Kakos, A good man. Kpvo 
vepo, Cold water. 

But when the substantive is accompanied by 
the article, the article must precede the adjective ; 
otherwise the adjective loses its attributive charac- 
ter and becomes predicative. 

This applies to adjectives, possessive pronouns, and partici- 
ples. 

c O Ka\6s avBptoTTos, The good man. But KaXos- 6 avdpconos, or '0 av- 
Opconos KaXos, The man is good : or The man being good. c O ihiKos 
p.ov tows, My place. But c O tottos edi<6s fxov, The place is mine. 

12. In formal style, the adjective with its arti- 
cle admits of being put after the substantive with 
or without the article. 

'O (ivdpconos 6 koXos, or "KvOpcoiros 6 koXos. *0 toitos 6 eSiicos /xov, 
or Tottos 6 c8lk6s fiov. 

13. The uneducated commonly put the adjec- 



THE ARTICLE. 129 

tive with its article before the substantive and its 
article. 

*0 Kakos 6 avQpamos. 'O Sikos pov 6 tokos- 

Note 2. The last arrangement is by no means modern. Com- 
pare HerODOT. 7, 196. 'O pep dr) vavriKos 6 tcop /3ap|8ap<oi> arparos. 
THUCYD. 1, 23. C H ovx rjici.o-Ta /3Xa\^atra .... 17 Xoipo>br)S poo~os. 
PLATO. Ga*rg. p. 502 B. C H aepprj avrn kcu Oavpaorr) 77 Trjs rpaycodlas 
7roir)cris. Symp. p. 213 E. Trjp tovtov Tavrnpl ttjp 8avpxio~Tr)P K€(pa\r]p. 
Sophist, p. 225 E. Top OavpacrTop ttoXlp ckzIpop .... top /xeraStco/cd- 
pepop v(f) rjpcop 0'OCpio'TrjU. De Rep. 1, p. 328 D. Ai aXXai al Kara to 
aa>pa r}8opai dnopapaiPOPraL. Ibid. 2, p. 368 B. *Ek tov aXXou tov 
rjpeTepov Tponov. Ibid. 8, p. 565 D. To ei> 'ApKaftiq to tov Atos tov 
AvKaiov Upop. 9, p. 590 A. To beipop to peya ckcIpo kol vroXvaSes 
Bpeppa. 

14. In elevated style the article admits of being 
separated from its substantive by the adnominal 
genitive, by a preposition, or an adverb, with the 
words connected with them. 

'O tov dpdpu>TTov povs, The mind of man. *H (pvcriKr) tov dp3payirov 
kKio-is, or 'H tov dpOpamov (pvcriKr) k\'io~is, Man's natural tendency. 

Tr)s eic tovtov 7rpoo-8oKapepr)S oxpeXet'as, Of the benefit expected from, 
this measure. Top epirpoaOep pov neipevov veiepop, The dead man that 
lies before me. 

15. Attributive substantives, or national appel- 
latives, have, in respect to the article, all the prop- 
erties of ordinary adjectives. 

'O dyios Tewpyios, Saint George. 'O prjTccp Anpoadepns, or Anpo- 
arOeprjs 6 prjTcop, or 'O Arjpoo-depns 6 prjrcop, Demosthenes the orator. 'H 
Xdpi Evcppocrvprj, Euphrosyne the Grace (one of the Graces). 'H 
povo-a, rj ^aXrpa 'Eparco, The songstress Erato, the muse. *H *Ap(pi- 
Tp'iTn 77 ydXrjpr) 6ed, Amphitrite the serene goddess. 'O Aiukos 6 (pofiepos 
6 K\e(pTt)s, Dhidkos the terrible Klepht. 'O TaWos o-vvTaypardpxqs, 
The French colonel. *0 6e6s Kaipbs 6 yepos, The old god Time. 'O 
ircmovTo-r)s 6 ¥1(09, Rizos the shoemaker. Tov (peftpovaplov prjpos, Of 
the month of February. To novW r drjftopi, The bird the nightingale. 

'O "EXvpnos teal 6 Kio-a(3os to. 8vo fiovpd, E'limbos and Kisabhos, the 
two mountains. Ta bvo Tpayia to <£X<opo kcll top Topnpa, The two 
goats, Phldros and Tdmbras. 

16. When a baptismal name is followed by 



130' PRONOUNS. 

a surname, the latter is treated like an adjec- 
tive. 

Teoopyios 6 KeSprjvos, George Cedrenus. Evyevios 6 BovXyaprjs, Ebli- 
glie'nios Bhulgharis. c O Xprjaros 6 MiXiovrjs, Khristos Milionis. 

At present, however, the two parts are regarded as forming but 
one name ; as 'O Mapicos Mnoro-ap^s, Mdrkos Botsaris. *0 Nikos Tad- 
pas, Nikos Tsdras. c O 'l/*e/> Bpiovns, Imer Bhridnis. 

17. Turkish titles come after the proper name. 

c O 'AXJ7 iraa-ds, Ali the pasha ; simply All Pasha. c O Xaaav dyas, 
Khasdn aglid; Lord Khasdn. 

2o vXrdv , sultan, precedes the proper name ; as 'O 2ovXrav Ma^- 
povTrjs, Sultan Malimud. But when it applies to the sultan's daugh- 
ter it follows the name ; as 'E/uve aovXrdv, Emine the sultana. 

18. A substantive in apposition with a personal 
or demonstrative pronoun, or with o\os, all, is, 
with respect to the article, treated like an adjec- 
tive. 

*Ey<o 6 (BacriXevs, I the king. 'Evels ol KXe'cpres, You robbers. Avrou 
rov koXov dudpconov, That good man. Ovtos 6 avdpconos, or c O av8pv>- 
7ros ovtos, This man. 'EKeivqv tt)v yvvaiKa, or Tf]v yvvaiica iKe'ivqv, 
That woman. "oXos 6 Koapos, All the world; The whole world. "oXoi 
oi av6poi7roL,All men; All the men. Tovres f) Kpves f) (pavraaUs, These 
cold fantasies. 

19. When a substantive denoting any kind of 
measure or weight takes the article, the noun in 
apposition with it also takes the article. (§ 49, 3.) 



PRONOUNS. 
Personal Pronouns. 

§ «. 

1. The nominatives eyco, rjfiets, <rv, o-et?, if ex- 
pressed, are either emphatic or antithetic. 



PRONOUNS. 131 

Emphatic. 'Eyeo Xeyo>, It is I who say; or I say, emphasizing I. 
But Aeyco, simply I say. 'H/xets \eyopev, It is we who say; or We say, 
emphasizing we. But Aeyopev, simply We say. 'Eav Xe'yets, It is 
thou that sayest; or Thou sayest, emphasizing thou. But Aeyety, 
simply Thou sayest. 'Eveis Xeyere, .ft is 2/ow who say. But Aeyere, 
simply You say. 

Antithetic. 'Eov to cines kcu o^t eyw, Pbw said it, and not I. 5 Eyo> 
aas Xeyo) d«/ e^w, k eVets fioO Xere " Aoo-e," I tell you Ihave not, but you 
tell me, "Give." 'H/ieis tovs cviKr)o~apev kcu o^t ckclvos, We conquered 
them, and not he. 'Eav rjo-ai iav, If it is thou. Aev 6/iiXctre eaeis, dX\ct 
6 6e6s, It is not you that speak, but God. 

2. The longer forms of the oblique cases of the 
first two persons of the personal pronoun are usu- 
ally emphatic or antithetic. 

Tipa> iaeva, I honor you, emphatically. But 2e TipS, simply I honor 
you. Tipa eVeW kcu ox l ttjv Trarpiba o~ov, I honor you, and not your 
country. 

3. After a preposition, the longer or accented 
forms of the oblique cases of the same pronouns 
are used. 

'A7ro ipeva, From me, not 'Arco pe. 'A7ro rjpcts, or 'Atto pas accented, 
From us. Els ecreva, To you. 'Avrls ipeva, Instead of me. Aia fjpds, 
For us. Me ipeva, With me. lipbs io~ds, Towards you. 

4. The genitives ifieva, eaeva, and their modi- 
fications, are used chiefly in connection with the 
enclitic forms /* o S , a- o v . 

'Epeva to Kecpaki pov, kcu oreva to. Ka\d o~ov, Of me (on my part), my 
head, and of thee (on your part), thy estate, &eyydpi pov XapTrporaro, 
£rj\evei a r) Kaptjia pov, TicltI Boapeis tov dyairco, kcu piva Ve paKpid 
pov, My most bright Moon, my heart enviolh thee; for thou beholdest him 
Hove, but he is far away from me. *As cikovo-v k ipeva ttjv yvcopn pov, 
Let him hear my opinion also. Kopn, u'eva r ddepcpia o~ov els t6 x°P° 
Xopevow, Maid, as to thy brothers, they are dancing in the dance. Ao" 
fi to pkva tov XeftevTT], Give it me the brave boy. 

5. The genitive of the first two persons of the 
personal pronoun is used also reflexively. 

EtSa tov naTepa pov, I saw my (own) father. Elhes tov iraTepa pov, 
You saw my father. KaXkiepyels tov Krjrrov aov, You cultivate your 



132 PRONOUNS. 

(own) garden. KaWiepyel rbv kt^ttov o~ov, He cultivates your garden. 
'EviKujo-apev tovs exSpovs /way, We conquered our enemies. 

6. The accusative of the personal pronoun is 
sometimes used instead of the reflexive. 

To 6e\co tovto 81a. ifieva, I want this for myself. E?$e s fie x a P& v vov 
avrls eWra wftcpiov rbv vlov crov, You saw with pleasure your son made 
bridegroom instead of yourself. 

7. The nominative of out o? is either emphatic 
or antithetic. 

Autos 1 Xeyet, It is he that says , or He says, emphasizing he. But 
Ae'yei, simply He says, She says, or It says. Airy Xeyei, It is she that 
says. 

Avrol Xeyow, Avra \iyovv, Avral \iyovv, It is they that say. But 
Aeyovv, simply They say. 

Avrrj to eypayjre na\ ox 1 ^Kelvoi, It was she that wrote it, and not they. 
Atari ovtos va. ex?}, k eyci> va p.rjv c'^o) ; Why should he have, and I not 
have ? 

8. The oblique cases of euro? are usually em- 
phatic or antithetic. 

Tiu<5 avrov, I honor him, emphatically. Ttfia avrbv, Kai o^t tovs 
ovyyeveis tov, I honor him, and not his kinsmen. 

9. The oblique cases of avros are used after -a 
preposition. 

*Ak avTov, From him. * Avrls avrfjv, Instead of her. At' avTo, For 
it. Ai clvtovs, AC avras, For them. Els avTov, To him. Me avrfv, 
With her. npos avrd, Towards them. 

10. The genitive of avr o<?, when it limits a sub- 
stantive, refers to a p'erson or thing different from 
the subject of the sentence in which it stands, if 
that subject is a pronoun of the first or second 
person. But if it is in the third person, the geni- 
tive of avro ? refers either to that subiect, or to a 
person or thing different from it. 

KaXXtepy<5 tovs kt]ttovs avrov, I cultivate his gardens. TipaTe ttjv 
dpeTTjv avrcov, Honor their virtue. 



PRONOUNS. 133 

KaXXiep-yfi tov ktjttov alrov, He cultivates his garden ; either his own 
garden, or that of another person. 

11. Avt6<; is used also demonstratively, but 
chiefly when it refers to a person or thing near 
the person addressed. 

Ti 6a to Kafirs avro to p-axaipt ; What are you going to do zuith that 
knife ? Ilolos clvc ai>Tos ; Who is that man f To 6e\eis avro ; Do you 
want that ? 

12. '^to?, or '^7raTo?, self, is always followed 
by the enclitic genitives of eyw, o-u, to?. 

'Ato's fxov to tzKafia, I did it myself. To KaTakapfidveis koL cltos crov, 
You yourself understand this. Kal 6 dprjpds tlo-efinice tiro's tov icafiaX- 
Aa'pis, The emir himself (in person) entered the city on horseback. 'Exa- 
T}K€ dnaTos tov, He burned himself. 

13. The monosyllabic to? expresses the third 
person in its simplest conception. 

Tov cl8a, I saw him. AeV ttjv etSa, I did not see her . Uov 6a to 
cvpns ; Where shall you find it ? Tovs dyanas ; Do you love them ? 

14. The nominative of to? is used chiefly after 
ehe, is, are, or after va, behold ! 

Uov Ve to? ; more elegantly, IIoO elve avTos ; Where is he ? Be/3ata 
7ra>s 8ev elve tt] aov Xeya>, niaTevae to, That she is not sincere, I assure 
you, believe it. 

Na tos koa 6 TidvvTjs no 'px^rai ! Behold John coming ! Na res oXes 
epxovvTai i] p.avpopaTes I Behold them ! all the black-eyed damsels are 
coming. 

15. In the phrase To Kal to, This and that, So 
and so, to is demonstrative, and retains its accent 
in pronunciation. 

E?7re r6 Ka\ to, He said this and that. 

Note. Compare Demosthenes, Phil. 3, p. 128, 16. *e8« yap to 
Ka\ to Trotrjcrai., K.a\ to prj TroiTJo-ai. Mid. p. 560, 17. Ta Kai to. 7re7rov6a>s. 
Coron. p. 308 1 3. Et to ko.\ to tTvoinartv dv6p(07ros ovtoo\, ovk av dne- 
Bavev. 

12 



134 PRONOUNS. 

16. The proclitic personal pronoun usually ac- 
companies the object of the verb in the same sen- 
tence, for the sake of greater perspicuity. 

Ti 6a to Kafxrjs aiiro ; What are you going to do with that ? 'Hpas 
TiTTore bev p,as eicape, As to ws, he did us nothing. Ti o~e peXei iaeva ; 
What do you care ? What is that to you ? 0a o~ov to kX^ow to 
•novyyi o~ov, They will steal your purse. 'EKetvov 8ev 6a. top ireipd^ow, 
Him, — they will not trouble him. Tov KaniTaviov dev tov eirtao-av, The 
captain, — they did not catch him. 

17. The proclitic or enclitic forms of the per- 
sonal pronoun are usually put in apposition with 
the relative in the same sentence. 

Updypa to onolov dev to vovTipevopai, A thing which I do not relish. 
Tcou otto'lcov 6 ipxypos tcov pas €x. a P 07TOir l (T€ i Whose arrival has cheered 
us up. 'AvorjTe, ttov ere KaTacppovovv 6Xoi, Foolish man, whom all per- 
sons despise. 



Position of the Proclitic and Enclitic Forms. 

18. The monosyllabic genitive of the personal 
pronoun is enclitic when it depends upon a sub- 
stantive or adverb. 

'O hoxiXos pov, My servant. EiW BovXos pov, He is a servant of mine; 
or He is my servant. c O npooTos aovav6ivTns, Your former master. Tcov 
Kapafiicov pas, Of our ships. Ta fiifiXiaTovs, Their books. Kddov kovtcl 
p.ov, Sit near me. TLoTe pov 8ev tov fj<ovaa, I never heard him. TLr^yaive 
p.a£L tt)s, Go with her. 

19. With the indicative or subjunctive, the 
monosyllabic forms are usually (not always) pro- 
clitic ; with the imperative or participle, they are 
regularly enclitic. 

Tov dyairare ; Do you love him ? 2e dyanco, I love thee. Elne tov, 
Tell him. 'iSe tovs, See them. 'Kkovovtcis tov, Hearing him. 

20. The proclitic pronouns are placed after the 



PRONOUNS. 135 

auxiliary verbs 6e\co or 6a, and a?; also after Sep, 
not, /xrj, not, and va. 

Ge'Xo) tov Idel, I will see him. Qa tov inaiveo-ovv, Tliey trill praise 
him, *A? to exu, Let him have it. AeV rbv aya7ra>/xev, We do not like 
him. Mr)u tov KaTTjyopfjs, Do not censure him. 

■ 21. When the immediate and remote object 
of a verb are both monosyllabic pronouns, the 
remote object is put first. 

Mot) to e8ei£e, He showed it to me. AeZ£e tov to, Shoio it to him. Tov 
to. e<pepa, / have brought them, to him. AelxvovTas tov to., Showing them 
to him. Mr) fxov ra Xes ovtcl, Don't say these things to me. Aev Oa rovs 
to 86aa>, I will not give it to them. *As tovs to docry, Let him give it to 
them. Ti aov ehe; What did he say to you f AeV /xe eare TLuore, He 
did not say anything to me. 



Reflexive Pronoun. 

§ S2. 

The reflexive pronoun refers to the subject of 
the sentence in which it stands. 

Tpe(f)€ tov iavTov aov, Support thyself. EtTre? fxe tov iavTov aov, You 
said to yourself; You said in your heart. 

Reciprocal Pronoun. 

§ 53. 

In Classical Greek, the reciprocal pronoun re- 
fers to the subject of the sentence in which it 
stands. 

Tt/z<3o-iv aWrjXovs, They honor one another. 

In Modern Greek, the verb agreeing with the 
first component part (6 eW?) is not expressed. 



13G PRONOUNS. 

Karrjyopovv 6 evas tov aXKov, They accuse one another. "Q,ppr}o-av 
6 evas Kara tov a\\ov, They rushed against each other. 2Te<6p,e0a /xa- 
Kpav 6 els tov aXKov e'Uoo-t /3^/xara, We stand twenty paces from each 
other. 



Possessive Pronoun. 
§54. 

1. The possessive pronoun is equivalent to the 
genitive of the corresponding personal pronoun. 

To IBlkov jjlov fiifiXtov, the same as T6 /3i/3\iW /xov, My book. 'EoV 
kov /xov j3cj3\iov, the same as Bi/3Xtov tiou, A book of mine, la Ttaiha 
ra edited aov t Thy children. TLaibia edocd crov, Children of thine. 

2. The possessive pronoun is used in answer to 
a question beginning with the genitive of the in- 
terrogative pronoun. 

Tlvos elve tovtq ; Whose is this ? Answer, 'ESikoV fiov, Mine. 'EoV 
kov tovs, Theirs, and so on. 

Demonstrative Pronoun. 
§55. 

1. Tov to ?, this, refers to that which is near the 
speaker. 

Tovtoi ol cpiXoi, These friends. To paxatpi roOro, This knife. 

2. \E*:e£z/o?, that, refers to a person or thing 
remote from both the speaker and the person ad- 
dressed. 

BXeneis e<elvo to vvvvecpov ; Do you see yonder cloud f 

3. 'E/cetvoq has also the force of the personal 
pronoun, he, it, she. 

Ti o-e el-rep eKelvos ; WJiat did he tell you ? Tfjv elSes eKeivnv ; Did 
you see her ? 



PRONOUNS. 137 



Interrogative Pronoun. 

1. The interrogative pronoun is used both in 
direct and in indirect questions. (For examples, 
see below.) 

2. It is used also in expressions of astonish- 
ment, admiration, or perplexity. 

Ti aiconl] ! What silence! Tt beu elve lmivol vd KaropOooaovv ! What 
are they not able to accomplish ! 

Indefinite Pronoun. 
§ W. 

The indefinite pronouns are used both adjec- 
tively and substantively. 

Kanoios, adjectively, certain, a certain, some; substantively, a 
certain one, a certain person, some one, somebody. Kcmoies ywaiKes, 
Some women . Kuttolos to eicape, Some one did it. Kanoios 6a (pdyn 
£v\o, Some one (that is, you) will get a whipping. 

Kcitls, a certain one, some one, somebody, some person. "Onoios 
7repiiraTel kutl nipt k rjcpa (fjcpaye), Ka\ ottolos 8eu TtepLiraTel, kcitls tov 
rjcpa, He who walks finds something to eat ; but he who does not walk, 
some one eats him. Via tt)v dydwr) koltlvos, For the love of some one ; 
For somebody's sake. UpcoTov bayKavei KaTLva yuKpr) daynapaTLTaa, It 
first inflicts a small bite upon some one. 

Kan, adjectively, some, certain; substantively, something , some- 
thing great. Tovs eareike Kal Zmaaav kcltl KaTepyapeovs, He sent them 
and they caught some rascals. 

Kutl rpexei, Something is going on ; Something is the matter. Kcitl 
to Bappovae, He thought it was something remarkable; He regarded it 
as something great. It admits of being followed by ti. "E^co kcltl ti, 
I have something. 

Tls, adjectively, certain, a certain, some, any, or simply, a, an ; sub- 
stantively, a certain one, some one, anybody, somebody ; some, in the 
plural. "AvOpconos tls, A certain man. Uaihiov ti, A boy. 

"}L\eye tls otl octtls eyevvr)6r) pcopos pevei ndvroTe p.a>pos, Some one 
was icont to say that he who was born a fool remained always a fool. Hl- 
(TTevovv tlvZs otl 6 tjXlos elve tyvxpos, Some believe that the sun is cold. 
12* 



138 PRONOUNS. 

TtVore, adjectively, any, some; substantively, anything, property. 
EtSes TiVore dvOpoMovs ; Have you seen any men ? Kvrra^e va firjv 
ko^ow tl7tot€ devBpa, See that they do not cut down any trees. AeV ads 
eareike TiTrore ; Did he not send you anything ? 2' ipcornae rinoTe 8ia 
ipeva ; Did he ask you anything about me ? TiVore bev pas K.dp,vovv, They 
will not do us anything ; They can do us nothing. 'Aicopr) rinore deu i'yive, 
As yet not anything has been done ; Nothing has been done as yet. "oXa 
ra tltvoto. tov, All his property. Tov dicpifiov to T'nzore els ^apo/con-ov 
^epia, The miser's properly falls into the hands of the spendthrift. 



Relative* Pronoun. 

§ 58- 

1. The relative pronoun agrees with its antece- 
dent, that is, the word to which it refers, in gen- 
der and number ; its case being determined by the 
nature of the clause in which it stands. 

2. TIov or 'Oirov is almost always a nominative 
or accusative. Further, it never comes after a 
preposition. 

Tt 6a to Kaprjs avTo ttov KpaTeis etp to x*P c > What are you going to 
do with the thing which you hold in your hand ? Uov inrjye cuelvcs nov 
tjtov e'Scb npoxOes ; Where has the man, who was here the day before yes- 
terday, gone] 

3. The antecedent of ttov or 6 ttov is often 
omitted. 

'Eyo> 'pai ttov aov Ta '(ficpva to. prjXa 's to tiXi, / am he who used 
to bring you apples in my handkerchief. 

4. In expressions like the following, ttov or 
oirov is apparently superfluous. 

ti avonTos Snov elaai, Ka'ipeve t Y'hat a fool you are, my good fel- 
low ! Tt KecpdXi ttov ex ei • What a head he has got ! Tov eTraivovaav 
ju.' okrjv tovs ttjv bvvapiv a>adv vnoKpiTaX oirov rjaav, They praised him 
with all their might like hypocrites as they were. 

5. Sometimes, for the sake of greater perspicu- 
ity, the antecedent is repeated after the relative. 



PRONOUNS. 139 

Ta. (ppovpia rrjs Movoftacrias rat Trjs Kopivdov rat tov NavnXiov, to. 
onoia (ppovpta e^ovj/ naXovs Xipevas, The forts of Monobhasid, Corinth, 
and Ndphplion, which forts have good harbors. 

6. Sometimes the relative takes, by attraction, 
the case of its antecedent. 

'YirepaaTTi^ovTai oaovs Karacpevyovv els avTovs, They protect those 
who go to them for refuge. To eXeye els onoiov rat av epxovvTav, He 
would say it to whatever person would come. KardXoyos t<ov oacov evpi- 
a-Kovrai e8<a, A list of the things which are found here. Atxrru^ta tov, 
a dvaTV^id tov onoiavov QeXei ftpedfl *'$ to -fia^aipi o~ov anoK&Tov, Woe 
unto him, yea, woe unto him who shall be found under thy knife ! 

7. On the other hand, the antecedent sometimes 
takes the case of its relative. 

Hi.Ta(v) irov Sev TpSs, tl cre void£ei av KalcTcu ; A pie which you are 
not to eat, — what care you if it is burned? 

8. If the relative refers to more than one ante- 
cedent, it is put in the plural and in the leading 
gender (§ 47, 4). 

c avbpas rat rj yvvcuKa oi onoioi dvex^prjo-av, The man and the woman 
who have departed. At yvvaxKes rat to. naidia al ottoIcu pas nepipAvovv, 
The women and the children who are waiting for us. 

(1) If the antecedents denote inanimate things, 
the relative is regularly put in the neuter plural. 

Uerpai rat aldrjpos to. on-ota etve cn/ru^a, Stones and iron, which are 
inanimate things. 

(2) The relative sometimes agrees in gender 
with the nearest antecedent. 

c Ibpas rat to alpa to oirolov elve irpoo~KoXXr)uevov, The sweat and 
the blood which adhere. 



Pronominal Words. 
§ »>. 

dXXeas or dXXoias (aXXolos), otherwise, differently . 
dXXoi<i>TiKos, different. Adverb dXXotcoTira. 

aXXos, o, rj, other, another, else. Irregular forms, G. dXXovvov, dXKrjvrjsy 
Plur. G. dXXwvatv, A. dXXovvovs. 



140 PRONOUNS. 

aXKore, another time, at another time, at some other time, at other times. 

dXXov, elsewhere, elsewhither. 

dnaWov (an aXkov) , from another place. 

dnavrov (an avTov),from there, from near you. 

dnedco or dnoha> (an edco), hence ; on this side; henceforth. 

dneKel, dneicei or dnoKel (an e/cei), thence; on that side; thereupon. 

dneKelde or dnoKelde, for dneKel. 

dnoeKel (dno e/cet), the same as dneKel. 

dnonov (dno nov), whence? 

dnonov (an onov), whencesoever, from what place soever. 

avrov, there where you are ; thither where you are ; then, just. 

avrovde (avTo6ev),from there, from where you are. 

dcporov (dcf> orov), since, from the time when. 

d<f)ov (dcj) ov), since, after; because. 

delva, indeclinable, such a one. 

cSo) or deb, here, hither ; now. 

e8co6e, edcoOes, or dcode, here, on this side. 

eKel or nel, there, thither ; then ; onward, as applied to time. 

e<eWe or KeWe, there on that side. 

ctcti, so, less elegant than ovrcos. 

ecos or as, as far as ; until, till. 

ecos onov, for ecocrov. 

ecocrorov (ecos orov), until. 

ecocrov (ecos ov), until. 

idios, self always with the article. 'Eya> 6 'idios, I myself. "Epx^rai 6 

'Idios, He is coming himself 

Also, the same. e O i'Sio? avBpconos, The same man. 
KaBccs, as, just as. Often preceded by cos. *E\a cos Kadios elcrai, Come 

as you are. 
Kafxnoaos or Kapnoaos, some. 
Kanore (kciu, nore), sometimes. 
Kanov (kciv, nov), somewhere, somewhither. 
Kancos {kclv, nebs), somehow, in some manner. 
fxepiKoi, some- 
fiovaxos or povdxos, alone, only. Also, self, followed by the enclitic 

genitive of the personal pronoun. "Eneae povaxo rov, It fell of 

itself Mov&xoi rovs rpexovv, They run of their own accord, 
fiovos, the same as the preceding. 
66e(v), whence. 

bnoTav or onore, whenever, whensoever, 
onov, see nov relative. 
onov, wherever, wheresoever, whithersoever, 
oncos, as, just as, in whatever manner, 
oa-os, as, as much as, as many as. 
orai/, when, 
ovrcos, so, thus. 
noBev, whence? 
noaos, how much ? hoiu many? 
nore, when ? Sometimes, whenever, as soon as. 



NUMERALS. 



141 



irore, ever, at any time. In answer to a question, never. 

7tov, where f whither f 

irov or 6-nov, relative, where, in which place, whither; when. 

irovOevd, anywhere, anywhither. In answer to a question, nowhere. 

7rov7roT€, anywhere, anywhither. 

rdde (ode), indeclinable, such, such a one. 

reroios, more elegant toiovtos, roiavTq, toiovto(v), such. 

rocros, or toctovtos, TocravTt], too~ovto(v), so much, so many. 

rove, then. 

cos, as, of manner or time. 

cocrdv or crdv (c\>s, av), as if; like, as. 

acrov (cos ov), for icotrov, until; before. 

cos Trot), or cos otvov, the same as coaov. 

coo-re, so that, so as, that, as; until. 

cbcrT€ ttov, or wore orrov, until; while. 

Correlative Pronominals, 



Interrogative. 


Indefinite. 


Demonstrative. 


Eelative. 


iroOev 






o6ev, 
oirodev 


7TOCTOS 




rocros, 


otros, 


irore 


KaiTOTCy 


TOCTOVTOS 
TOT€ 


OTTOCTOS 

orai/, 




JTOTC 




onorav, 


TTOV 


KOLTTOV, 

novBeva, 




OTTOTC 
TTOV, oirov, 
07T0V, d<f)OV 


7T(5j 


7TOV7rOT€ 

KU7TC0S 


OVTCOSj 


cos, Ka6a>s, 






ertri 


O7TC0S 



NUMERALS. 
§ «©. 

1. "Evas, a, an, is often used with a substantive, when that sub- 
stantive would alone express the same thing. 

t Htoj> fxiav cfiopav evas ftatrikevs, There was once a king. Mia copaia 
vea. A beautiful young woman. 'Exparct ha pa/3§l els to ^epi tov i H e 
held a staff in his hand. 

2. The expression *ai o! (rarely without the *ai) preceding a 
cardinal number means every one of, all. 

Kai oi dvo ecpvyav, Both went away. But Oi 8vo ecpvyav, The tico 
went away. Kai rovs nevre rovs eVpe fiacre 6 iracras, The pasha hanged 



142 NUMERALS. 

every one of iliefive ; all Jive. Xvverai crdv ttjv do-Tpairr), tovs TpetsTovs 
7T€to-ok6j3€l, He rushes like lightning, he despatches all three. 

3. A cardinal number prefixed to words denoting eatables or drink- 
ables means dish, plate, cup, glass, or draught. 

$>epe fiia aovira, Bring a plate of soup. Aocre eva vepo, Give me a 
cup of water. "Eme rpia Teaaepa paicia, He drank three or four glasses 
of brandy. 

4. The distributive relation is expressed by means of d tt 6 , followed 
by a cardinal number. 

'En-ijpav cltto dvo ypoaia, They received two piasters apiece. KaOevas 
ef^e dirb dvb maToXia, Each one had a pair of pistols. 'EXare va 
7rLoiip.€ dirb yaa novrra Kpaai, Let us drink a cup of wine apiece. 

5. Combinations are expressed by means of airo and the repetition 
of the cardinal number. 

"EpxovTcu. airo evas evas, They come one after another ; one by one. 
Tovs €K.oy\rav anb evav evav, They beheaded them one by one. Unyaivovv 
dirb dvo dvo, They go two and two. Tovs eareiXe drrb dvo dvo, He sent 
them forth by two and two. Tovs dpadtaaav dnb rpets rp'els, They ar- 
ranged them three and three. 'Anb dvo dvo Kov[3evTia£av, They con- 
versed by two and two ; tivo in one place. 

So 'A7r' okiyo okiyo, By little and little : By degrees, or gradually. 

Sometimes an 6 is omitted. ^iXqcrre fi has evas, Kiss me one after 
another. 

6. In certain connections, a cardinal or ordinal number preceded 
by the article denotes a fraction, of which the numerator is that num- 
ber, and the denominator the same number plus one. 

EvprjKa rpels k enr^pa tovs dvo, 1 found iliree', and took away iwo of 
them. c O evas irrjye 's to vepb, Ka\ dXXos yjrcopX va cpepy, 'O rpiros 6 ica- 
XrjTepos crre'/eerai '$■ to tov(J)€kl, One of them went to get water, the other 
to bring bread ; the third and best stands at his gun. 

7. In dates, the cardinal numbers are used, fjixepa, copa, eros, xpovos, 
or xpovia being understood. 

Scholars regularly employ the cardinal numbers. 

^HXde els ttjv filav tov aXcovdpi (*HX6e tijv irpuiTnv tov iouXi'ov), He 
came on the first of the Thresher (July). *E\a els ttjv y.iav, Come at 
one o'clock. 'Anedave els to. ^iXia oKTaKoaia Ttevrjvra eva {'AneOave to 
X^Xloo-tov oKTaKoaioaTov TrevTnK.oo~Tbv npcoTov), He died in the year 
eighteen hundred fifty-one. 

8. The substantive in connection with numerals like twenty-one, 
thirty-one, forty-one, fifty-one, is put in the singular or plural. 

EiKoa-i eva xp° via i Eucoo-i ev Utos, Twenty-one years. 'EKapTe'p^aa 
Tpidvra evav xpovov, I wailed thirty-one years. 2apdvra fiia efidofidda, 
Forty-one weeks. 



NUMERALS. 143 

Note 1. Compare Septuagint. Reg. 3, 14, 1. TeoraapaKovra kcu 
ev6s eviavrcov. 3, 15, 10. TeacrapaKuvra Kal ev eras. 

9. Kdv , at least, about, nearly, admits of being placed before a car- 
dinal number. 

Kdv deKcKpra kclv SeKo^rcb vopdroi, About seventeen or eighteen men. 

Kdveis or Kdvevas (§ 31, 1, 2), adjectively any, one, some; sub- 
stantively, any one, anybody. Eides Kavevav dvBpm-nov ; Have you seen 
any man ? SreiXe pas Kavevav dWov av6evTr\v, Send us some other 
master. 

Kcucos avOpajiros SeV yiverai navels els piav crriypr^v, JSo one becomes 
bad in a single moment. Tt vd Kapn Kaveis ; What can one (I) dof — 
In answer to a question, it is apparently negative, nobody, no one. Aev 
eldes Kavevav ; Have you not seen anybody ? Answer, Kavevav, No ; 
nobody, not any one. 

10. Numeral substantives in -apt d are used only in the singular, 
and are always preceded by pia or k dp pia, some, about. The other 
numeral substantives are preceded by pia, Kappia, when they do not 
take the article. 

Further, the noun to which a numeral substantive belongs is put 
in apposition with that numeral (§ 49, 3). 

T H\6av Kappia deicapid icapdfiia, Some ten ships have come. Me clvto 
to ovopa evp'io~KovTca. pia e^vrapid oiKoyeveies els ttjv Meo-ar/viav , There 
are threescore and ten families of that name in Messenia. Srei'Xere 
pas pia eKaroarri irovyyid ao-rrpa, Send us one hundred purses of money. 
'Eo-KOT&drjo-av rpels x i ^ L ^ €S Pcoo-o-ot, Three thousand Russians were 
killed. 

Note 2. Compare Lysias, Epitaph, p. 192, 27. "EoreiXe -KevTr)- 
Kovra pvpid8as o~TpaTidv. 

11. A mixed number of which the fractional part is one half is 
expressed by subjoining Kal piaos, and a half, or by annexing 
- rj u i o~ v or - p i crv to the whole number. • 

r/ Evas Ka\ piaos, "Eva ku.1 piao, Mia Kal piar], One and a half. Tpels 
Kal piar), Three and a half. 

'Evdpiav { c Evd 'uteri;), Midpiav (Mid 'uioV), One and a half . Avo- 
piav, Two and a half Tpeiafjpiav (Tpels rjpiav),Tpidpiav (Tpid 'piav), 
Three and a half 'Efiooptjvra icprdpiav, Seventy-one and a half. 

Note 3. For the form piaos, compare C. n. 38, to rjpiaov, 
implying rjpiaos, for rjpiavs, half. 

12. Kadeis or KaOevas (§ 31, 1, 1), every one, each one, substan- 
tively. 

J/ EX' as irivovpe pa£i 6 Kadevas oao £fi, Let us, each of us, drink as 
long as we live. 

Kdd e , every, each, adjectively. Kd6e dvOpconos, Every man. Ka8e 
yvvalKa, Every woman. Kd6e irpdypa e'^et Kal t6v Kaipov tov, E eery- 
thing has its time. 



144 THE CASES. 



THE CASES. 

Genitive. 

§ 61- 

1. A substantive, or substantive pronoun, at- 
tributively or predicatively annexed to another 
substantive, for the sake of limiting or restricting 
its meaning, is put in the genitive (called adnomi- 
nal), if it refers to a different person or thing. 

Attributively. 'O vlos rov Tcapyiov, George's son; The son of 
George. c O naripas rov iraidiov, The child's father ; The father of the 
child. *0 vlos rov irarpos, The son of the father. 'O Krjnos pov, My 
garden. Krjnos p,ov, A garden of mine. Td trrrtVt rov (piXov pas, Our 
friend's house ; The house of our friend. Ta woddpta rav, Their feet. 
Ti Xoyrjs au0pa>7ros ehe ; What sort of a man is he f Eive avOpeonos rov 
ctkolvlov Kai rov ttoXovkiov, He is a man of the rope and the pole ; that is, 
He deserves to be hanged or impaled ; simply, A scape-gallows. 'Ewia 
irrjxaiv fiavriXi, A handkerchief nine ells long. Avo ypoaia>v navi, Tico 
piasters' worth of cotton cloth. Bapica cikoo-i reaaafKov KGmioav, A boat 
with twenty-four oars. f E(pra. xpovwv naibi, A child seven years old. Tpi- 
tov fjpepaiv 7r€p7rarr)o~id, Three days' journey. Ilevre pepwv vv<pn, A 
bride of five days' standing. 'E^ra fiepav far), Seven days' life. 

Predicatively. TiW eive to dp-mXi ; Whose is the vineyard t Ild- 
ow xpwvv «<ra* » How many years old are you f simply, How old are 
you f Eipat doodcKa xpovcov, I am twelve years old. To eicapxi dvo xpo~ 
p<ov, I made it two years old ; I nourished it until it was two years old. 

2. When a proper name in the genitive is sub- 
joined to another proper name, vto?, son, Ovyarepa, 
daughter, or ywcuiea, wife, is to be mentally sup- 
plied. 

Tlirpos 'Iaxiwov, with the article '0 Tlerpos rov 'IgxiWou, or '0 TXirpos 
'ladwov, Peter the son of John. 'EXevrj ArjprjTplov, with the article *H 
'EXjeVtj rov Arjfirjrpiov, or 'H 'EXevrj ArjfMrjrpiov, Helen the daughter (or 
wife) of Dhimitrios. 

Note. This idiom is prevalent in those parts of Greece and Tur- 



THE CASES. 145 

key where family names are not common. Scholars need not be in- 
formed that it is strictly classical. Demosthexes, de Cor. pp. 235 
(yjsrjcpio-pa). At; poadevrjs AnpoaOevovs- 238 KaXXiadevns 'EtcovIkov. 
243 (ypatprj). Alaxt-vrjs'ATpoixrjTov. 

3. In fashionabTe style, the name of a gentle- 
man's wife is denoted by subjoining the genitive 
of the husband's name to f\ /cvpia, mistress, lady. 

*H Kvpia Movpovfy, Mrs. Muruzis ; Madam Muruzis ; for the more 
popular 'H Kvpa Movpov£aiva. (§ 16, 1.) 

4. The genitive of the name of a city, town, or 
village is, in formal style, put after 7ro\x?, x^P a -> or 

%a)piov. 

l H noXis rod Aovhivov, The city of London ; the same as 'H ttoXcs 
to Aovhivov, The city London. 

5. Certain adjectives denoting a jmrt are fol- 
lowed by the enclitic genitives of the personal 
pronoun denoting the whole. 

c O Kadevas pas, 'H KaOepia pas, To icadeva pas, Every one of us. Ka- 
6eis o~as, Every one of you. 'Ano Kaviva eras, From any one (or no 
one) of you. "OXoi pas, All of us ; We all. "OXoi tovs, All of them. 
Kal ol bvo pas, Both of us. Kal oi rpeis tovs, All three of them. 
(§ 60, 9. 12.) 

6. The genitive is used after certain adverbs of 
place and time having the force of substantives. 

'AyvavTia to>v TpiKK&Xcov, Opposite Trikala. 'Avdpecra tcov 8vo, Be- 
tween the two. HoTe p.ov (aov, Tov),Ever (or never) in my (youv, his) 
life. 

Adverbs belonging here are dyvdvria, avdpecra, avapeTa^v, dvrjptpa, 
dwdvco, dnavoodio, direpivpos or aTTopnpoo-rd, yvpco, eprrpos or ipirpoard, 
Karapeais, Kararrdva), Karanohi or Karoin, KOVTa, pa£i, panpid, pera^v, 
drriadi, TTore, aripd, Tpiyvpco. 

7. In certain phrases the genitive has appar- 
ently the force of an adverb. 

"Oo~o V 6 paKpos t ovpavov, k f] 6dXao*o~a tov fiddov, As the heavens 
for their height, and the sea for its depth; As high as heaven, and as 
deep as the sea. Tov Bavd\ov 7re(f>Tei } He fell as if he had received his 
13 



146 THE CASES. 

death-blow. M' epprjgc tov Oavarov, It brought me near death. Tov 
kclkov Komd^ets, You labor in vain. 'AnrjXOov tov narncpopov, They 
went down hill. Tov IcwrXcoo-e tov paicpov, He stretched him on the 
ground ; He floored him. Toi\ov roi^ou aepvovvTav, He was dragging 
himself along the walls ; from wall to wall. 'E7ri}ye rov yjsrjXov (ytyn- 
Xov), He went high up in the sky. 

Genitive of Place and Time. 

8. In a few instances the genitive denotes the 
place within which anything happens. 

Srepias Kal tov rreXdyov va Xdp.yj/rj 6 oravpos, TJiat the cross may 
shine by land and by water. Ttjv x < *>P av cTpiyvpio-av ttjs yrjs koI rrjs 
BaXdaarjs, They surrounded the town on the land side and on the sea 
side. 

9. A Saint's day is denoted by the genitive of 
the name of that Saint, ttjv rjfiepav being under- 
stood. 

Uov fjaovv tov dyiov Ba<riXeiov ; Where were you on Saint Basil's 
day? 



AcCUSxVTIVE. 
§ ©^. 

1. The immediate object of a transitive verb is 
put in the accusative, as in classical Greek. 

2. A number of verbs, which are intransitive in 
English, are transitive in Greek. 

KXaiovv tov KcmLTavio, They weep for their chieftain. Mrjv to 7raTr}s, 
Do not tread upon it. 

So 7rerpo/3oXc5, throw stones at, Tpepa>, tremble at, fear. 

3. A transitive verb admits of being followed 
by a kindred noun in the accusative. 

'2 tov vnvo ttov Koip.ovp.ovv, In the sleep ichich I was sleeping ; In my 
sleep. '2 ty] o-TpaTci ottov ndyatve, On the way which he tea* going. Ilai- 
£ovv ttjv TriXdXa, They play" Hun and catch." Aev e(f>Tai£au Kaveva 
(pTai^ipo, They cununiticd no fault. 



THE CASES. 147 

4. Certain active verbs are followed by two ac- 
cusatives, the one of a person and the other of a 
thing. 

In the passive they retain the accusative of the 
thing. 

BoAe fie dvbpiKia pod^a, Put on me man's clothes. 'EybvdrjKe ra p'ov^d 
tov, He put off his clothes. Tov diddaicei noinriKa, He teaches him poetry. 
'O fxaOrjTrjs diSdaiceTai 7roir)Tticr)v, The pupil is taught poetry* Tov ev8v~ 
aav KOKKiva, They clothed him with red garments. 'EvdvOrj to (pope/id 
tov, He put on his garment. Tov iv6vp.io-e tt)v crvvd^Krjv tcov, He re- 
minded him of their agreement. Tt a epoiTrjae ; What did he ask you ? 

Verbs belonging here : dpp.aTov<o., (3dva>, fivfaivai, iyhvvw, diddaKa), 
ivbvva>, £vdvp.i£(o, epcorco, fr)T(d, £6vco, ttotl^co, <TTo\i.£a>, rayi^co, (poprovco, 
and the like. 

5. Some passive verbs are followed by the accu- 
sative of the remote object, although the active 
construction is inadmissible. 



'AppaPavigouai or 2u/3a'£o/xai tov or ttjv, be betrothed or affianced 
to, said of the man or woman. But dppafiavifa or o-vfid£a> ttjv p.e tov, 
betrothe, affiance, said of the parents or guardians. 

Ev\oyovp.at. tov or tt)v, marry, said of the man or woman. But eu- 
XoydJ tt)v p,e tov, marry to, unite in matrimony, said of the priest. 

2Te<pavovop.ai tov or tt)v, in ecclesiastical language 2recpop.ai, marry, 
be married to, said of the bride or bridegroom. But Srecpavdvco tov 
fie ttjv, marry to, gioe in marriage, said of the priest, parents, guardi- 
ans, or the godfather (avvreKvos) . 

'Ynavdpevoiiai tov or ttjv, marry, of the woman, improperly of the 
man also. But 'Ynavbpevco, give in marriage, of the parents or guar- 
dians. 

So ^€(popTovopaL tov, shake off, get rid of, 7rpoo-r)ic6vop.ai tov, rise for, 
crrepovp.a.1, lose, be deprived of, arpcop-evos tov, spread with, TvXiyop.at 
tov, wrap up myself in. 

6. The accusative after /ea\&>9, welcome, de- 
pends on euprfKa/jLev, OV airo\avaa^ev. 

" KaXr) aov pipa, Arjpo p.ov." " Ka\a>s tovs Sia/3aVe?" "Good 
morning to you, my Dhimos " " Welcome, travellers." 

Limiting Accusative. 

7. After words denoting measures of length, 
the dimension is put in the accusative. 



148 THE CASES. 

Sometimes Kara, in, as to, in respect to, is put 
before this accusative. 

To irnydbt eTve e'Uocri iroftas to fidBos (§ 62, 12), Tlie well is twenty 
feet deep (or in depth). Also To fiddos rod irnyabiov elve e'Uocn nodes, 
The depth of the well is twenty feet. Also, To nnydoi e^ei eUoai nddas 
fiddos, The well has the depth of twenty feet. 

The accusatives to which this rule applies are ftdBos, depth, pdicpos, 
length, ttuxos or ^oj/Spos-, thickness, rrXdros or <pdp8os> breadth, width, 
v\}/os, height. 

8. After comparatives, the accusative denotes 
the measure of excess or deficiency. 

'Eicetvos elve rpla irohdpia paKpvrepos cltto aeva, He is three feet taller 
than you. 0a crov o-rjKcoaco rqv rayr) aapdvra nevre cpovKres, I will 
increase your allowance by forty-fve handfuls. 'EmBvp-ovv va no- 
\ep.r)o~ovv plav copav apxyrepa, They are eager to fight as soon as pos- 
sible. 

9. In the following construction, the accusative 
arises from apposition. 

Xepca nodia 6a ads deaaj, I will bind you hand and foot. 

10. The accusative ra i k a rhv, per centum, de- 
notes the rate of interest. 

The educated usually employ rots i<ar6v, to the hundred, to ex- 
press the same thing. 

U\r)p6va> detcmrevTe rd (rots) e<arov, I pay fifteen per cent interest. 

11. Certain accusatives have the force of ad- 
verbs. 

'Appevifa aKpr) aKp-q, I sail along the shore. Tpla rovcpeicia rod 'ppn- 
£av, rd rp'C dpdd' dpdba, They gave him three bullets, the three in quick 
succession. 'Eftyr/Ke dcpopprj va ttltj vepo, He icent out under the pre- 
tence of drinking water. Hrjyaivei ytdkd ytaAo, It sails along the shore. 
TlrjyaLi/e ycovtd ycovid, Go from corner to corner ; along the corners. 
'EpprjxQrjKe yiovpovai, He charged (in military language). "Eneo-e di- 
7rXa, He fell in an inclined posture. y E7TTJye 8poprj, lie went running. 
'Eirrjya KafidWa, I went on horseback. 

Kan rpe'^f is, You seem to be running ; I should like to know Why 
you are running. 'Op'tX-qae rov Koppdri, Speak to him a little. Tlerpa 
rrpf Tvirpa irepirarovv, Xiddpi to XiOdpi, They leap from stone to stone, 



THE CASES. 149 

and from rock to rock. 'Efiyrjice 6 Tice/cas nayavid, Ge'kas has gone out 
at the head of an army. To irXdyi 7r\dyi nr^yaive, He was going on the 
slope. Pa^t 'se pdxi itepnaTel, He walks from ridge to ridge. 2/caAt 
ovcaXl Kartftaive, aKakl to fieravoLouei, He descended step by step ; at 
each step he repented. 

Ti rpex eL s ; Why do you run ? 

Extent of Space. 

12. Extent of space or distance is put in the 
accusative. 

Tovro to ^copto elve Tpla piXia paKpia anb to aXXo, This vil- 
lage is three miles distant from the other. ^TiepiirdTno-av dtandcna 
p,iXca, They walked two hundred miles. Aev rjpTropovo-av va efiyovv 
eva dxvdpi, They could not go out one step. To opos elve e'lKocn 
XiXiddas nobas to v^tos (§ 63, 7), The mountain is twenty thousand feet 
high. 

As distance in Greece and Turkey is measured by time, the 
accusative of &pa, rjpepa, prjvas, or xp° uos > with or without 8p6p.ov, 
is to be regarded as denoting space rather than time. 

Hifyaivei dvo apes hpupov, He travels two hours. 'E^ye pia &pa pa- 
Kpia dnb eicel oirov rjpao~Te r pels, He went an hour's distance from where 
we were. 

Duration of Time. 

13. The time answering to how long is put in 
the accusative. 

This rule applies to the natural and artificial divisions of time ; 
as rjpepa, day, vvKxa, night, ica\o<aipi, summer, x €l f x ™ vas > winter, 
p.r)vas, month, xpouos, year, aTiyprj, moment, instant, topa, hour, Kcupos, 
time. 

KoipciTcu oXnv Trjv rjpepav, He sleeps the whole day. Acodena pepes 
eXenra, I was absent twelve days. Uoaov Kaipbv eo~Td8ns els to Bovko- 
peo-TL ; How long did you stay at Bucharest 1 ? Tpels ptrjves cr eKapTep-qae, 
He waited three months for you. 

How long since, 

14. The time answering to the question how 
long since is put in the accusative preceded by 
Tcopa, now, l&co real, or a,7re8(6 /cal,from this time 
reckoning backwards. 

13* 



150 THE CASES. 

^AnriQavz roapa rpe7s xP° V0VS i & ?s now three years since Tie died ; 
He has been dead these three years past. 'Anedave e'Scb kol rpeTs xp°~ 
vovs, He died three years ago. Eive T&pa rpels XP ()V0L dcpov (improp- 
erly 7rov or oirov) direOavs, It is now three years since he died. 'Ane- 
paaav rpels XP° V0L dcpov dneBave, Three years have passed away since 
he died. 

Tov yvoc>pi£u> direba) kcu Se'fca xP° v0VS i I have known him these ten 
years past. Tov civdpa '^a> 'j rrjv £eviTeid e'fia) kcu dena XP° V0VS > -^fy 
husband has been absent from home these ten years. 



Dative. 

§ 63- 

1. In Modern Greek, the functions of the da- 
tive (strictly so called) are performed by the geni- 
tive or accusative. 

The genitive here is more analogical than the accusative. (Com- 
pare the classical genitive dual, which, so far as form is concerned, 
coincides with the dative dual.) 

As the genitives p,ds, ads, tovs, do not differ in form from the 
corresponding accusatives, it makes no difference whether, in expres- 
sions like AoVe tovs r/z-copi, Give them bread, they are regarded as gen- 
itives or accusatives. 

Tt crov (or o~e) edccKe ; What did he give you ? Aoae to t^s yvvaUas, 
Give it to the woman. EiVe to tov dv6pa>7rov, Say it to the man. 2ov 
apeae rj dvSpeia uov ; Did my valor please you ? "Eypayjsa rpi'a ypdp- 
jiaTa tov (piXov aov, I wrote your friend three letters. Aoae tov to, 
Give it him. 

Verbs belonging here: dtroKplvopai, dpefa or dpeo-Kto, dcpiepovai, 0apa>, 
ypdcpco, Save'ifa, fiasco, fit'Sco, ddonoico, eTOipd£a), €i>pio~K(t), Kapva>, Xeyco, 
AetVco, pe'Aet, pevco, pvpifa, void£ei, opovw, 7rapa§i5co, 7re'<prco, 7rpeirai, 
ivpo^evu), arovat, arekvob, o~Tp6v(c, avvTvxaiv<*>i ra^co, Tvxaivoi, viroaxopai, 
(paivopai, (pai/epoVco, cpepvco, (pSdvco, (piXevco, (paivdfa, xaipera), X a P^i 
Xpeid(opati ^pfoooraj, and the like. 

Adjectives belonging here : dvayKalos, necessary, dpKtTos, enough, 
sufficient. Aev tovs eii/e dvaymlov, It is not necessary to them ; They 
do not need it. 

2. In examples like the following, the genitive 
of the personal pronoun, although apparently ad- 
nominal, is felt after the verb. 

Mod dy<d\iaae to crwpa, He embraced my body. Tf?? /3am K els to 
daKTvXo ouopcpo daxrvXidi, He puts on her finger a beautiful ring. *E/3- 



THE CASES. 151 

yaXe tov rfjv ^/vxrfv tov, He took his soul out of him. Na fiov yvoia- 
crQovv to o-n'iTL fiov, That they may take care of my house. Na fiov 
kvttci^ovv to naihi, That they may look after my child. "2ov iraipve* to 
KecpdXi, I will take your head off. Mod trovovv to. nohia, My feet ache. 
c iracrds 6a fids To-anio-y to. kokoXci, The pasha will break our bones. 
2oO cpiXovv to x*Ph They kiss your hand. 

Note. Compare Plato. Phaedo. p. 117 A. "Ecos civ crov [Sdpos iv 
toIs CTKeXeat yevrjTai. Crit. p. 53 A. 'Kivhwevaovcri ye crov ol Ittltj]- 
deioi Ka\ avrol (pevyeiv. Symp. 215 E. Tedopvf3t]To fiov 77 yj/vxrj- 

3. The enclitic or proclitic genitive of the first 
and second persons of the personal pronouns, in 
certain connections, is apparently superfluous. 

Ti p.ov tov KVTTa^eis ; Why do you spare him f the contrary would 
give me pleasure. 2ov tov eTiva^av eva icaXo pa/38/, They gave him a 
sound thrashing ; it makes you glad to hear it, I know. 

4. In expressions like the following, a verb is to 
be mentally supplied. 

KaXrj crov fiepa, YiatTrf fiov, Good morning to you, my Ghiotis. KaXff 
ecrnepa eras, Good evening to you. But Kdkr) fjfiepa, Good morning. 
KaXr) ecrnepa, Good evening. 

Teid eras x a P^ cras i «PX 0I/r6S '> Health and joy to you, Sirs. Xaptcrua 
crov, Take it as a present, from me ; Take it and welcome ; I make you 
a present of it. 

5. In formal style, the accusative with eU, to, 
takes the place of the classical dative. 



TO 



Tovto bev dvrjKei els avTovs, This does not belong to them. Els Tiva 
ewes ,• Whom did you say it to f 'EdoOn els avTovs, It was given 
to them. *Ek§otos els Tcts rjdovds, Devoted to pleasure. TLXvpacreTe 
els tov e7n<pepovTa ^tXt'as Bpaxfids, Pay to the bearer one thousand 
drachmas. 

So Aocrifiov els tx\v xa>pav, A tax paid to the town ; simply town- 
tax. 

6. In general, that for which anything is or is 
done is put in the accusative with Bod, for. 

Tovto to cfiayl Bev elve did. ecreva, This dish is not for you. Aid ra 
ypoaia Ka\ tov narepa tov irovXel, He will sell even his own father for 
piasters (money) . 



152 THE CASES. 



Ablative Relations. 
§ 64, 

Place Whence. 

1. The place whence is put in the accusative 
preceded by air 6, from, out of 

"Ep^erai dirb rr]v KcovaravTivovTrokiv, He comes from Constantinople. 
Got (pvycopev dub ttjv 'AXe£aVSpeiai>, We shall go away from Alexandria. 
'EftyrJKe aivb to o-ttIti tov, He has come (or gone) out of his house. 

Time From. 

2. The time from is put in the accusative with 
a it 6 , from. 

'E7ToXeuoG(rai/ utto to 7rovpvb cos rb j3pddv, They were fighting from 
morning till evening. 'A/copa dev dnepao-av rpia xp^ vta otto tov Ktupbv 
7vov ae etSa, Three years have not elapsed yet from the time (when) I 
saw you; It is not three years since I saw you. 'Anb tov naipov oirov 
dnedave k'cos Tcopa noaot -^povoi eive ; From the time she died until now 
how many years is it? 'Anb tovs doibeKa xpovovs k ocei tov eiSoj From 
the twelve years onward I saio him. 'Anb tovs ^kclto k efnrpbs vd yn- 
pdo-T]$, After the hundred years may you grow old. 

3." The expression airo fic/cpos means from a 
child, ivhen a child. 

'Anb /jLiKpbs opcpdveyj/a, I became an orphan when a child. 

Separation, Procession, Cessation. 

4. The accusative with airo, from, of, is put 
after words denoting separation, departure, pro- 
cession, source, cessation. 

'Aykio-rpdci aV to otcovtcXXi, It slips out of the dish. Ttjv dyvdvT€\lse 
dwo "^77X77 paxovXa, He espied her from a high ridge. 'Atto nolov r dyo- 
pao-cs ; Whom did you buy it off AeV to tjkovo-ci dnb ndvevav, I did 
not hear it from anybody. M' edeixvav aWoiayruea aV o ti p edeixvev 
tKelvos, They made me look different from what that one did. 'Avaaai- 
va dirb to avTi, He breathes through the car. 'A7re\mcr6r)Ka dnb tovs 



THE CASES. 153 

£evovs. I have despaired of obtaining aid from foreigners. 'Ana tovto 
apxio-ere, Begin with this. 

Words belonging here : ayXi(rrp<3, dyvavreva, dyopdfa. aKovco. aX- 
~\olg>tik.os, dvacralvcii, a7re\77 i£op.ai. d7ropaKpe'i/co, dpxifa. /SXeVaj, (3orj8<o, 
fipd£o), yep.dros, yepi'£a>, yevvcop.ai. y\vr6va>, yi>oopi£oo, 8avel£op.aii 8e i'y^o), 
$Laj3a.LV(o, (j3yaivco, ei'pai, eXevdepovoo, evKaipco, fora*, £co. Kp€p.vco. K.pv7TT(0, 
Xap/3az/<0, XetVco, p.avddi/u>, ^e^cop/^co, Tralpvco, 7rav(>),7repv&, Trecprai, vo~re- 
pov, (Pa>vd£(o, ^coptora, and a number of others. 

5. J/%<u9 and %&)/?/?, without, are followed by 
the accusative. 

Kai rcopa Keiropai '$• t^ yi} Kopp.\ Sr^a)? neCpdXi, And now I am lying 
on the ground, a body without a head. Ti 7rpoap.eveis d-rro avOpanzov 
X<op\s yvaxriv ; What can you expect from a man without under- 
standing ? 

The Agent after Passive Forms. 

6. The agent after a passive form is put in the 
accusative with airo, by. 

Scholars usually prefer the classical construction; that is, 
vno or napa. with the genitive. 

Td £Aa KOTTTovrat d-no rbv £v\ok6ttov, The wood is cut by the tcood- 
cutter. Corresponding active construction, 'O £v\okottos Konrei to. 
£v\a, The wood-cutter cuts the wood. 

The Part taken hold of. 

7. The part taken hold of is put in the accusa- 
tive with a7ro, by. 

\A.7r' rd paXXtd p dp7rd£ei, She seizes me by the hair. Tov (Baarco 
dno to x^P l i 1 hold him by the hand. Tbv Kparel an r avrid, He holds 
him by the ears. 

Transforma tion. 

8. When a transformation is spoken of, a7ro 
takes the nominative. 

'Ano 7ra7rovTOTis eyives 7to\itlk6s, From a shoemaker you have become 
a statesman. Also 'Aito e'fcei oivov fjo-ovv TranovTo-rjs, From being a shoe- 
maker. 



154 THE CASES. 

Partitive Relation. 

9. Certain words denoting a part are followed 
by the accusative, with air o, denoting the whole. 

*0 devrepos dno tovs bvo, The second of the two ; simply, One of the 
two. 'A7ro f)p,ds 8vo jjlovov €(TKOTa>dr)(rav, Only two of us were killed. 
"Evas air avrovs, One of them. "Oiroios dirb tray, Whoever of you. 
"Ocroi cltt avrovs, As many of them. Tives air avrovs, Some of them. 

10. The accusative with airo admits of being 
put after any verb, when the action refers to a 
part. 

<E>aye dno tovto to ^ra>pX, Ka\ nte cltto tovto to Kpaal, Eat of this 
oread, and drink of this wine. "E^ei airo to 18101/ Kpacri, He has (some) 
of the same wine. 'A7r6 7rpo(pdo-eis oaas deXei evpio-Kei icdveis, One can 
find as many pretences (excuses) as he pleases. Na dyopdo-ys dir avrd, 
You must buy some of them. 'And icXe(j)Tia 8iv £epei, He knows nothing 
of the Klephtic profession. 

Comparison. 

11. The comparative is followed by the accusa- 
tive with cltt o, than. 

KaXrjTepos dno oXovs, Better than all. To yva)pi£ei KaXyrepa diro 
Kade aXXov, He knows it better than anybody else. 

12. But when the comparative adjective has the 
force of a substantive, it is followed by the adnom- 
inal genitive. 

3>iXoz/eiK€i fie tovs KaXnrepovs tov, He disputes with his superiors. K' 
€<el 'fipnice res op,otes rns Kal res xetpoYepes rns, And there she found 
her equals and her inferiors. 

13. Comparison is also expressed by means of 
irapd, than, the case of the noun following it being 
the same as that which precedes it. 

TlXeiorepoi eii/e ol elbtoXoXdrpai irapa oi Xptoriavoi, The idolaters are 
more numerous than the Christians ; There are more idolaters in the icorld 
than Christians. KaXrjrepa p,Las copas iXevOeprj £0)77, Uapa. aapdvra XP°~ 
voav o-*Xa/3ia na\ (pvXaitr], One hour's free life is better than forty years in 



THE CASES. 155 

servitude. KaAXto evas cppovipxts exOpos, napa. evas rpeXos (p(\oSi Bet- 
ter is a wise enemy, than a foolish friend. 

Material, 

14. The material of which anything is made 
is conceived of as being detached from a whole, 
and is accordingly put in the accusative with 

airo, of. 

'Kricrp.kvo dirb roO/3Xa, Built of brick. Karao-Kevacrp-evo dnb paXXi 
Kai ^apnaKi, Made of wool and cotton. 2re^>ai/t drro Xovkovdia, A 
wreath of flowers. 2upbs dnb irerpes, A heap of stones. 2na6l dnb 
£v\o,Asivordofwood; A wooden sword. STetyava faro npivovs Kai 
pvpnes, Wreaths of lilies and myrtles. 'A^o ri yivovrai ra fiovkivia; 
What are wafers made off 

Cause, Reason. 

15. The cause of an action or state is put in the 
accusative with air o, from, of for, because of on 
account of by reason of 

'Airedave dnb rr)v irelvav, He died of starvation, tyocpco dnb to icpvo, 
I am dying with cold. "Earnae air ra yeXia, He burst his sides with 
laughing. 'Anb ttjv x a P^ v T0V e<Xavae, He wept for joy. 'Arco to peya 
TTvtvpa voplfcTai TpeXbs, On account of his great genius, he is considered 
crazy, ^covd^ei drrb ttju o-Tevox(opiav tov, He cries out for anguish. 

16. In a few instances, the genitive is employed 
instead of the accusative with airo . 

'A-nredave rJ)? 7reivas, for the more common 'Antdave dnb ttju nelvav, 
He died of starvation. 2Kort£b/iai Trjs irdvas, I am darkened by reason 
of hunger. 



Locative and Temporal Relations. 

§ •*• 

Where and Whither. 
1. The place where or whither is put in the ac- 



156 THE CASES. 

cusative with eU, in, within, at, on; to, into ; or 
tt/3 09, towards. 

Elpe els to ctttlti tov, He is in his house. 'Enrfye els to o-ttLti tov, 
He went to his house. "Hfieda els^Trjp Kopvcprjp tov (3ovpov, We were on 
the top of the mountain. 'E<pddo-afxep els ttjp Kopvcprjp tov fiovvov, We 
arrived at the top of the mountain. KaroiKel els rot TpiKKaka, He resides 
at Trikala. 'Apd£afie els tovs Tpets MvKovs, We anchored at Three 
Mills. ^AirWcoae to. TrcmovTO-ia crov *s Trj oTcaAa, Leave your shoes on 
the stairs. 2(povyyiae to. x*P La °" ov s TO pavriki, Wipe your hands 
on the towel. "Eneaev els ttjp 6d\acro-ap, He fell into the sea. 'Op- 
fxovv evOvs '$• ifiepa, They immediately rush against me. &vo-a 's to 
a-Tavpo, Blow upon the Cross. Vrj£e to 's tt) yrj, Throw it on the ground. 
^AypapTevei npos ttj Qpayiad, He looks towards the land of the 
Franks. 

'E7ratyeiTtti els to naXXos ttjs, She prides herself on her beauty. 2e 
cpdopco els ttjp evTvxtap aov, I envy you for your happiness. Top eKTv- 
irncre '$• to Keqbaki, He struck him in the head. KvTTa^e top els to npo- 
o-<dttop, Look him in the face. 

2. The accusative o-ttlti, home, without a prep- 
osition, in certain connections answers to the ques- 
tion whither. 

"2vpe, yiaTpe fiov, arirlri crov, Go home, my doctor. Kou ane o~e oreXz/o) 
o-mTi orov fie deKa TraWnKapia, And then I will send you home with ten 



3. EU, to, is elliptically put before the geni- 
tive. 

'E^ye \ tov NikoXoov, He went to Nicholas's, sc. ottiVi, house. 

4. The accusative with eh is put in apposi- 
tion with the accusative of place, for the sake of 
more particularly explaining the meaning of the 
latter. 

Meaa 's to irepifioki fiov, *s tt) fiear) 's ttjp av\rj fiov, In my garden, 
in the middle of my court-yard. 

'2 ttjp 7t6Xl pa. ae (pepovfie '? ttjp izopTa tov covKtovov, That ice 
may carry you to the City (Stamboul), to the sultan's gate. Tvpio-e 
ba> 's top totto fias \ ttjp ep-qp-n ttjp Kidcpa, Return hither to our coun- 
try, to our dear Kidpha. 

Note. Compare Herodotus, 1, 193. 'Eo-e'x" Se «■ aXXop iroTa- 
jxbp e< tov Ev<fipr]Te(i> es top Tiypip. 



THE CASES. 157 



Place how Far. 

5. The place how far is expressed by means of 
ew? or »?, as far as, and the accusative. 

Hotres copes elve dnebco cos rrj Aapicrcra ; How many hours is it from 
here to Ldrisa? Tov inrjyav cos ttj fipixn, They carried him as far as 
the fountain. Qa TrqyaLvco ecos rrjv Kprj-rnv, I will go as far as Crete. 

Time When. 

6. A noun denoting the time when is put in the 
accusative without a preposition. 

This rule applies to nouns denoting the natural and artificial divis- 
ions of time ; as irovpvo, morning, /3paSu, evening, f]p.epa, day, vvktci, 
night, %povos, year, XpiaTovyevva, Christmas, yeO/xa, dinner-time. 

Tov eida ttjv irepacrpsvnv avoi$-iv, I saw him last spring. ""EXa to 
dnoyevpa, Come after dinner. To d7ropear)pepov 6a tovs heipovv SXovs, 
They will beat them all in the afternoon. 'HdeXncra va eXdco to fipdbo, 
I wished to come this evening. "EXa /3pa§u, Come this evening. 

7. In dates, the accusative is preceded by the 
preposition eU, on, in. (§ 60, 7.) 

'EKu/770-e '$• res beKanevre tov fia'iov, He started on the fifteenth of May, 
Tovto rjKoXovdnae els tov TrpcoTov PcocraLKov v:6Xep.ov, This happened in 
the first Russian war. 

8. A noun or adverb denoting time admits of 
being put in apposition with a larger division of 
time. 

s Htov o-a/3/3aro a7ro/3pa§Js, It teas Saturday evening. "Eva trafifiaTo 
fipddv, uta Kvpiaicr] Taxv, One Saturday evening, one Sunday morning. 
Ti T]Ko\ovdrjae tt)v devrepav to ienrepas ; What happened on Monday 
evening? Ttjv dvoit-i pia pepa, One day in the spring. T6j/ elda ttjv 
Tpl-rnv to irpcot, I saw him on Tuesday morning. 

Time Until. 

9. The time until is expressed by means of the 
accusative with ecu? or &>?, until, till. 

'EKOipLTjOrjKa cos to. p.etrdwKTa, I slept till midnight. See also § 64, 2. 
14 



158 THE CASES. 

Time how Soon. 

10. Th£ time hoiv soon is put in the accusative 
with eU, in (more elegantly ivros with the geni- 
tive). 

Ek Tpels jjpepas CEvtos rpiwv rjpepav) (fiOdvei els to x^P 1 ^ In three 
days he Will arrive at the village. Eis oXiyov Kaipbv tov TeXetovovv, They 
will finish him in a short time. Els oXiyovs prjvas epx^rai, He will come 
in a few months. ^HXdav els rfjv Movofiao-iav els detcanevre rjpepes, They 
came to Monobhasid in fifteen days. 

Time how Often. 

11. The accusative of <j> op d or /3o\d, tune, ac- 
companied by a numeral adjective, answers to the 
question how often. (§ 31, 3.) 

Further, this accusative admits of being limited 
by the accusative of a noun denoting the division 
of time. (§ 65, 6.) 

Hoaes (popes rov fiXeTreis ; How many times (or How often) do you 
see them? Ilivei piav (popav top p.rjva, It drinks once a month. Krv- 
ivnve rov dicopa p.ia (popd, Strike him once more. lievre fioXes dcpevre- 
yjres, You have been appointed governor five times. 

12. KdOe, every, followed by the accusative of 
time, answers to the question how often. 

Urjyaivei Kade prjva, He goes every month. Tov eftXene Ka&e f)p.epav> 
He used to see him every day. KdOe copav 6a o~ov to Xey<o ; Must J say 
it every hour to you ? ^Eir^yaive Kade Tpels xpdvovs, He used to go every 
three years. 



Instrumental and Modal Relations. 

§ ««• 

The instrument, manner, means, are put in the 
accusative with the preposition pe, with, by means 
of by, in. 



THE CASES. 159 

Tov €KTV7rr}(rav pe to £v\ov, They struck him with the stick. QeXec va 
fiyakr] to (peidi and ttjv Tpvna pe tov TpeXov to x*P l i ^ e wants to get 
the snake out of the hole with the fool's hand. Tov eo~Te(pdva)o~av pe vpv- 
aovv arecpavov. They crowned him with a golden crown. To enrjpe pe 
to o-TvaOi tov, He took it with his sword. 

Me tI TpoTrov to eicape ; In what manner did he do it ? To direicTvo-e 
pe tov kottov tov, He acquired it by his labor. Zfj pe y^copl kcu vepo, 
He lives by (on) bread and water. Aia/3a£a) pe tov Xvxvov, I read by 
lamp-light. HepuraTa ttjv vv^ra pe to cpeyydpi, I walk in the night by 
moonlight. To ttovKovv p,e ttjv mixnv, They sell it by the yard. 



Accompaniment, Union, Equality, Similarity. 

1. Accompaniment is expressed by means of 
the accusative with fxe, with. 

'Enr/ye (or 9 HX0e) pe Tpels xiXiaSe? orpdrevpa, He went (or He came) 
with three thousand men. Me irolov 6a Ta^eibevo-ys ; Whom shall you 
travel with f 'O KoprjTrjs ilve era do-Tpo p,e ttjv ovpd, A comet is a star 
with a tail. c O avOpconos pe tcl yeveia, The man with the beard. *E<paya 
/i' avTovs, I ate with them. 

2. Union, approach, equality, similarity, are ex- 
pressed by means of the accusative with fie, with, 
as; and after certain words, with eU, to, in, on, 
against 

' Appaficovidfa tj\v 6vyaT£pa pov p,e tov vlov o~ov, I betroth my daughter 
to your son. Me a\\ov dvdpa ttjv (Skoyovv, They marry her to another 
man. Ga ere oTedpavacrr) pe ttjv BvyaTepa Tns, She will give you her 
daughter in marriage ; She will marry you to her daughter. Tlavhpev- 
erat per avTov, She marries him. ' ' AKK.ovp.ino~e to els piav ycovid, Lean 
it against a corner. 

Verbs to which this rule applies : aKKovpnifa els, aKKovpirifa tov 
els, dvaKaTovw tov pi, dvaKaxovopat els, avTiVTeKopai els, dppafBcovidfa, 
epiiKeyut pe, evovco pi, lao8vvap.a> pi, /coXXeo tov els, 6/xtXco pe, opoiafa 
p.e, 7raXata) p.e, mdvopat pi, o-Kavda\i£opai pi, o-vpnedepidfa pi, e'xco 
avp-TveOeplav pe, o~vp(p<ova pe, o~vvavao~Tpe<popai pe, Taipidfa tov p.e, 
(pikiovopai pe, and the like. 

Adjectives : 'laos pk, equal to, 'lo~iapi, exactly, "precisely, equally, 6/zoi- 
os pi, like, similar to. 



160 VOICES. 

Price, Value. 

§ «8- 

1. The price of a thing is put in the accusative, 
commonly without, and sometimes with, hi, a, for. 

Tloao r dyopacres ; What did you buy it for? To dyopaaa dem dpa- 
X^ds, I bought it for ten drachmas. Aev d^i^t rpla ao-7rpa, It is not 
worth three aspers. Ta hlhovv SobSexa bpaxp-as to era, They sell them at 
(the rate of) twelve drachmas apiece. To edcoKa beet bvo aanpa, I sold 
it for two aspers. To pv£i ef^e 8o)Se/ca irapabes rj died, Mice was worth 
twelve paras an oke. Ta geTipovv deica ^tXiaSc? ypocria, They value 
them at ten thousand piasters. Ti eVX^pcoo-es' 6Y avro ; What did you 
pay for it? Uoao to 7rov\rjcres; What did you sell it for? 'EttqAtjOtj 
8vo irapades, It was sold for two paras. Ta £uXa 7rooXoOi/rai rpla ypo- 
cria to <p6pToop.a, Wood is sold at (the rate of) three piasters a load. 

2. "When more things than one are sold for the 
value of a given coin, eU, to, for, precedes the name 
of that coin. 

Ta inovkovo-av Se/ca 's ttjv tjpaxp-rjv, They sold them at the rate often 
for a drachma. 



VOICES. 

Active Voice. 
§ 69. 

1. The active voice comprises nearly all the 
transitive or active, and intransitive or neuter 
verbs. 

2. A number of verbs are both active and neu- 
ter ; as yvpl^co, turn, irepvw, pass. 

3. Causative verbs have the active form; as 
a7re\7r/fo), drive to despair, airOKOifil^w, put to 
sleep. 



MOODS AND TENSES. 161 

Passive Voice. 

§ **■ 

1. Many verbs in the passive are also reflexive ; 
that is, they are equivalent to the active followed 
by the reflexive pronoun. They are technically 
called middle verbs. 

NiTTTOfxai, I wash myself, equivalent to NiWg) top iavrov fiov (Nitttco 
ifiavTOv). 

2. Some passive verbs are reciprocal in the plu- 
ral; as 

'AyKaXia^e&z, We hug each other, equivalent to ' Ay Ka\id£ofiev 6 
evas top aXkov. 

3. Any passive verb admits of becoming re- 
flexive or reciprocal by the addition of dro? /jlov, 
fjiovos fiov, /jbova^o^ fiov, or pLovayos fiov. (§§ 51, 

12: 59.) 

'E7raivovvTai cltol tovs, They praise themselves. ''EarrjKaQrjKav dia va 
o-kotcoBovv avvaroi tovs, They revolted for the purpose of butchering one 
another. ^ErvcpXaBr] povos rov, He blinded himself 



MOODS AND TENSES. 

Indicative. 

§71. 

The indicative expresses the action of a verb as 
a fact, reality, or certainty. It affirms or denies 
the existence of a fact. 

1. The present indicative expresses that which 
14* 



162 MOODS AND TENSES. 

is going on now; or that which is permanently 
true. 

Aeyto, I say ; I am saying ; I do say. Aev Xeyo, I do not say ; I say 
not; lam not saying. '0 avdpcorros e^ei dvo x ei P a s, Man has two 
hands. 

2. The present indicative is very often used for 
the future, to express vividly that which will 
happen. 

Mer okiyov tov Traarpevovu, They will shortly despatch him. EvOvs 
tov /3XeVco, I will see him presently. Kvpiov am^copw, To-morrow I de- 
part. Tore fiXeiropev els rl da tov xPW^vaovv ra oveipard tov, Then 
shall we see in what way his dreams will benefit him. Avo povov dvo-- 
KoXlas 6a anavTr](Tvs aKopr), Kal eWerm elcrai peaa, You have but two 
difficulties more to meet with, and then you are in the city. 

3. The present indicative is very often used for 
the aorist in animated narration; that is, when 
the past is conceived of as present. 

0t Tovpnoi epprjxvav pnopnes Ka\ Kavuvia, Kal noXepovv oXrjv ttjv fjpepa, 
The Turks were throwing bomb-shells and cannon-balls, and they fought 
all day. 

4. The present indicative in certain connections 
is expressed by the English infinitive preceded by 
can or cannot 

To Kpeas 8e> rpayerai, wpov, Meat cannot be eaten (by man) raw. 
Aev tov vnocpepa nXeov, I cannot endure him any longer. Tov evpicrK(o 
*s to o-7riTi ; Can I find him at home f 

Note. Compare Lucian. Dial. Mort. 2. Ov cpepopev, <» UXovtcov, 
Mevi7T7ruv tovtovl tov Kvva TrapoiKovvTa. 

5. Sometimes the present indicative has the force 
of the imperative. 

'Ok™ fjpepas dev TpatTe ti7tot€, For eight days you must eat nothing. 

6. The imperfect expresses continued action 
going on in past time, without reference to its be- 
ginning or end. 



MOODS AND TENSES. 163 

"Ey pa<pa, I was writing; not I wrote. Aev eypacpa, I was not writ- 
ing; not 1 did not write. 

7. The imperfect is used to express that which 
happened often, customarily, or habitually. 

"EAeyei/ otl Kade tyevarns e^et kcu tov fidprvpd tov, He was wont to 
say that every liar had his witness. Ot TovpKoi Tore 8ev epdvdavav n.dp- 
piav £evT)v yku>o-o~av, The Turks at that time were not in the habit of 
learning any foreign language. 

8. The aorist indicative expresses a finished past 
action, the time required for its completion being 
left out of view. It simply narrates that which 
happened. 

"Ey pafya, I wrote ; I did write. Aev eypa-^a, I did not write. Tov 
ctdes ; Did you see him ? 'H 'AXapdva ixaXdaOn drro rovs Tovpicovs, 
Alamdna was destroyed by the Turks. 

9. The aorist indicative is used also where, 
in English, the perfect would be more appro- 
priate. 

To eVeXeuocra, I have finished it. 'Aicopa bev rjXde, He has not come 
yet. 9 HX6a vd ere i§a>, / have come to see you. *Ep.a6es to p-ddvp-d aov ; 
Have you got your lesson ? Answer, To ep.a6a, I have got it. U6aa 
p.ds ecpepes ; How many have you brought us? 

10. The aorist indicative often supplies the 
place of the pluperfect. 

Eirrev otl eypayj/e rpia ypdppara np\v az^a^cop^o"^, He said he had 
written three letters before he departed. 

11. The aorist indicative is used for the future, 
to denote the certainty or speedy completion of 
an action ; that is, when that which is expected 
to happen is conceived as having already hap- 
pened. 

*Eav ere aKovarji eWpS^cres" tov dbe\(pov o~ov, If he shall hear thee 
thou hast gained thy brother. 

12. Verbs, of which the signification includes 
the idea of continuation, have, in the aorist indie- 



164 MOODS AND TENSES. 

ative also, reference to the time required for the 
completion of the action. 

Atarpt^a), spend one's time, bieTpiyjra ; £a>, live, e&ara ; pevta, remain, 
epeiva. 

13. The future indicative expresses that which 
will take place in future time. 

Avptov 6a rbv tSco, / shall see him to-morrow . Hot* 6a. to Kafirs; 
When shall you do it ? Aev 6a to Kufjuo ttotc, I will never do it. 

14. After orav, iv hen, the auxiliary 6 a means 
I am about to do anything, I am on the 'point of 

doing anything. 

Na napaTrjpovv t'l cr^/xara ndpvet to (3p£(pos OTav 6a to @a7rrio~ovv, 
They shall observe ivhat gestures the infant makes when they are about 
to baptize it. "O ti 6a SpiXrjcrvs Trpenet irp&Tov va to o-v\Xoyur6fjs KaXd, 
Whatever you are going to say, you must first consider it well. 

15. The future indicative beginning with va 
is used chiefly in the apodosis of a conditional 
clause. 

Ai> (7 aicovcrr) va optkrjs eTai, va Ibys tot€ t'i 6a o~e naprj, If he hear 
you talk so, you iviil see what lie tvill do to you. 

16. The continued future indicative expresses 
that which will be going on in future time. It is 
simply the present transferred to the future. 

Ot av6pa>7roi iv ocrco £ovv 6a irveovv tov depa, Men will breathe air. as 
long as they live. Avptov 6a Tvo\epa>p,ev, To-morrow we shall be fighting. 

Note 2. Compare N. T. Matt. 24, 9. *Eo~eo-6e ptaovpevot. Luc. 
1, 20. "Earj o-icoTroiv K.a\ pr) Svvdpevos XaXtja-at. b, 10. "Ear) £ayyp<av. 

17. The perfect indicative expresses an action 
which is now completed ; or a past action whose 
effects are still felt. It belongs to the present 
rather than to the past. 

This tense is not much used in Modern Greek, the aorist being 
generally preferred on account of its simplicity. 



MOODS AND TENSES. 165 

Aev tov exa> ?8«, I have not seen him. To %«$■ iroifiao-fievov to oAo- 
yov ; Have you got the horse ready f "e X g> dyopao-^uov top f'XaKff 
tov, I have bought off his watchman. Eive dnonecpaXio-uevos, He has 
been beheaded , He is beheaded. 

18. The future perfect expresses that which will 
be completed in future time. It is the perfect 
transferred to future time. 

0a tovs e'xovv dnoKecpaXio-p.evovs avpiov to ixearjfxepi, Tliey will have 
beheaded them to-morrow noon ; that is, to-morrow noon we shall be able 
to say, "Efi/e a7roKe(pcikLo-p,evoi," They are beheaded. Mer okiyas fjfie- 
pas 6a rjve Tekeicopevov, In a few days it will be completed. 

19. The pluperfect expresses an action which 
was completed at some past time. It is the past 
of the aorist. 

"Otclv rjXdes to elxa Tekeia>p,evov, When you came I had finished it 
(had it finished). To et^a Kajxei nplv i'XOrjs, I had done it before you 



Subjunctive Mood. 

§ »». 

The subjunctive mood expresses the action of 
a verb, not as a fact, reality, or certainty, but sim- 
ply as a conception. Accordingly, it is employed 
to denote what is possible, probable, conditional, 
contingent, doubtful, uncertain. 

1. The present subjunctive expresses continued 
action, without reference to its beginning or end. 
It regularly points to the future. (For examples, 
see below.) 

2. The aorist subjunctive expresses momentary 
action (not continued). As to time, it points to 
the future. (For examples, see below.) 

3. The future subjunctive is the future of 



166 MOODS AND TENSES. 

the past ; that is, the action it expresses is future 
with reference to past time. (For examples, see 
below.) 

4. The future subjunctive beginning with 6 a is 
used only in the apodosis of a conditional clause, 
of which the protasis is hi the imperfect. (For 
examples, see below.) 

5. In an apodosis, the future subjunctive takes 
the place of the future indicative, when the 
speaker or writer wishes to avoid the directness of 
the latter tense. (For examples, see below.) 

6. The continued future subjunctive is the con- 
tinued future of the past ; that 'is, it is to the past 
what the continued future indicative is to the 
present. (For examples, see below.) 

7. The perfect subjunctive does not differ essen- 
tially from the perfect indicative. 

Imperative Mood. 

§ *»• 

1. The imperative is used in commanding, ex- 
horting, or entreating. 

2. The second person singular of the impera- 
tive, in certain connections, has the force of the 
corresponding verbal noun in -hlov or -//.a. 

Ae'ye Xe'ye Kadrjpe'pav to e7rt(rre\//e kcu 6 i'Sto?, By saying it every 
day, lie finally believed it himself. Tplfie rpifie to eWao-e, By con- 
Stantly rubbing it, he broke it. TeXo? ndvTcov, nea-e crrjKov, epada kcu 
KafiaWtKevcd, Finally, by constantly falling and rising, I hare learned 
to ride. Me to rivayj/e afivae rnrore t)ev KdTopOoveis, By constantly 
kindling and extinguishing (by opposite acts), you can accomplish 
nothing. 



MOODS AND TENSES. 167 

3. The present imperative expresses continued 
action, without reference to its beginning or 
end. The time to which it points is present or 
future. 

Tpdcpe, Be writing ; Write on; Continue to write. KovBxjXi Trap ml 
ypdcpe, Take a pen and begin to write. Kd8ov, Keep your seat. 

4. The aorist imperative expresses momentary 
action (not continued). It regularly points to the 
future. 

Tptt^e, Write. KdQio~e, Sit down. Enre rov va eXBv, Tell Mm to 
come. 

Infinitive Mood. 

§ *4. ' 

The classical infinitive with the article admits 
of being used in Modern Greek. 

To e'x«i/, property. . To Xeyeiv, speaking, saying. To fxdxccrdai, 
fighting. Aeivos els to ypdcpeiv, Poiverful in writing ; A powerful 
luriter. Ids dpecrei avrbs 6 rponos rov gqv ; Do you like this mode of 
life? 

Participle. 

§ ™. 

1. The present participle expresses continued 
action without reference to its beginning or end. 
The time to which it refers is determined by the 
context. 

2. The aorist participle, in respect to action and 
time, has all the properties of the aorist indicative ; 
that is, it expresses a finished past action with- 
out reference to the time required for its comple- 
tion. 



168 DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

3. The perfect passive participle denotes an 
action which is now completed. 

4. A participle preceded by the article is ana- 
lyzed into the indicative preceded by the relative 
pronoun. 

'O cpvycbv oTpaTKarrjs, same as 'O aTpaTioDTrjs 6 o7tolos ecpvye, The 
soldier ivho fled. But <£uyo>i/ 6 o-rpaTKarrjs, or 'O arpaTioiTrjs <pvyd>v, 
The soldier having fled. (§50,11.) 

If the substantive is understood, the participle 
with the article acquires the force of a substan- 
tive. 

'O vt,KT)p.evo?, The vanquished one. 'O xopracr/xeW tov ireivao-pevov 
Bev tov 7rto-reuei, He ivhose belly is full does not believe the hungry man. 
c O avbpap.ivos, The brave man. 

Case Absolute. 

5. In Classical Greek, the case absolute regu- 
larly appears in the genitive. In Modern Greek, 
it is put in the nominative, as in English. 

Scholars always prefer the classical construction. 

' Anodavovros tov ~2a>Kpa.Tovs 6 TLXcitcov eV?5ye els Trjv Atyvrrrov, in 
popular Romaic, ' AnodavovTas 6 2a>icpaTr)$, 6 HXciTccvas Trrjye 's ttjv Ai- 
yvirro, Socrates having died, Plato went to Egypt. 



DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

§ *«• 

A sentence is independent, or absolute, when it 
requires no other sentence for its completion. 

*0 rfkios Xd/X7rei, The sun shines. 'O avOpanos etve Ovtjtos, Man is 
mortal. 

A sentence is dependent when it necessarily 
implies the existence of another sentence ; as 



DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 169 

"Onoios eXdy, Whoever comes. 'Eav eXdy avpiov, If he come lo- 
morroic. 

1. When the leading sentence denotes present 
or future time, the dependent sentence is put in 
the indicative or subjunctive ; the tense being de- 
termined by the exigencies of the case. 

Ae'yei (0a 617177, "E^ei 6i7ret) on rj^evpei ; on 6a (pvyrj ; on eypayjse ; 
on eixc ypaS/z-ei, He says (He will say, He lias said) that he knows; that 
he will go away ; that he wrote or has written ; that he had written. Ae- 
yovv on 6 avSpamos ttov ei^ey eXdei 6a VTrdyy €<el ttov eytvev rj p-d^n 
dia va. p.ddr) tl T}Ko\ov6r]o-€v, av dev €p.7ro&io-df} : They say that the man 
icho had come will go to where the battle icas fought, in order to learn 
what had happened, unless he is prevented. May \eyovv on, av pas- 
emave 6 'AX77 Tracras, 6a p.ds eyjrrjve £oovravovs, They tell us that, if 
Alt pasha had caught us, he would have roasted us alive. Ae'yei on, 
av top idjj, 6a rbv ofiiXrjo-r], He sags that, if he see him, he will speak 
to him. 

2. When the leading sentence denotes time past, 
the dependent sentence is put in the past tenses of 
the indicative, or in the future subjunctive; the 
variations being as follows : 

(1) The imperfect in a dependent sentence cor- 
responds to itself, to the present indicative, or to 
the present subjunctive. 

Ei7rai> on eypacpes, They said that you were tenting, or They said 
that you had been writing. Corresponding to Ae'yovv on eypacpes, 
They say that you were writing, or Aeyovv on ypdcpeis, They say that 
you are writing. 

"Orav elx*-i erpaye, When he had, he ate (would eat). Correspond- 
ing to ''Orav %xHi Tpayei, When he has, he eats. 

(2) The pluperfect in a dependent sentence cor- 
responds to itself, to the perfect indicative, aorist 
indicative, or to the perfect subjunctive. 

Ei7rez> on elx^s ypa\/m, He said that you had written. Correspond- 
ing to Aeyet on et^es ypdyjsei, He says that you had written ; Aeyet on 
e^etff ypd^-6t, He says that you have written; or Aeyet on eypa\jses, He 
says that you wrote. 

15 



170 DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

(3) The aorist indicative in a dependent sen- 
tence is analogous to itself. 

Elnev on eypa-^res, He said that you had written. Corresponding to 
Ae-yei on eypayjses, He says that you wrote. 

(4) The future subjunctive is analogous to 
itself, to the aorist subjunctive, or to the future 
indicative. 

Eltvcv on av rbv efiXene, 6a rbv 6p,iXovo~e, He said that if he had seen 
Mm, he would have spoken to him. Corresponding to Aeyei on ftp rbv 
e/3\e7re, da rbv Sp-iXovo-e, He says that if he had seen him, lie would have 
spoken to him ', Aeyei on av rbv Ibrj, da rbv 6p.iXi]o-r) (or 6a rbv opiXy), 
He says that if he see him, he will speak (or ivill be speaking) to him. 

Eirrev on av fj6e\av rbv mdaet, rjdeXav rbv oTconocrei, He said that if 
they had caught him, they would have slain him. Corresponding to Ae'-yei 
on av rbv Tndcrovv, 6iXovv rbv o-Korobcrei, If they catch him, they will 
slay him. . 

Elite on fjdeXe ypdyp-et, He said that he would (or should) write. Cor- 
responding to Aeyei on 6eXet ypdtyei. He says that he will (or shall) 
write. Elnav on 6 civOpanros rrov eix* v eX6ei ?)'#eAe virdyei eWi ttov eyi- 
vev vj p-d)(rj dia. va paOrj n 7]<oXov6rjaev, av dev fjdeXev €p.7robia0rj, They 
said that the man who had come would go to where the battle had been 
fought, in order to learn what had happened, unless he should be (was) 
prevented. 

3. The present , future , or perfect, of the indica- 
tive, is used in a dependent sentence after ver- 
bal forms denoting time past, in the following 
cases : - — 

(1) When the past is conceived of as present; 
that is, in animated speech. 

Eorez/ on ypdcpet, He said he was writing. He said Tpdcfxo, I wri.'e. 
Etnev on 6a <f>vyn, iav SeV ip.Trobia6r]-, He said he should go a tea*/, if he 
were not prevented. He said, 0a (pvya>, iav bev ep7rodio-6co, I shall go 
away, if I be not prevented. 

(2) When the dependent sentence involves a 
permanent fact or truth. 

"EXeysv on fj noXvpddeia oev eive cocpia, He used to say that learning 
was (is) not wisdom. 



DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 171 

The Moods with "Otl. 

§ rz. 

1. After verbs signifying to say, think, know, be- 
lieve, hear, see, show^ and their synonymes, otl, 
negatively otl Sep, with the indicative, or with 
the future subjunctive, is the immediate object of 
those verbs, the verb following it being in apposi- 
tion with it. 

Aeyei otl av eXenrev avrrj 6a rjp.ovv ^a/xei/o?, uxrav va. rjpaL rwpa crap?- 
vos, She says that, but for her, I should be a lost man, as if I were now 
a saved man. AeV ivofii^a otl fjtieXes bvvqBr) va to evpys, I did not 
think you could have found it out. 

Verbs to which this rule applies: aladdvopaL, clkovco, dp.(pLJ3dXXa>, 
a7ro5ei^i/a>, dTTOK.pivop.aL, /3e/3aiov<jo, /3Ae7Ta>, yva>pl£co, ypdcpco, Sei'^j/oo, dia- 
TaTTCo, (Wra£co, etSoTrotcS, eX7ri£a>, iv8vp.ovp.ai,- ivvoa>, iirayyiXXopaL, 
evpicrKcD, rj^evpco, 6appS>, KaTaXap-fidvco, Kav)(G>p.ai, KnpvTTco, Xeyco, Xn- 
crpovco, pavddvco, p.eTavoa>, p.nvva>, vopi^co, voa, 7rapa7rovovp.ai, napaTvpa, 
Ttaprjyopco, Treidco, TTLa-Tevco, Trpocnvoiovp.ai, 7rpo<fir)Tevoo, OTo^a^o/xat, avp.- 
Trepalvai, ra£co, vrrodeTco, vrronTeva), vnoar)(op.ai, <pavTa£op.ai, <£o/3epi£co, 
cppova). 

2. The subject of the dependent sentence some- 
times becomes the object of the leading sentence ; 
in which case, ore is in apposition with that 
object. 

Tov eiba otl e,3yaive, I saw hhn coming out. 2e rj^evpeo otl eio-ai cro- 
<pos, I know (thee) that thou art wise. Tbv aToxd£op.aL otl tov erna- 
crav, I think they have caught him. Tbv v7ro7TTevovTai otl e%€i o-kottovs 
K€Kpvpp.€vovs, They suspect him of having secret designs. 

3. "Otl is put after certain adjectives and sub- 
stantives implying a verb. 

Aei/ eirai dp.$L$oXia otl 6a iicXex&jji TJiere is vo doubt that he will be 
elected ; No one doubts that he will be elected. Et>p///ce dqt>opp.r)v otl 
Si\|/-a, lie got up the pretence that he was thirsty. 

Words belonging; here: au<pi/3oAia, d(popp.rj, /3//3aics-, ei'S^a-is, I8ea, 
7rapd$eLyp.a, and the like. 

4. When the dependent clause is stated as a 
conception (not as a fact), ore is followed by va, 



172 DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

negatively va jui], with the subjunctive, or the past 
tenses of the indicative. 

Aev mo-revei otl va rovs peXv av rpcayrjs 37 av ivivns, He does not be- 
lieve that they care whether you eat or drink. 

5. ( 'Otl is sometimes omitted, as in English. 

K' eKelvos a.7roKpidr]Ke rj\6e va irpoo~Kwr]crn, And he answered that he 
came to worship. EtW tov dev elfiai eToipos-, Tell him I am not ready. 

6. "On with its verb is the subject of a few im- 
personal verbs ; the impersonal verb always pre- 
ceding OTL. 

^Huovcrdr) otl eirapdn to Meo-oXdyyi, It ivas heard that Mesoldngi had 
been taken. Aeyerai otl dnedave, It is said that he is dead. 

Impersonal verbs belonging here : aKoverai, aXrjdevei, it is true, \i- 
yerai, Trpoepx^rai, o~vp.TrepalveTai, cpaiverai. 

7. Particularly, or i with its verb is the subject 
of elve, it is, y he rat, it becomes, followed by cer- 
tain neuter adjectives. 

EtW dXndeararov otl KaTehiKdo-Qnarav els BdvaTov, It is very true that 
they ivere condemned to death. Tiverai 8?)\ov otl ecpovevdrj, It becomes 
evident that he ivas murdered. 

Adjectives belonging here : dXndes, dr)\ov, to irapd^evov, (pavepov. 

8. "Otl admits of being preceded by the neuter 
of the article. 

To otl 6vopd£eTaL crTpaTnybs bev crrjuaiveL riVore, That he is called 
general signifies nothing. Tu^a bev rjtjevpeis to otl p? dnapvridrjKes ; 
Do you pretend that you do not know that you have forsaken me ? "E\e- 
ye to 7tg)s dev p? dnapvieTaL, He said that he would never forsake me. 
To dvacpepco els dnodei^LV tov otl to. aypia edvrj elve (pvcritid dveTrideKTa 
iroXLTLo-pov, I mention this as a proof that savage nations are naturally 
incapable of civilization. 'OpiXovv nepl tov otl dev npeireL va <aTa- 
(ppovcovTai 01 7TT(oxoi, They are talking about the doctrine that the poor 
7nust not be despised. 'Ekto? tov otl rjaav 7rra)^oi, rjaav koX Kev68o^oL, 
Besides being poor, they were also vainglorious. 

9. Frequently to, it, or toGto, this, accompanies 
on, (7r<w?) in the same sentence. (§ 51, 16.) 

Ucbs to £epeT€ ttcos elpaL 6 "2KaXTaobr)pos ; How do you know that I 



DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 173 

am Skaltsodhimos ? "K^lov arjpeLaxrecos elvai kcu tovto, otl bev rovs 
6vop,d£ei avdpas, dW dvdpomovs, This also is worthy of notice, that he 
does not call them men, but human beings. 

10. Words quoted without any change admit 
of being preceded by otl. 

Aeyei on " Na (pvyvs dVe8a>,'' He says, "You must go away hence" 

11. At on (Sl otl), because, for, follows the anal- 
ogy Of OTL. 

i-vye a-n-eSob btori bev ae QeXovv, Depart hence, for they do not want- 
you. M' enpocrTatje va (pvya dneicel Start bev /xe rjdeXav, He commanded 
me to go away thence, because they did not want me. 

The Moods with Na. 

§ ™. 

Nd, negatively Na pr\, with the subjunctive, or 
with the past tenses of the indicative, in connec- 
tion with certain verbs, adjectives, substantives, 
and prepositions, has the properties of an indeclin- 
able neuter pronoun. 

The English in this case usually employs the 
infinitive mood. 

1. Na with the present or aorist subjunctive, 
after certain verbs, particularly such as signify 
desire, intention, ability, or endeavor, denotes the 
immediate object of those verbs, not as an existing 
fact, but as a desire. 

With the same tenses, after verbs signifying to 
command, request, compel, permit, cause to do, and 
some others, it forms the remote (and sometimes 
the immediate) object of those verbs ; the immedi- 
ate object being in the accusative. 

0eXo) va ypdyj/aj, I ivish to write- Ge'Xto va (frvyrjs, I wish you to flee. 
QeXeis va nrjyaivco ; Do you wish me to go ? Are you willing that I should 
15* 



174 DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

go ? EtVe tov vd e\9r), Tell him to come. 'AyanSy vd dta/3u£o>, Hove 
to read. 'AvdytcaaeTov vaTroXeprjarj, Compel him to fight. 'HvajKaaQr) 
vd noXeprjo-j], He ivas compelled to fight. 'EX7ri£a> va <re tSw, I hope to 
see you. "Apx^e va ypd(pj], He began to write. "Acpnae tov va. Xeyrj 
6 tl deXei, Let him sag ivhat he pleases. 

Verbs belonging here: dyairu), dyavi^opai, dvayKafa, d£idi/co, anaiTa, 
dnoCpacri^G), dpyco, dp^t^oa, dcpivco, /3id£a), fiovXopai, •yi/wpoSora), yvpevco, 
SiSdcrKa), §iopi'£o), (Wrd£a>, dvvapat, bvanoXevopai, e'X7ri'£a>, epirodi^ca, ev- 
OappvvG), evdvpi£a>, €^aKoXov8a>, iiriOvpu), €7rtrpe7ra), €7rt^etpi'^op.ai, iiri- 
^eipGo, eToipd£op.ai, rjp7Topa), t]^€vpco, BeXcc, Kapva>, KarabexopaL, Kara- 
Treidco, Karopdovoj, Kivbvvevo), kivw, kottw, Xeyco, Xvnovpai, pavddvto, p.eX- 
Xco, 68r]ya>, opeyopai, 6p/a£co, dcpei'Xco, napayyeXXoa, 7rapa<aXS), irapaKi- 
va>, 7rdcr^a), 7ra<r;(t£a), 7rava>, 7rpo/cptVco, 7rpoo"p.eVco, Trpoo-TraQw, 7rpocrrd£co, 
7rporipco, o~Kid£opai, o~Koneva>, cnrevdoo, avyKaTaveva>, avpftovXeva), o~vp,- 
(po)v(o, aweiS i£(o, roXpco, virocrxopaL, viroxpeovco. <po/3oi)/icu, xpeooorco. 

§. After verbs signifying to say, think, believe, 
see, hear, find, and their synonymes, va with the 
present or aorist subjunctive, or with the past 
tenses of the indicative, expresses the object of 
those verbs less confidently than on with the in- 
dicative. (§ 77.) 

Further, the subject of the dependent, admits 
of becoming the object of the leading, sentence; 
vd with its verb being in apposition with that 
object. 

"AKovaa vd Xeyovv, or Tovs fJKovcra va Xeyovv, I heard them say. But 
"HKovaa on eXeyav, I heard that they were saying. BXtVco vd Xelnovv 
Suo, I see that two are missing. Tov eiSa va irepnraTfi, 1 saw him walk 
or walling. EiSe tovs ovpavovs v* dvoiyovv, He saw the heavens opened. 
Aes vd to e/ca/xe ; Do you think he has done it ? Me elnav vd pe ndpovv 
darwopov, They told me they would make me mayor. 

Verbs belonging here : aKovco, (BXenoi, Xeyco, Tnoredco, aToxd£opai, 
(paivopai. 

3. Na with the present or aorist subjunctive 
follows certain adjectives. 

"Eyivev a'lTios vd x"-Qovv, He was the cause of their being lost. *Ai;io$ 
vd TipaTai, Worthy of being honored. 

Adjectives belonging here : u'itlos, d£ios, e7riTr]$eios, eToipos, luavos, 
KaXos, able, capable, npoOvpos. 

4. Na with the present or aorist subjunctive is 



DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 175 

put after certain substantives implying a verb or 
adjective. 

Mas edaxe abeiav vd vndycop-ev ottov 6e\op.ev, He gave us leave to go 
whithersoever tee pleased. Ztjtco dbeiav vd e/x/3co jue'oa, I ask permission 
to come in. Aev elve icap-pta dvdytcn va pelvvs ottlctg), There is no need of 
your remaining behind. 'AvdyKrj Trdaa va yevovv ravra, These things 
must needs be. 'E^edoBrj dnocpao-is va. o~ovfi\io-8f) 6 Aidicos, It icas de- 
creed that Dhidkos should be impaled. 

Nouns belonging here : aSeia, dvdyicn, dno(pao~is, dpdda, yvapv, dia- 
rayr), to St/catov, Suo/co/via, eXirida, emuvpia, evxaipia, deXwpa, Idiorns, 
iKavorns, Kaipos, vofios, oorjylai, Trelcrpa, irpoOvpia, o-kottos, o~vp<pcovia, 
o-vvr}6eia, rporros, X"P IS > XP eoy > &P a - 

5. N a with, the present or aorist subjunctive, or 
with the past tenses of the indicative, is the sub- 
ject of a number of verbs (called impersonal) ; the 
verb always preceding va. 

Upei7€i va eXQys, You must come; It is necessary that you should 
come. IIw yiverai va prjv tov yvcopt^co ; How is it possible that I should 
not know him? 'Anecpao-iadr] va Kpepaadovv o\oi ol npoeo-Tot, It was 
decided that all the primates should be hung. 

Impersonal verbs belonging here : dirayopeveTai va pr), dTrocpaai^e- 
rai, yiverai, eVSe^erai, Xeinei, TT\rjO~id£ei, 7rpe7rei, avyx^opelrai, crvpfiai- 
vet, avpcpepei, TU^atVet, (paiverai, (pddvei, ^petd^erat, coCpeXel. 

6. Nd with the same moods (5) is the subject 
of elve, ytveTcu, or (paivercu, followed by certain ad- 
jectives and substantives. 

When a sentence of this description becomes the object of a 
verb signifying to think, consider, regard, find it to he, vd is in 
apposition with a substantive or pronoun. 

E«/e cibiKov vd ireivovv ol cpLXo-rrovoi, It is unjust that the industrious 
should starve. To vopi^co dbiitov vd neivovv ol (piXoTrovoi, I consider it 
unjust that the industrious should starve. Blve dbvvarov vd prjv rbv 
etdav, It is impossible that they should not have seen him. Elve bwarbv 
va p,qv to xpetao#o3, It is possible I may not need it. Avvarbv vd pr/v 
to etTrer, It is possible you may not have said it. To npwTov pov %pyov 
tjtov vd eXdeo vd ads t'3a>, J\I)j Jirst business was to come and see you. 
Aev rJTov evuoXov vd tov iSco, It was not easy that I should see him. 

KdXXiov vd eVouve? tovto rrapd ckcIvo, It were better if you had done 
this rather than that. EiW (ppovipdiTepov vd oicotto tcdvels irapd vd cpXv- 
aprj, It is reiser to be silent than to talk nonsense. (§ 64, 13.) 

Adjectives and substantives belonging here : ddtKov, ddvvaTov, dvay- 



176 DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

kcuov, avoarov, a-rrpeirov, SUaiov, cWardV, SuctkoXoz;, ev8e%6pevov, ivrporrr), 
eTvifiXafies, epyov, evKokov, evTV^la, et^, rjdtKuu, kclkov, koXov, ctkottos, 
airdviovi avy)((opr)pevov, avvrjdeia, avcrrnpa, and the like. 

7. Na admits of being preceded by the neuter 
of the article. 

To va r)£evpr] Kave\s ra aTrodrrjpara twv 7r\avr}Ta>v bev elve cro(pia, To 
know the distances of the planets is not wisdom. *H didra^is rod va dava- 
T(od(ho-iv oXot oi Trpov\ovTes rod eOvovs, The decree that all the first men 
of the nation should be put to death. 'A^e^ei noXv dirb to va. rjve dv- 
Spelos, He is very far from being brave. Karayivovrai els t6 va ypd- 
cpovv, They are engaged in writing. 'Ej/acr^oXetrat els to va diddaKj], 
He devotes his time to teaching. 

After dvrl and ^cop is the article is not used before va. 'Avrt va 
TovsTrknpooo-y, Instead of paying them. Xcopls va t6 r^evpa), Without 
knowing it; Without my knoivledge. 

8. Frequently va is in apposition with a sub- 
stantive, or with touto, this, to, it. (§ 51, 16.) 

"lEva povov pe pevei tarptfco, *s top Tiodnrbv \ipeva va e\6(o va a evpco, 
Only one remedy is left me, — to come to the wished for haven to find 
thee. * AXXo dev ere \eyco, elpr) tovto • v dnexrjS " 7ro Ta 7Tuevpard>8r] 
irord, I say nothing more to you than this : that you should, abstain from 
spirituous liquors. Aev to 'Xni^ev r) Tantivr] utt'lct(o va yvpian, She did 
not expect ever to return, — poor lass ! 

9. Na with the present or aorist subjunctive is 
used in exclamations denoting disappointment. 

T £2 ayioi, va vnocpepa) Toaovs koitovs ! ye Saints ! that I should suf- 
fer so much ! Kpipa eva Teroio novXi vd rjve dqjecvov ! What a pity that 
such a beautiful bird should be voiceless ! 



Purpose, End. 

§ *»• 

1. Nd, more emphatic Aia va, negatively Na 
firj, Ata va fir), that, in order that, to the end that, 
for the purpose of, takes the present or aorist sub- 
junctive. After verbs denoting time past, it may 
be followed by the future subjunctive. 



DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 177 

Aid tovto, for this reason, admits of being 
used in connection with Aud vd. 

<£>epe pov \|/<api vd cpdyoo. Bring me bread to eat. Ufjyaive els to 
uTz'iTi tov va tov elnfjs vd e\6rj Sio'n tov 6e\co, Go to his house and tell 
him to come, for I want him. BXeVe va prj /3pa£?7, See that it does not 
boil. Ef^a Kat aXka va eras Vco, 1 had other things to tell you. I.ov to 
edcoKa va. to <fiopj]s, I gave it to you to wear. Eupe avOpconov ttlo-tov hid 
va ae odnyrjerr], Find a trustworthy person to guide you. Aid tovto ae 
acpnaa els rrjv Kpr/Tnv, bid va, biopdovys to. eWeLnovTa, For this reason 
left I thee in Crete, that thou shouldst set in order the things that are 
wanting. 

2. Mr)(v), that not, lest, expressing a negative 
purpose usually, appears without vd. Mrjirco^, in 
the same sense, is never preceded by vd. 

'iSe pi)v tov %xTi Kpvppevov, See lest he has him concealed. KdOive 
(ppovipa fxtjv to p-dOrj 6 Sibdo-Kcikos, Demean yourself lest the master 
hear of it. Kdpe to prjncos fed! Ttpcopndrjs, Do it lest thou be punished. 
Upoaexere prj ads Tr\avr]crrj Kavels, Take heed no man deceive you. Na 
7TepL77aTfjs irpoo-eKTiKa prjitcos a aKovo-jj, You must step carefully lest he 
(should) hear you. 

3. Words implying apprehension, or suspicion, 
admit of being followed by pur] or fMrjircos. 

'YiroTTTevco pr)7ra>s to evodevcrav, I suspect they have adulterated it. 'O 
(pofios prjv dvax<^pwovv, The fear lest they depart. <$o[3ovpai prj cpv- 
yws, I fear lest you go away. 'E<po/3eicro prjircas 7reo-rjs (or fjdekes ne- 
aei), You feared lest you should fall. 



Interrogative Sentences. 
§ 8©. 

A question in the words of the person that asks 
it is called direct ; in the words of the person who 
relates it, it is called indirect. 

An indirect or dependent interrogative sen- 
tence beginning with an interrogative word, is 
the object (immediate or remote) of the verb of 
the preceding sentence. (§§ 56: 59.) 



178 DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

1. When a definite or satisfactory answer is ex- 
pected, the indicative is used. 

Me yvapi&is ; Do you know me ? BXeireLs eicelvo to fiovvo ; Do you 
see yonder mountain ? 'Eav to eicap.es ; Was it you that did it ? 0e- 
Xets- va. uTrdyo) ; Are you willing that I should go ? QeXets va p,r) are- 
Kanai eSo> ; Do you wish me not to stay here ? 

Tis to elire ; Who said it ? Tt avdpooTroi elve avToi ; What men are 
they? Tt deXeis va aov SoVco ; What do you wish me to give you ? At- 
ari 8ev r irr}yaiveis eitei ottov ere areXvco ; Why do you not go whither I 
send you? ILolos elve uvtus ttov epx^rai; Who is this that comes? 
nolos Xeyeis va to eKape ; Who do you think did (or has done) it? Holav 
deXere va. acts ^apt'erco ; Which of them do you wish that I should give 
you? AoVe pov to fiifiXiov. TLoiov ; Give me the bool: Question, 
Which booh? Tiddev epxecrai; Whence comest thou? Where do you 
come from? Uoaov pa<pdv elcrai ; How far are you ? Uore da ere £a- 
va'ihovpev ; When shall toe see you again ? Uov deXeis va. irrjyaivoopev ; 
Whither do you wish us to go? IJSs o-Toxd£ecrai ; How do you think ? 

Tov r)pd)TT]ara nod da. vndyy. I asked him whither he would go ? 'Epco- 
Trjo-av av eKaropdcoo-e Twrore, They ashed whether he had accomplished 
anything. Tovs epooTncra av da (pvyovv, I ashed them whether they would 
go away. Tov rjpoaTrjcre av deXy va. vndyy pi tov avdpomov, He ashed 
him whether he was willing to go with the man. 

The verbs upon which an indirect question depends are aKovco, oVo- 
Set^vco, j3Xe7rco, Stcrra^ft), ivdvp.ovp.ai, epcorco, 7]£<zvpco, KaTaXapfidvco, Xeyco, 
pavddvco, TrapaTrjpS), and the like. 

2. When the answer to a question depends 
upon the will or opinion of the person asked, vd, 
negatively va /jltj, is used with the first and third 
persons of the present or aorist subjunctive, or 
with the past tenses of the indicative. 

Tt va. Kcip-co ; What wilt thou that I do? What do you wish me to 
do? What shall I do ? What can I do? Tt va. etirn Kaveis ,• What 
can one say? Tt va eyive ; What do you think has become of him? 
'AXXa Toypa ttov dnedave Start va xXat'co ; But now he is dead, wherefore 
should I weep ? *Av u-penn va to Kap.oop.ev, Start va p,i)v to Kap.copev 
Kadais npeneL ; -If we must do it, ivhy not do it properly ? TLoiov va irpw- 
TOTvio~Tevcra> ; Whom shall I believe first? notos- va to Kapy ; Who shall 
(can, must) do it ? notos- va rjv avTos ; Who do you think this man 
is? noto? va tov eloe ; Who do you think saw him ? TLodev va epx*~ 
rat ; Whence do you think he comes ? Hodev va to (pepy ; Whence do 
you wish him to bring it? ILocra va (pepco ; How many shall I bring ? 
noVoi va eKpep,do-dr)crav ; How many do you think were hanged ? ILoTe 
va nnyaivco ; When do you wish me to got When must I go ? ILoTe 
va (pdyco, When can I eat? Uov va tov evpa ; Where can I find him ? 



DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 179 

TIov va poidcrr) tov dBeXcpov tov ; How can you say that he resembles his 
brother ? Hov va eViyye ; Where do you think he has gone ? Tlcbs vd 
to <n/xco ; How shall I do it ? How do you wish that I should do it? 

Aev rjtevpcD t'l va Kapco, I know not what to do. Aev fj£evpa tl va 
el'/Tco. I knew not what to say. EiVe pe Siari vd prjv to ndpa>, Tell me 
tchy I should not do it. 2vXXoyi£eTai ttoiov vd 7rpu>TOTTiCTTevaT], He is 
deliberating which of them to believe first. Tov ipooTrjaa ivoOev va fjp%e- 
ro, / asked him whence he teas coming. 

3. When permission or advice is asked, the first 
and third persons of the present or aorist subjunc- 
tive are used with v a , negatively v a p -r] , in which 
case the answer is val, yes, or oxh no. 

Na Tx6a> ; Wilt thou that I come ? Shall I come ? Are you willing 
that I should come? Do you give me leave to come? Na pt]v e'Xdco ; 
Shall I not come ? Na Tx6n ; Shall he come ? May he come ? Are you 
willing that he should come? Do you give him leave to come ? Na prjv 
eXdrj ; May he not come ? Are you not willing that he should come? 

4. The same tenses (3) are used also in expres- 
sions of indignation or contempt. 

'Eycb vd cpvyco ; Am I to go away ? Do you mean to say that I must 
go away ? 'Epeva va KTvirr)o-n ; To strike me ? Avtos v dnoddvn ; He 
to die ? Avtos Bvtjtos cos fjpeis ; He a mortal like us ? 'Ecru vd /3acrt- 
Xevcrvs ; You rule over us ? C H Ovyarepa pov va vnavbpev6fj pi avrov ; 
To think that my (laughter should have to marry him! 

5. The subject of a dependent interrogative sen- 
tence may become the object of the verb of the 
leading sentence ; in which case, the dependent 
interrogative sentence is in apposition with that 
object. 

"Alcove Ta 7rovXia t'l Xeve, Hear what the birds say. 'l8e rovs ncos rpe- 
Xow, See them, how they run. 2e rj^evpeo ttoIos elarai, I know thee who 
thou art : I know who you are. Kvrra^e tov ttcos rpcoyei, Look at hi)n, 
how he eats. Merpara Kapdj3ia Troaadve, Count the shij)S, — how many 
they are. 

6. An indirect interrogative sentence admits of 
becoming the subject of certain impersonal verbs. 

Uot€ iyevvrjdr] Ka\ ttotc <f£no~ev eive ayvcocrTov, When he wasborn. and 
when he lived, is unknown. Hore opcos apx<-o'€ to Ka^ Sev irpoaftiopi- 



180 DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

{erai /xe evKoXlav, But when the evil began is not easily determined. H6- 
aov elve drekes 6a (pavfj a/xeVwj, How imperfect it is, will immediately 
appear. 

7. An indirect interrogative sentence admits of 
being accompanied by to, it, or to v to, this. 

To /3XeVets [xe to. fxdna crov tovs £evovs 7ra>$ tovs Botttovv, You see 
with your own eyes how they bury strangers. 'Eav rjve diicaiov ivcoinov 
tov deov va v7raK.ovcop.ev iaas pdXXov irapd tov deov, Kpivere to eaels ol 
idioi, Whether it be right in the sight of God to hearken unto you more 
than unto God, judge ye. M' eTrpo^evqo-e kol tovto dnoplav, nodev 
€7rpe7T€ v dpxio-(o, This also put me into some doubt, namely, where 
I ought to begin. 

8. Not unfrequently, an interrogative sentence 
is preceded by the article, r 6 . 

To ti Kakb pod 'pde prrpocrTa va nal^co va yeXdaco ; What good has 
come before me that I should play and laugh ? Avtos 6d aov elirfj to 
ti irpeivei va Kapys, He loill tell you tohat you must do. To ir66e etve f/ 
fxdvva aov, ypa(prj ytd vd ttjs ypdyjrco, Tell me what country your mother 
belongs to, that I may write her a letter. 

9. The interrogative particles a pa, Tdx<*> often 
introduce a question. 

^Apa to ti va yivnte 17 pdvva tov TvcpTaKt] ; What has become of the 
mother of Ghiphtdkisf does anybody know? Ta^a 6d yiaTpevdco ; 
Shall I get well? 

10. In negative inter rogatives, Sev, not, expects 
vat, yes ; j^tto)?, or ^ va, expects o%t, no. 

Aev tov j3XeVeis ; Do you not see him f Mr)7rcos avTos povos elve dv- 
dpelos ; Is he alone brave ? M?) va fiovfidXia a(pd£ovvTai ; Can it be 
that buffaloes are slaughtered ? 

11. Sometimes a question beginning with Bev 
has the force of a mild imperative. 

Aev pov Xeyrjs tl 7rpdypa elv avTo ; Will you not tell me what that is? 

12. Sometimes a question beginning with Sev 
implies 8 vaTt, tvhy? 

Zdxo, dXXovvov Bev edives tyj xpv<roop.evTi <re\\a; Zdkhos, why didst 
thou not give the golden saddle to some other man f 



DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 181 

The Moods with the Relative. 
§ 81. 

1. When the relative sentence expresses a fact, 
its verb is pnt in the indicative; the particular 
tense being determined by the nature of the state- 
ment. 

The negative particle is Sep; thus, 6 oirolos Sep, 
irov Sep, and so forth. 

e O avdpa>7ro$, 6 otto'ios rj\de x@* s i && fayi) a ^P i0V T0 "^pcal, The man 
who came yesterday will go away to-morrow morniny. 'O avyypacpevs, 
tov ottolov to o~vyypap,p,a 6avp,d^€rai, KaTedindo-dr) ei? Sdvarov, The au- 
thor whose 'work is admired has been condemned to death. EvOvs nod 
(or v A[xa) rov eiSa ecpvya, As soon as I saiv him I went away. Elve 
rpzls firjves dcpov rj\6 'a, It is three months since I came. Aev elve pia 
copa dcpov rov ei§a, It is not an hour since I saiv him. ' KKopn dev eW- 
pao-av rpia err) dcpov p.ds a<pr]o-e vyelav, Three years have not elapsed 
yet since he bade us farewell . Tpels rjpepes direpao-av dcpov (nov) vn- 
o-T6vco, It is now three days since I began to fast ; I have been fasting 
these three days past. 

2. When the relative sentence is conditioned 
(the conditioning sentence being tacitly assumed), 
the relative is followed by pa, negatively pa /^tJ, 
with the subjunctive, or with the past tenses of 
the indicative. 

Hpe7ru vd evpjjs era ri.ro ottoIov vd o~e wcpekfj, You must find some- 
thing which shall benefit you. Xpeia£6peda toiovtov dpxnydv 6 oTroios 
vd ripa tovs vopovs, We need such a leader as shall respect the laws. 
"Enpene vd ivao-xo\n6w els era tl to ouolov vd pi cocpeXjj, It was proper 
that I should be employed upon something which should benefit me. Tlolov 
the to KaXrjTepov Kpaal oirov vd rjve ; What is the best wine that can be 
(or there is) ? 

Elve dbvvciTov vd evpns dvdpanov 6 orroios vd rjve TeXeios Kara 7rdVra, 
It is impossible to find a man who is perfect in everything. Aev virdp- 
^et tuttos els tov oivoiov vd prjv evplo~KeTai TiTtoTe eKXeicTov, There is no 
country in winch some choice thing may not be found. Aev vmipx^ av 
opcoTTos 6 oTTo'ios v dpcpiftdWx) on 6 rjXios 6d dvaTeiXj] avpiov. There 
is no man can make a question but that the sun will rise to-morrow. 
Aev vrrapxa. uvOpcairos oo-tls vd pe (3on6r]o-r}, There is no man who can 
help me. Aev eupt'cr/cerat dvOpconos tov oirolov vd prjv imTnyopncrev, 

1G 



182 DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

The man cannot he found whom he has not accused. 'Yndpxei e'Bvos ds 
to diTolov va firju evpicrKcovraL t'metpoi yj/evarai ; Is there a nation in 
zohich innumerable liars may not he found? 'Yndp^ei <pXvapia r) onoia 
va. pi)v i£;ecpcDvr]dr) diro Kavevav (fii\6<jo(pov ; Is there any sort of non- 
sense which has not been uttered hy some philosopher? Elacu eo-v 6 
TTpcoros uvOpoiiTos 7tov va iy€wi]6rj ; Art thou the first man that was 
hum ? 

Conditional Relative Sentences. 

3. A relative sentence often forms the protasis 
of a conditional clause, the sentence of the ante- 
cedent being the apodosis. 

For the sake of greater indefmiteness teal av , 
ever, soever, is put after the conditional relative 
Avoids (except otclv). 

The protasis is put in the present indicative, or 
in the aorist or future subjunctive. But when the 
relative is folio weed by ical av, the protasis is put 
in the subjunctive, or in the past tenses of the 
indicative. So when it begins with orau or 
oirorav. 

The apodosis admits of appearing in any verbal 
form. 

The negative particle is 8 e v ; thus, ottoios Bev, 
oa-Tt? Sep, ottov 8ev, and so forth. 

(1) When the protasis refers to present time, it 
is put in the present indicative, or in the subjunc- 
tive preceded by /cal a v. 

"Quotas 6eXei as *X8r], Whoever wishes, let him come. "Ottocos dev 
0*Aei l\s prjv eXOrj, Whoever does not wish, let him not come. "Oaris 
fieXet as Krjpv^rj TroXepov, Let him that will declare war. Aoae to ds 
ottoiov koI av BeXys, Give it to whomsoever you please. v O ™ ^£eupere- 
eaels ij^evpco k e'-yco, What you know. I know also. ,X A? (pcovdQj daov 
OdXei, Let him bawl as much as he pleases. "Onov /cat dv vndyns, nav- 
tov eyco ae cpvXaTTGi, Whithersoever thou goest, everywhere will I keep 
thee. *As e'xy dncos %x e h Be the thing as it loill; Be it as it may. 

(2) When the protasis refers to future time, it 



DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 183 

is put in the aorist subjunctive, and sometimes in 
the future indicative or subjunctive. 

"Ottoios <fivyi) @ a TLjJLaprjdfj, Whoever shall go away shall he punished. 
TLls otvolov dno fjfxas evpe8f} to rroTrjpiov, as 6avaTa>6fj, With ichomsoever 
of us the cup be found, let him be put to death. "O ti 7ndaj]S, va to 
(ptpys e'Sd), Whatever you shall catch, you must bring it hither, "o ti 
koI av aov 8o6j), tovto (pdye, Whatsoever shall be given to thee, even that 
eat thou. ~Els tcdOe Xe|t 8ikt) tov ttov rjBeka 7rpo<p€pei pe Si'Sei ttjv evxh v 
tov, He gives me his blessing every time I pronounce one of his ivords. 
"Oaa \dj3jjs, roo-a 6a boans, As many as you shall receive, so many shall 
you give. "Orav tov Idjjs, elne tov va. eXdy, When you see him, tell him 
to come. "OTav deXrjav, as eXdij, When he wishes, let him come. Ev- 
6vs ottov (or r/ A/xa) tov I8a>, tov opiXai, As soon as I see him, I will 
speak to him. Eldvs ottov rjdeXes tov Idei, 86ae pov e'idnaiv, As soon as 
you should see him, give me notice. 'A<fiov to evpco, aov to are Aj/w, 
After I have found it, I will send it to you. 

(3) When the protasis refers to time past, it is 
put in the past tenses of the indicative (including 
the perfect). 

"07TOLos to eTTrjpe Trperrei va to eTTiaTpe-^rji He who has taken it must 
return it. "O ti eiTiaaes, <pep€ to e§o>, Whatever you have caught,bring 
it hither. "Oaarjvpa, Toaa e^co, As many as I have found, so many have 
I. "Ottcos to €Kap.e, ercri 6a to Kap.rj ttoXiv, As he has done it, so will he 
do it again. 

(4) When the conditional clause expresses that 
which happens often, customarily, or habitually, 
or that which is permanently true, the protasis is 
in the present indicative or subjunctive, in the 
aorist subjunctive, or in the future indicative, if 
the apodosis refers to present or future time. 

But when the clause refers to time past, both 
parts appear in the imperfect indicative. 

"Ottoios 7T€iva€i Kopp.aTia oveipeueTai, He who is hungry dreams of 
slices of bread. "Ottolos ttoti&i 6d 7T0Tia6fj, He that waters shall himself 
be watered. 'O aovXravos eKpep-vovaev oTroiovfjdeXev, The sultan hanged 
-whomever he pleased. "Oo~o 6a epirooi&Tcu, Toao da datpovl^Tai, The 
more it is checked, the fiercer it will become. "Oaes (popes Ka\ av to 
Xp€iaa6r}, to Traipvei, He takes it as often as he wants it. Tov yp-evaTrjv 
8ev tov iTio-Tsvovv Kol otov Xeyy ttjv dXrjdeiav, They do not believe the 
liar even when he speaks the truth. "OTav tov efiXerres <f e'xaiperoucre, 



184 DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

Whenever you saw liim, Tie greeted you. "Ottov hev elve £vka 77 (pcoTia 
crjBuvei, Where there is no icood, the fire goes out. 

4. A conditional relative sentence admits of 
becoming the subject of its apodosis ; in which 
case, tovto, this, may accompany it. 

e 07Toiabr]TTOT€ not av rjve rj diddeais tg>v, tovto $ev pas Treipd^ei rjpas, 
Whatever their disposition may be, this docs not trouble us. 

Conditional Sentences. 

§ m. 

A protasis beginning with lav or av (sometimes 
va), if, negatively lav or av hev, if not, unless, is a 
species of conditional relative sentence, lav being 
regarded as a kind of orav, when. (§ 81, 3.) 

The protasis is put in the subjunctive, or indica- 
tive, except the present indicative. 

The apodosis admits of appearing in any verbal 
form. 

1. When the protasis refers io present time, it is 
put in the subjunctive. 

'E«i> tjv€ ftaaiKevs rod , Iaparj\, as Karafij} rapa curb rov aravpov, If 
he is the Icing of Israel, let him come down from the cross. 'Eai/ jueXe- 
ras va to Kapns, irpiirei va doays et'S^crtv, If you do intend to do it, you 
must give notice. *Av rovs ay arras, hiari rovs Trepnvai^eis ; If you love 
them, why do you ridicule them ? 'Eai/ e^, 6a hoarj, If he has, he will 
give. 

2. When the protasis refers to future time, it is 
commonly put in the aorist subjunctive, and some- 
times in the future indicative. 

*Ai/ bev Kapovv o tl rovs elTrrjs ripaprjo-e rovs, If they ivill not do what 
you will tell them, punish them. "Av ris rod elnj) on peWei va. 6ava- 
ra>6fi hia. rr)v ttlo-tlv tov, ttoctov 6a x a PV • \t an D one ^ ^ llin ^ l<J d ^ ie Wl ^ 
be put to death for his faith, how much he icill rejoice ! 

3. When a protasis, referring to time past, is 



DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 185 

assumed as a fact, it is put in the past tenses of 
the indicative, or in the perfect subjunctive ; the 
apodosis appearing in any of the tenses of the in- 
dicative. 

*Ay dyopaaes, irpeTrei va irknpcoo-rjs, If you liavc bought, you must pay. 
*Av a.7re6av€ x^^> $<* V ve ayrodafxevos kcu avpiov, If he died yesterday, he 
will be dead to-morrow also. *Av rov i^copiaev, et^e rovs Xoyovs rov, 
If he banished him, he had his reasons. 'Eai> rov h'xns ypd\j/€L, 6a. e\6rj, 
If you hare icrltten to him, he will eome. Elue dovvarov va p.rjv tov 
eidev, eav vnriyev et? tt)v oIk'lov tov, It Is impossible that he should not 
have seen him, if he had gone to his house. 

4. If the protasis refers to time past, and the 
apodosis to the future of the past, the former is 
put in the imperfect indicative, and the latter in 
the future subjunctive. 

In animated speech, however, the apodosis also 
is put in the imperfect indicative. 

*Ai> tov efiXeira, 6d tov 6p.Ckovo-a, If I had seen him, 1 should have 
spoken to him. Corresponding to ,v Av tov I8a>, 6a tov opiXrjo-co, If I see 
him, I shall speak to him. *Av tov evpto-<a, va efiXeires rl 6a tov eicapva, 
If I had found him, you would have seen what I should have done to him. 
Corresponding to*Av tov evpoo, va. ISys t'i 6a. rov Kap,a>, If I find him, 
you will see what I shall do to him. *Av ae eiriave, rjdeXe ere Kpep-daet, 
If he had caught you, he would have hanged you. Corresponding to 
*Aj/ ere Tndan, 6e\et <re fepeudcrei, If he catches you, he ivill hang you. 
' Hde\e p,e KaTarreicrei v dyopacrco b\as rov ras irpaypaTeias, edv $ev 
etpevya, He ivoidd have persuaded me to have bought all his- merchandise, 
if I had not gone array. Tovtos 6 civdpomos fiev dnl6vr)o-;<.ev, idv aTrel- 
X*v dno Kpaai, This man would not have died, if he had abstained from 
wine. 

(1) A conditional clause, apparently referring 
to time past, points to the future, when the 
speaker or writer wishes to avoid the directness of 
the future indicative. (§ 72, 5.) 

*Av tJtov bvvarov, dfieo-(tis rj6e\a to icd-pei, If it were possujle , I would 
do it immediately. *Av bev rjpeda ittcoxoI, bev r)6<i\ap.ev KaTacppoveladat, 
If we were not poor, we should not be despised. *Ai/ rjpovv ao-xnp-r) 
Kadios /xe cW^i/ei 6 KadpeCpT-qs, 7rcos rjpTropovcra v dyaTrrjda) ; If I icere as 
ugly as the looking-glass represents me, how could I be loved? Kcu e'yco 
16* 



186 DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

Tjfnropovcra. va. 6p.Ckr)0-a> tcadoos k eVei?, eav evplcrKede els ttjv Bicnv fxov, 

I also might speak like you, if you were in my place. 

(2) The protasis may refer to the past, and the 
apodosis to the present. 

'Eav tov icpovevav, dev 6a yjtov Tcopa e'Sa>, If they had murdered him, 
he icould not be here now. 

(3) An apodosis in the future subjunctive, or in 
the imperfect indicative, admits of appearing with- 
out its protasis ; the time to which it refers being 
determined by the preceding rules. 

Me peyaknv pov evxapicrTno-iv rj6e\a to icdpei, / would do icith great 
pleasure. *H8e\ev eicrBat, dbvvarov va evpr) tls dvBpamov tov ono'iov to 
dvdaTnpa va i^icrovTai pi to tov 'AttoXXcovos (§ 81, 2), It icould be im- 
possible to find a man whose stature should answer to that of Apollo. C H 
&pa Ttjs (fivyrj? 6a tjtov apxh <r(payrjs, The hour of fight icould have 
been the beginning of massacre. "UBikes vopiaei oti rjtjevpe to Kopdvi 
dne^co, You icould have thought he had the Koran by heart. 

(4) The imperfects rjOeXa, ajairovaa, and 
€7TL6v/uLov(ra, when they form an apodosis, are fol- 
lowed by va with the imperfect indicative, when 
this apodosis refers to present time. 

J/ H6e\a va. tov e,3Xe7res, I wish you could see him. 'Aywrrovo-a va 
rjpovv ejceT, I wish I was there. ' Ayanovaa va eaTeiceao, I would that 
you should stay : I wish you could (icould) stay. 'EmBvpovaa va tov 
r/Kova, I wish I could hear him. 

5. When the conditional clause expresses that 
which happens often, customarily, or habitually, or 
that which is permanently true, the protasis ap- 
peal's in the present or aorist subjunctive, and the 
apodosis in the present or future indicative. 

*Eai> itvaiv?) tis tov iavTov tov, 8ev tov iriaTevovv • iav KaTr]yopr)Tai 
fiovos tov, iruTTevovv TreptcraoTepa, If one praises himself they do not be- 
lieve him: if he blames himself, they believe more than he says. 

6. Sometimes eav is omitted for the sake of 
emphasis. 

To 6e\co,To Traipvee, I want it, I take it. 'Eireivaaes, <pdye, If you 



DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 187 

are hungry, eat. *H 6 evas ae Ibjj r) 6 aXkos, etve o\ov to 'Ibiov, "Whether 
the one or the other sees you, it is all the same. QeXys pr)Xo, enape, 
deXys Kvdavi, If you wish for an apple, take it; if you wish for a quince, 
take it. 

7. A protasis admits of becoming the subject or 
object of its apodosis; in which case touto, this, 
may accompany it. 

*Av yj/evBcovrai, rovro tovs eive (pva-LKwrarov, If they lie, this is most 
natural to them. 6a yrov KaXijTepov dc avrov dv dev et^e yevvrjdrj nore, 
Good were it for him if he had never been born. 

The Moods with 'flaav vd. 

§ 83. 

'Q.o-a.v vd, negatively <» era v vd /xr] , as if, as though, is followed 
by the present, perfect, or future, subjunctive ; or by the historical 
tenses of the indicative. 

'Epcoras- coadv vd /xrjv rj^evpys, You ask as if you did not know. Tp&>- 
yei oncrav va fjBeXev dnoOdvei avpiov, He eats as if he should die to-mor- 
row. 'Y-rreprjCpavevero coadv vd tjtov (3a<ri\icr(ra, Site felt proud as if she 
were a queen. 'Epavpocpopecrev 1) avXrj coadv vd el^ev dnoddvei 6 /3a<xi- 
Xevs 6 '1810s, The court went to mourning as if the king himself had died. 
'Q.adv vd prjv iKarjKa, As if I had not been burned. 

Commands, Exhortations, Prohibitions. 
§ 84. 

1. In peremptory commands or exhortations, 
the imperative mood is used. 

Tpdcpe, Write on ; Continue to write ; Be thou writing. * As- ypafpy, 
let him write on; Let him continue to write ; Let him b& writing. Tpdxjse, 
Write thou. *As ypd^ovv, Let them write. 

2. In peremptory prohibitions, fxrj, not, is used 
with the second person of the present or aorist 
subjunctive, or with the third person of the t im- 
perative. 

Mr) ypdcpys, Do not continue to write ; Be not writing. *A? p,r) ypd- 
<hrj, Let him not be writing. Mr) ypd\j/ys, "Write not. *As /xr) ypd\jfy, 
Let him not write. 



188 DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

3. In exhortations, mild commands, entreaties, 
or decrees, va, negatively va pr\ (sometimes simply 
/atj), is used with the present or aorist subjunctive. 

Na $vyns, 1 wish you would go away; You must go away; Please 
go away. Na (Pvyrj, He must go away. Na pi) (pvyys. You must not 
go away. Na p.i) <fivyfl, He must not go away. "A\xa vvKTaar), icdvels va 
firjv e/xnopfj va efiyjj dno to an in rov, As soon as it is night, no one shall 
go out of his house. Mi) aov Ka<o(pavf), Let it not displease you ; I hope 
you will not he offended. Mr) ai p^Xn, Care not; Be not concerned. 

4. In exhortations, a?, negatively a? ^77, with 
the first person of the present or aorist subjunc- 
tive, is used. 

But when the exhortation has reference to the 
wishes of the person or persons addressed, vd, 
negatively va fir/ (sometime* simply pur)), takes the 

place of a?, a? fjuq. 

*As ypdyjrco, Let me write. * As pi) ypityoo, Let me not write. *A? ypd- 
y^cojjievi Let us write. *As pi) ypdyj/oopev, Let ns not write. 

Na to loco, Let me see it. Na pi)v to ZSa>, Please let. me not see it. 
Na to i'Sco/xef, Please let us see it. Na pi)v to 'l8(op.eu, Let us not see 
it; We must not see it. 

Note 2. Compare Nov. Test. Matt. 7, 4. "A(pes eKJ3d\(o. 27, 
49. "Acpes 'lda>pev. 

5. Ilayacvovjjbe, irrjy atvo {lev, or irapbe, Let 
us go, often appears without va. 

6. *A ? , negatively Ms jjl rj , with the imperfect or 
aorist indicative, forms a kind of past imperative. 

*As tJtov kol TovpKos, ri p.e tovto ; Suppose he teas a Turk, what of 
that? Beit that he teas a Turk; What if he was a Turk? "Ay tov 
expepaaav, Suppose they have hanged them; let him remain hanged. 
'Efceivo onov dnepaae as dnepaae, Let that which has happened be con- 
sidered as having happened : let there be no more talk about it. *Ai» 
p eaicoTove, as inrjyaiva, If he had killed me, I should not have objected; 
let me have been killed. 

7. Sometimes a? is to be translated even if, 
though, although. 

*As aKovan Ka\ ipiva Tr)v yvtopr)V pov, Ka\ as pijv rjpai <fii\6ao(pos, Let 



DEPENDENT SENTENCES. ■ 189 

him hear my opinion also, though I am no philosopher. Na ae 6vfj.cofj.at 
TrdvTore k eav as firf pe Bvpao-ai, That I may remember you, even if you 
should not remember me. 

Wishing. 

§ 83- 

A wish is expressed by means of va, negatively 
va fir), with the present or aorist subjunctive, or 
with the imperfect or pluperfect indicative. Also, 
by means of a?, negatively a? pag, with the imper- 
fect indicative. 

The words a puir ore (av wore), elQe, or fi a tea pi, 
O that! Would that! Would God! admit of pre- 
ceding va. 

1. When the wish refers to present time, the im- 
perfect with va or a? is used. 

Na elxa •' "Apirore or Ma»capt va ei^a / Would that I might have ! O 
that I had! I wish I had! Na fjo-ovv e'3a> .' Would that thou wert 
here! MaKapt va rov evpLaica ! Would that I could find him ! EWe va 
yevovfiovv irovW, y\rr]ka va cnreTovaa ! that I might become a bird, 
that I might soar! As yevovfiovv Kadpecprns va. y\eTrecrai 's epeva ! 
Would that I might become a mirror, that thou mighiest see thyself in me! 

2. When the wish refers to future time, the 
aorist or present subjunctive, generally with va, is 
used ; the former implying momentary, the latter 
continued action. 

Na x a ^U s ' hfayest thou perish ! Perish thou! "O tl (pvrevoo eWe va. 
eKpifadfj ! What I plant, may it be rooted up ! Na ^a-at KaXa ! J\Ihy 
you continue to be well ! Na \ns koXo ! May you prosper ! God bless 
you ! Qebs aov to lAnpcoarf ! May God requite thee this kindness ! "Ap.- 
Tiore va evTvxrjo-rjs I Would that you may prosper ! 

3. When the wish refers to past time, the plu- 
perfect indicative with va, negatively va fir/, is used. 

The imperfect indicative can be used in this 
case when no ambiguity ensues. 

Uore va u?) ef^e (pe£ei ! that it had never dawned ! 2repvrj pov 



190 DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 

yvcocri, vd a e?x a npcora ! My afterthought, would that I had thee first! 
E'ide v dnedvrjo-Ka eyco dvrl aou ! Would God Iliad died for thee ! "Ap- 
ttot€ v d7re8vrjo-K.es 7xp\v ere mdo-ovv I Would God you had died before 
they caught you ! 

The Moods with Qa. 
§ 8©. 

0a, negatively Aev 3d, in the sense of must, probably, perhaps, 
takes the subjunctive or the past tenses of the indicative. 

Kavovies aKovovrai • kcittov 6a yiverai ivoXepos, Guns are heard : there 
must be fighting somewhere. Kdvevas rvxooLcoicrns 6a rjve kou avrds <pv~ 
triad, It is natural to suppose that he also is some adventurer, Qaiverai 
6d e'^nipeVtcre? ndveva j3ape\i yiopardpi novpvo novpvo, It seems you have 
saluted some wine-cask very early in the morning. Qa epades /3e/3aia ti 
eyive, You must have learned what had happened. 

The Moods with f/ Ea>?, "flare, TJplv, "Ic-a?. ' 



§ 87. 



1. "Ecos ov, "Ecos o t o v , written also 'Ecocrov, 'Ecoaorov , till, 
until, takes the aorist indicative when that which happened is stated. 

"E<bs vd, 'Ecocrov vd, 'Qy vd or'Qcrov v d, when it relates to an 
expected event, takes the aorist subjunctive. 

'Eirepipeiva ecocrov ecpdacrav, I icaited until they arrived. Qa rrepi- 
peivcopev ecocrov vd tp6dcrovv, Yve will icait until they arrive. 'ErrepLpeves 
ecocrov vd cpddcrovv, You were leaking until they should arrive. 

2. "Qcrre, negatively coo-re Bev, so that, or simply that, takes the 
indicative when it denotes actual result. 

"Qcrre vd, negatively wore vd pi], takes the present or aorist sub- 
junctive when it expresses a desired, or an expected event. 

'ETroXeprjcrav rocrov TreLcrparcoocos, cocrre Kave\s 8ev epeive £covravus, 
They fought so obstinately that no one was left alive. Etve rocrov dreXes 
coo-re vd pi) xPW-P-^Il e * s rLnore, It is so incomplete, as to be of no use 
whatever. Tloiav Bvvapiv 6a e'xj] cocrre vd peraftdXy rd iravra ; What 
power will it have, so as to change all things? 

3. Sometimes cocrre vd, that, forms the subject of a sentence. 
Elve ovvarov cocrre vd pelvovv dbidcpopoi, It is possible they may remain 

indifferent. 

4. nptv, Up\v vd, or n p or ov vd, before, is followed by the 
aorist subjunctive. 

"Eyive irplv yewrjdfjs. It was done before you were born. TIplv dpxl- 
crcopev as dxovcrcopev, Before ice In gin, let us heir. 'E^padecaae npo- 
rov va reXeccodf) i) pdxr], It grew dark before the battle was over. 



ADVERBS. 191 

5. *Io-(0S, or*lo-a>s vd, negatively "l a cos bev, "laws vd firj, 
perhaps, takes the indicative, or the subjunctive. 

"icrcos rbv ftXenco, Perhaps I see him. "la-cos rbv eniacxav, Perhaps 
they have caught him. "icrcos vd rbv iyvcopicra, Perhaps I may have 
known him. "icrcos 6d rbv lda>, or "icrcos rbv Idea, Perhaps I shall see 
him. "icrcos vd prjv eXOn, Perhaps he will not come. 



ADVERBS. 

§88. 

1 . Adverbs answering to the questions where and whither have the 
same form. Thus, 

'AAXoG, elsewhere, elsewhither, idco, here, hither, eicei, there, thither, 
indveo, up, Kara, down, pecra, in, into. 

2. Adverbs answering to whence, or from what time, are regularly 
formed by putting d n 6 , from, before those answering to where and 
when ; in which case dno admits of being written as one word with the 
adverb. Thus, 

5 'Anavrov , from there, from where you are, dnedco, hence, dne<e7, 
thence, dnepnpos, from before, dne^co, from without, dnoKciTayrjs, from 
the ground, dnoKarco^from below, dnonovrd, from nigh at hand, dnopa- 
Kpid,from afar, dnopeaa, from within, dnondvco, from above, dnonepa, 
from the other side, dnonov, whence. 

3. Adverbs answering to ivhere or whither are limited by e Is (rarely 
•npos) with the accusative. Those answering to whence are limited 
by diro with the accusative. 

'Ayvduria els ttjv Kapvraivav, Opposite Karitena. 'Ayvdvria dnb to 
Kao-rpo, Opposite but at some distance from the fort. 'Avdpecra 's rd 
(ppvdia, Between the eyebrows. "Andvco 's rd fiovvd, On the mountains. 
Tvpco 's to povaarrjpi, Round the monastery. 'ESo> '? r?) 'Po'So, Here, 
at Rhodes. 'E§cb \ epeva, Hither, to me. 'Exet *s ttjv BXaxiav, There, 
in Wallachia. 'E/cel \ Trjv KprjTnv, Thither, to Crete. 'Epnpos or 'E/x- 
npoard 's rrjv nopra rov, Before his door. "e£co \ to nepifioXt, Out in 
the garden. Karoo 'y to yiaXo, Down by the sea-shore. Koi/ra or 2i/ua 
'? tj trmri, Near the house. Meaa '$• to cmiTi, In or Into the house. 
Ilepa 's to xopid, Over to the villages. Tpiyvpco 'sto Xaipo crov, Bound 
your neck. VrjXd *s to MciKpvKapni, On the heights of Makrikdmbi. 
^rrjXu '$• Tov"EXvpno, Up to E'limbo. 

Akdpya diro ttjv e/acXncnd, Far away from the church. 'A7reSco an 
ttjv x°>pav, From here, from the town. 'Anexel an rbv totto pov, From 
there, from my place. 'Ano^co dnb ti)v eKKXnaid, On the outside of the 

church. ^AiroKarco dnb Tes eXrjes, Under the olive-trees. 'Anopecra dnb 
to o-ttltl, From within the house. 'Anondvco dnb to (3ovv6, From the top 
of the mountain. 'Anonicrco dnb rrj 6vpa, Behind the door. "Et*a> dnb 



192 ADVERBS. 

to (tttlti, Out of the house. Maicptd duo tovto to ^copid, Far from tills 
village. 

Some of these adverbs are limited also by the genitive. (See 
§ 61, 6.) 

4. The comprehensive words eSo>, exet, avTov, admit of being 
followed also by any adverb answering to where or whither. 

'ESco kovtci pov, Here, near me. 'Efico 's ttjv Kprjrr) /carco, Down here 
in Crete. 'EScb nepa, Here, on this side. 'Exei nepa '$• to x^pio, Over 
there, to the village. 'Efcet ep7rpos \ t^v ndpTa tov, There, before his 
door. Avtov kovtcl '$• to deikwo, Just about the middle of the afternoon. 

5. Adverbs of time admit of being followed by the accusative, or 
genitive, of time. (§ 65, 6. 7: 61, 9.) 

Avpiov to irpat, To-morrow morning. 'Ex#e fipabvs, or 'Ex#« to 
fipddv, Last evening. 2r)pepov to pearjpepi, To-day at noon : This 
noon. Sryuepoz/ els ttjv piav oVo^copco, To-day at one o'clock I shall de- 
part. IIou fjo-ovv Trepvo-L tov dyiov Teccpyiov ; Where were you last 
Saint George's day? 

6. The place how far is generically expressed by means of e<os or 
cos , as far as, and an adverb answering to where. 

"Ecos aVaVa>, As far as up. "Eoos avTov, As far as there. "Eco? e§d>, 
As far as here. "Eco? ckcI, As far as there. r/ Ea>s e£co, As far as out. 
"Eco? Karoo, As far as below. "Egos 7repa, As far as across. "E<os ttov ; 
How far? 

7. The time until is generically expressed by eas or <bs, until, fol- 
lowed by an adverb answering to when. 

"Ecos ttotg ; How long ? "Eccs tot's, Until then. "Eos' rwpa, Until now. 

8. Some adverbs are used adjectively or substantively ; in which 
case they take the article (§ 50, 8, 2). 

Els avTo to dvapeTa^v, In the mean time ; meanwhile. To dvTiKpv 
pepos, The opposite side. To dirdva> pepos, The upper part. To aVe- 
KeiOe tov KaarTpov, The other side of the fort. T' dnio-Topa to eppn^e, 
He threw it down in an inverted position. 'H dno-rrepa yeiTovid. T' dno- 
Taxici o-r)K<o6nK€', He awoke in the morning. To avpiov. To encode. Ta 
pTrpoo-Ta. Els to iifis. To e£co. *0 Karoo Koapos, The lower world. To 
peaa. C H Tvapcmdvco pepid. To trepa. To arjpepov. To Tcopa. 

9. Ae'i/ (formerly Ohbiv), not, is used in independent, or de- 
pendent negations ; in which case it corresponds to the classical ov. 
(§§ 82 : 830 

M ijorMr/i/, not, is used only in dependent sentences. Further, it 
is the only negative particle that can stand before the modern partici- 
ple ; as Mtjv e\ovTas, Not having. 

*0 x i , no, is the opposite of N a I , yes. In antithetic clauses it can be 
placed before all parts of speech, except verbs. 

"Yf3pio-ev o X c ipeva, dXXd tov fiao-Ckea, He has insulted not me, but 
the Jang. 



PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 193 

10. Two or more negatives belonging to the same sentence strength- 
en the negation. 

Ol/8' avra dev elve dvayiccua, Not even these tilings are necessary; 
Even these things are unnecessary. Aev rjinropoixrav ovre kclv va Idovv 
to cppovpiov, Neither could they so much as see the fort. — So when the 
verb implies a negation. 'Apveirai on dev e/ca/xe, He denies having 
done it. 



PEEPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 
§ 8». 

1. In Modern Greek all the prepositions in use take the accusative. 
(For examples, see above.) 

2. Kai, and , is commonly omitted between words of opposite mean- 
ing. 

Tpe%ovv cmava Kara), They run up and down. KAai'ei p.epa z/uyra, 
She weeps day and night. IleVe crrjKov ep.a6a va Ka/3aAAi/ceuG>, By fall- 
ing and rising I have learned to ride. 

3. After certain verbs, Kai with the indicative admits of taking the 
place of va with the subjunctive. 

Ua>s rjpiTTopel Kal irspnraTei ; How can he walk ? ' Airocpaa- laa Kai rbv 
€7r\r]pova icad' 7)p,epav, I resolved to pay him every day. "Ap^icre Kal 
eVpe^e, He began to run. 



4. "H, or, is commonly omitted between two cardinal numbers. 
$epe [xov 8tKa deKanevre poida, Bring me ten or fifteen pomegranates. 



i; 



VERSIFICATION. 

§90. 

The Romaic rhythm depends wholly on accent, as in English. That 
is, in a verse, an accented syllable receives the metrical beat. Thus, 
the modern iambus consists of an unaccented followed by an ac- 
cented syllable ; as avros, Kakf), newa. The trochee is the reverse of 
the iambus; as Aeyo), rpcoyo, Aeye, ifive. The pyrrhic consists of two 
unaccented syllables ; as the last two syllables of o-rjKo-vofiat. The 
spondee has two accented syllables ; as tI ei7res, Ka-\5>s r}p-6es, 7rou-Xia 
rco-pa. 

In Classical Greek, time being the basis of rhythm, isochronous feet 
admit, in many kinds of verse, of being interchanged with one another. 
In accentual rhythm, however, the number of syllables is fixed. If 
therefore a well-constructed verse apparently contains more than the 
requisite number of syllables, a contraction, in utterance, must take 
place according to the rules already given. (§§ 2, 2 : 3.) 

Rhyme, although now generally employed by versifiers, is not an 
indispensable element. And in popular poetry it occurs but seldom. 

Rule for Rhyme. The accented vowel-sound in the clausulas, to- 
gether with the sound or sounds following it (if there be any), should 
correspond exactly ; as kcikos tyvxpos, C^l <pv\aicr), mipevos yj/rjpLevos 
£evos, dycnrovcre eyikovae, irepaae yepaae, £r]pa6r}icav ixapddrjKav, ara>- 
fiara (TTop-ara. 

The most common rhythms are the iambic and the trochaic. 

Iambic Vekse. 
§ 9S - 

The fundamental foot of the iambic verse is the iambus. One of 
the feet of a dipody, however, admits of being a pyrrhic. 

Further, a trochee in the first place of a dipody does not seriously 
impede the iambic movement of a verse. But an arrhythmy ensues, 
if a trochee follows an iambus in the same dipody. 

1 . The iambic dipody is used in connection with other short iambic 
verses; as 

Kcu TOV KeCTTOV. 
AovXoV TtHJTOV. 

2. The iambic tripody consists of three iambuses ; as 

Trjv elfia x@e* cipyd. Acatalectic. 

Na 7TO/7 \ Tt]V $~€VlT€ia. Do. 

Vvxi s y"-M vl l v - Catalcctic. 

Xopovs 'Epcorcoj/. Do. 



IAMBIC VERSE. 195 

Verses consisting of two iambic tripodies catalectic are not very un- 
common; as 

'ExeT [xia p.epa 7Tov rpayovdovaa, 
Kat tov p,eydXov "Aprjv vfxvovaa. 
The iambic tripody acatalectic is often subjoined to the iambic di- 
meter catalectic : as 



Eva aappaTO ppaou, p.ia KvpiaKr) ra^u 
Hrjya vd aepyiaviaco p.ea 's ttjv 'EfipauK-q, 
Kat fipi<TK(o /xta 'OfiprjOTrovXa p.6vr\ Kal p.ova-)(f)' 
Another specimen : 

Tr)v eides Tr)v ^avdovXa ; 

Tr)v eida X@* s Q-Py^i 
IIoO p.7rrJK€ \ tt) (3apKovXa 

Na 7rdrj 's Tr)v tjevLTeid. 

3. The iambic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. The iambic 
dimeter catalectic is the same as the acatalectic without the last syllable. 

TXkavr)Tpa $r)p.r] (pdovepr), 
QidoyXaaaov cpapp.aK.epr}, 

MrjvvTpa tctomdv Tpop.cov, 
Aev eaKaves 's tov dpop,ov ; 
The last foot of an iambic dimeter acatalectic admits of being a pyrrhic. 
G^Epcor' avdriporare, 
TXvKe Kal IXapoyrare. 

4. The iambic trimeter- consists of six feet. Its caesura regularly 
comes in the middle of the fourth foot. 

"Oaa Kacrrpia. Ka\ av etSa | Ka\ ova Xdytao-a, 
2ai/ rrjs 'Q,prjds to Kaarpo | 8ev eXoyiaaa. 
"2apdvTa nvpyovs e\et I °^° H-dXap-a. 

5. The iambic tetrameter catalectic is simply the dimeter acatalectic 
followed by the dimeter catalectic. 

By far the greater portion of Romaic poetry is in this measure. 
Mavva p.e tovs evvid aov vlovs Kal p,e tt) pud aov Koprj, 
Ttjv Koprj tt) p-ovaKpcftr], rr\v 7roXvaya7rrjp,evrj, 
Tr)v ei^es doodeKa xpova>v k rjXios 8e aov ttjv elde, 
'2 ra. crKOT€Lva Ttjv eXovyes, *s r dcpeyya rrjv enXeKes, 
'2 t aarprj kol 's tov avyepivb r 's ecpKeiaves ra cryovpa rr]s. 
C H yeiTovid t)ev rjtjepe ncos elx €S Qvyarepa, 
Kal npotjevid aov (pi pave dno rr) Baj3vXaivri, 
Na ttjv iravTpey\rrjs pa<pta, noXv p.aKpia 's rd £eva. 
O mother, thou with thy nine sons, and with one only daughter, 
Thine only daughter, well beloved, the dearest of thy children, 
For twelve years thou didst keep the maid, the sun did not behold her, 
Whom in the darkness thou didst bathe, in secret braid her tresses, 
And by the starlight and the dawn didst wind her curling ringlets. 
Nor knew the neighborhood that thou didst have so fair a daughter, — 
When came to thee from Babylon a wooer's soft entreaty. 

(Meracppaadev vno K. K. ^eXrcovos.) 



196 VERSIFICATION. 

Trochaic Verse. 
§ 92. 

The fundamental foot of the trochaic verse is the trochee. One of 
the feet of a dipody, however, admits of being a pyrrhic. 

Further, an iambus in the first place of a dipody does not seri- 
ously impede the trochaic movement of the verse. But an arrhythmy 
ensues if the iambus follows the trochee in the same dipody. 

1. The trochaic tripody acatalectic consists of three feet. The tro- 
chaic tripody catalectic is a tripody without the last syllable. 

lioOev v dpxwf](T(0, Acatalectic. 

<&a>s fJ-ov, va Bprjvrjcrco, Do. 

Has va dvvr]6co ; Catalectic. 

(1) The trochaic tripody acatalectic and the iambic monometer are 
sometimes united into one verse. 

C H TrepccrrepovXa | 17 vvcprj pas 
Kaderai 's rbv nopo j Kai rpayovba, 
Kai ovde vib (pofidrai \ ovde ayovpo. 

(2) Sometimes the trochaic tripody catalectic is subjoined to the 
trochaic dimeter acatalectic. 

Bpe MavoXr), fipe Xefievrrj, | /3pe Kako 7raiSt, 
"Ofiopcpr) yvvaiKa e^eis | Kai 8e ^ai'pecrat ; 

2. The trochaic dimeter acatalectic consists of two feet. The trochaic 
dimeter catalectic is the same as the acatalectic without the last syllable. 

2e yva>p[£a> dirb rrjv Ko^n, Acatalectic. 

Tov arradiov ttjv rpopepr), Catalectic. 
2e yva>pi£co dnb rrjv oS/a, 

Tlov pe fiia perpaei ttjv yrj. 

3. The trochaic trimeter consists of six feet. Its caesura regularly 
comes in the middle of the third foot, and sometimes in the middle of 
the fourth. 

Tcopa ra TrovXia, \ rapa ret x^Xidovta, 
Tyjv avyr) tjvnvovv \ Kai yXvuoKeXadovve, 
Tcopa r) epopepes \ crvxvoXaXovv kcu Xeyovv* 
"0\es 77 peXaxpives \ k t) pavpopdres. 
Els fiovvb 6eX aVe/3c3 \ va Kapco Kr)iro. 
KrJ7ro ko\ Trapd<r]iTO \ Ka\ oyprjo dpneXi. 

4. The trochaic tetrameter catalectic is simply the dimeter acatalec- 
tic followed by the dimeter catalectic. 

Ti Tipr) 's to naWrjicdpi orav rrpaiTO '$• rrj (poind 
2kotoi6j} yid ttjv irarpiha pe to £i<pos *s rf] fiesta. 

THE END. 



>&-&? 



OCT 5 - 1950 



V ^ ''* 9z 



\<0 




•*> 3 




»b 3 



\W/^°\ ■ 







* v< ^ 








V $ 



1# v s 









*b 3 



1- iPV- ^■'lf;\»i 






F^ # 




.# * 






%, .A ... ^ y o 






# 



^ 



^ ^ 







A* 




- ^ / 



,0 ^ 

V V 



•^ 












<&, j 



■..^V 

^•-♦V' 










v£\ ^a^" • Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
a Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: July 2006 

^ PreservationTechnologies 

<7 ' A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 1606e 
(724)779-2111 






#o 









%" *^x i : **x-. : A * 



^ 4 








?£, ' * V "* A 






$-% 






% #" 



V V 



7 - \V^ o 













^ ' A ^. *^ n « v ^ A ^"^O^l . A 



^ ' r; ', l * A 



1 ', o 
















Jp •% 










♦ V %. ' 





<\ 



^> 'o. x"* A %, *o. x^ A 



V-' 



>?-% 



















^ 

^ 




^ ' o ■ k * A 









■&t>' 



■ 



LIBRARY of 



CONGRESS 



°003 040 431 



■ 



